20240903IPC to Staff 21(c) Supplemental - Attachment 1 - RFP - T902 Construction - 3 Exhibit B TransmissionManual.pdf

IQAW
PO�NER©
An IDACORP Company
• 1
20
ir
Transmission Manual

Transmission Revised 04/15 00-001-01
Table of Contents
00- Contents 46 kV& 69 kV Single Pole Structures
00-000-01 Transmittal Entry Log 01-141-01 69 kV TR-HL Structure
00-001-01 Table of Contents 01-151-01 46 & 69 kV TV-DC-HL
00-005-01 Page List(on-line only) Structure
00-010-01 Drawing Practices 01-180-01 46 & 69 kV DEBA2 Structure
01-190-01 46 & 69 kV ADE Structure
01- Structures 01-350-01 46 & 69 kV Tangent Structure
138 kV Single Pole Structures Two Pole Structures
01-450-01 46 kV& 69 kV GX-14D 1
01-001-01 General Structure
01-002-01 Wildlife Protection 01-455-01 46 kV& 69 kV GX-14
01-041-01 138 kV TR-HL Structure Structure
01-042-01 138 kV TRV-HL Structure 01-460-01 138 kV GX-28 Structure
01-052-01 138 kV TV-HL Structure 01-500-01 69 kV& 138 kV AXBS
01-053-01 138 kV TVS-HL Structure Structure
01-057-01 138 kV TV-DC-HL Structure 01-510-01 69 kV& 138 kV AHXS
01-058-01 138 kV TVS-DC-HL Structure Structure
01-062-01 138 kV TA-HL Structure 01-525-01 69 kV& 138 kV EXS
01-063-01 138 kV TAS-HL Structure Structure
01-065-01 138 kV C Structure
01-066-01 138 kV CS Structure Miscellaneous Structural Details
01-070-01 138 kV D1 Structure 01-700-01 Wood Poles
01-071-01 138 kV D1S Structure 01-701-01 Wood Pole Stubbing
01-072-01 138 kV D1-HP Structure 01-705-01 Obsolete Mod/Pole Butt
01-073-01 138 kV D1S-HP Structure Replacement System
01-074-01 138 kV D2 Structure 01-710-01 Numbering Transmission Line
01-075-01 138 kV D2S Structure Structures
01-080-01 138 kV D2S-HP Structure Steel Structures
01-081-01 138 kV D2-HP Structure
01-800-01 Light Duty Steel Poles
RNPOMR Table of Contents
AlI—ORPCa 11Y

00-001-02 Revised 04/15
Transmission
Other Structures Types 02- Grounding
01-900-01 Multiple Pole and Lattice
02-002-01 Grounding Wood Pole
Structure Types Transmission Structures
OBSOLETE Structures 02-003-01 Grounding Fences, Buildings,
01-9040-01 Obsolete 138 kV TR Structure and Other Metal Objects
01-9050-01 Obsolete 138 kV TV Structure 02-005-01 Grounding KPF Switching
01-9051-01 Obsolete 138 kV TVS Structures (Non-SEO)
Structure 02-006-01 Grounding KPF Switching
01-9055-01 Obsolete 138 kV TV-DC Structures (With SEO)
Structure 02-010-01 Grounding Morgan 138 kV
01-9056-01 Obsolete 138 kV TVS-DC Switching Structures
Structure 02-100-01 Characteristics of Copper&
01-9060-01 Obsolete 138 kV TA Structure Copperweld Wire
01-9061-01 Obsolete 138 kV TAS 03- Structure Hardware
Structure
01-9100-01 Obsolete 69 kV & 138 kV Note: Refer to the Idaho Power Materials
AXS Structure Manual for detailed information for
01-9140-01 Obsolete 69 kV TR Structure transmission hardware.
01-9150-01 Obsolete 46 kV & 69 kV TV-
DC Structure 04- Guys and Anchors
01-9352-01 Obsolete 46 kV & 69 kV
T (Pin) Structure 04-001-01 Screw Anchors
01-9353-01 Obsolete 46 kV & 69 kV 04-100-01 Disk Anchors
T (Ridge Iron) Structure 04-300-01 Rock Anchors
01-9354-01 Obsolete 46 kV & 69 kV 04-500-01 Pole Eye Assembly
T (Post) Structure 04-501-01 Guying Assembly
01-9360-01 Obsolete 46 kV & 69 kV (For Pole Eyes)
TBC (Ridge Iron) Structure 04-505-01 2-Way Pole Band Assembly
01-9361-01 Obsolete 46 kV & 69 kV TBC 04-506-01 Guying Assembly
Structure (For Pole Band)
01-9610-01 Obsolete 46 kV & 69 kV T-ML 04-600-01 Grounding and Insulating Guys
Pin Structure 04-990-01 Anchor System Corrosion
01-9615-01 Obsolete 46 kV & 69 kV T-ML
Post Structure
01-9620-01 Obsolete 46 kV & 69 kV TBS-
ML Structure
Table of Contents "ARP

Transmission Revised 04/15 00-001-03
05- Arms and Braces 09- Switches
05-200-01 Guy Brace Assembly 09-100-01 Transmission Line Airbreak
05-205-01 Knee &Vee Brace Assemblies Switch Numbering
09-500-01 Airbreak Switch Steel Standing
06- Insulators Mat
06-010-01 Suspension and Deadend 10- Sags and Dampers
Insulators
06-200-01 Post Insulators 10-050-01 Vibration Dampers
06-250-01 Pin Insulators 10-500-01 Conductor Sags/Tensions on
Wood Pole Lines
07- Conductors
11- Armor Rods and Ties
07-005-01 Thermal Ampacity of
Overhead Line Conductors 11-010-01 Armor Rods
07-010-01 Characteristics of Aluminum 11-020-01 Formed Wire Splices
and Steel Bare Cable 11-300-01 Wraplock Ties
08- Conductor Hardware 12- Clearances
08-100-01 Single Insulator String 12-010-01 Airspace Evaluation
Suspension Assemblies Requirements
08-110-01 Single Insulator String Jumper 12-100-01 Transmission Line Clearing
Assemblies Practices
08-130-01 Single Insulator String Running
Angle Assemblies 13- Design Criteria
08-150-01 Single Insulator String
13-010-01 General Transmission Line
Deadend Assemblies
08-170-01 Shield Wire Assemblies Design Criteria
08-200-01 Conductor Clamps, 13-020-01 Insulator Selection for
Connectors, & Splices Mechanical Strength
RNPOMR Table of Contents
AlI—ORPCa 11Y

O °'
O ^" cd aQi p U
it
O O 3
CD co�
y _
M bA "" y Cn O G cd O N p
O O y O ' 0 p O bA > N
by;E L� = ;a) 3 � .� bn ci y >
ct
40
04
in
cd
ct
.� U "C U y
.. cd C"r — cd cd U U
U � U s., U ,S' .,� b
L p N
rU to
un
cd O p Cd �' °� .a 'C �' U O � O U N U
v� p v' U = O N U s. O �' m U bA Q p
03
En
cn FA ' F. r O " '. U O
"0 �N
U
in.-tg
Cd
�+ O Cd �O U n O -C p cd I'D
�4 O cd �. Q. cn CD
H C aj O > +� •C o U Q 'C 'C Q" O O
ct
U U cd _N �"r ,�_ U bq s� U cd " bU U ram.+ cd bA _

00-010-02
Transmission
Exploded Bolt Assemblies.When it is
practical, all bolt assemblies have been
drawn slightly exploded. This adds to the
clarity of the drawing, enabling the reader to
22,47 discern the various parts used in the
s�b°"5°h assembly. In practice,they should,of
8„ L course,be tightened appropriately.
a
5341
5350
5170
5279
Break-away Views Provided
Components of Bolt Assembly
Shown Slightly Expanded for Clarity
Reduced(Enlarged)Assemblies.
Occasionally, a piece of equipment obscures
the detail to be illustrated.At other times,
the detail to be illustrated is too small. In
these instances,the item,which is obscuring
Separate Details Provided the detail may be reduced to slightly less
than actual size and the item which is too
Double coil lock washers are used small to see might be slightly enlarged.
wherever locking washers are required
including all insulator studs and steel pins
and all bracket and crossarm bolts that are
not otherwise grounded. Locking washers
are not needed for bolts under constant
tension, such as an eyebolt deadend.
This horizontal post
insulator has been
slightly reduced in size
to keep from obscuring
information around the
pole eye attachment
Double coil lock washer points.
Reduced Assembly
Double coil lock washers are used wherever
locking washers are required
Drawing Practices ''per
Revised 10/03

Transmission 00-010-03
Bill of Materials
25448 Cat.ID Qty Description
4845 6 CLV THMB BNK
5034 1 ROD GRD CW 5/8 X 8 FT
18" See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
min. See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
See Bolt Sch 6 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long)
The cadweld connection 5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
to the ground rod has been 5376 4 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
enlarged to yield a 28806 3 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
clearer illustration.
Bolt Schedule
Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Classt
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
Enlarged Assembly 5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Anti-split - - 1 1 1
Flat and Gain Bases.Bolt schedules have 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
been incorporated throughout the structural Anti-split 1 1 - - -
BLT GA
section of this manual.To save space,bolts 5123 Poe EyeV MCH 3/4X12 2
which pass through equipment that is 5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
mounted flat against the pole are designated Pole Eye 4 4 8 12 10
in a flat base grouping of the table. 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
Pole Eye 4 8 4
5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
Similarly,bolts that pass through equipment Pole Eye 4 - - - -
that tends to stand off from the pole some 5137 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X14
Post Ins. - - - - 0(2)
distance are designated in a gain base 5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
grouping of the table. Post Ins. - 0(2) 0(4) 0(6) 2(4)
5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
The following illustration and tables Post Ins. 2(2) 2(4) 4(2) 6(0) 4(0)
5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
demonstrate these points.Note that the bolt Post Ins. 2(2) 4(0) 2(0) - -
quantities shown in the Bolt Schedule are 5141 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X22
first for the gain base,with the alternate flat Post Ins. 2(2) - - - -
base quantities shown in parentheses. t gain base(flat base)
0
0
Gain Base Flat Base
��PO R Drawing Practices
Revised 10/03

00-010-04
Transmission
PG Clamps.Parallel groove clamps are
sometimes moved from their actual installed
location to one which helps to unclutter the
drawing.The object is to make a clearer
presentation. The following examples serve
as illustration of this convention.
PG clamp shown in PG clamp shown
the installed position on the pole for clarity
Drawing Practices ' er
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-001-01
Structures Found in This Section
The contents of this section represent only a portion of those structures which are found on the
Idaho Power Company transmission system. Several types of structures are represented herein.
The largest group of structures in this collection is a group of structures which have been
identified as the preferred structures for current and future transmission line construction.
Another group of structures,which is by no means completely represented, is a set of older
structures that were once used but are now either obsolete or used only to match existing
construction.These are maintained in the book for ease in maintenance and replacement work.
Structures Not Found in This Section
Many existing structures are not documented in this manual. Those performing maintenance on
or replacement of these"other" structures should contact T&D Design for response to any
questions which they might have concerning them in accomplishing their assigned tasks.
�PDAHO
O General
Revised 10/03

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-002-01
Wildlife Protection
Idaho Power's Bird Management Protection Criteria
Program
The two(2)basic principles of avian protection
Birds commonly use power poles for perching, are isolation (separation) and insulation
hunting, and nesting which increases their risk (coverings). Transmission designs utilize
of electrocution. Several laws protect raptors and isolation only.
other migratory bird species. It is Idaho Power's
policy that new or rebuilt lines be constructed to Avian Symbols
avian protection guidelines or bird safe
construction standards. This symbol on any construction
illustration means that the structure,
A Geographic Information System was used to if built as shown, is not avian
develop a map delineating 3 zones within our protected. (zone 1),no restriction)
service territory that would govern which design
guidelines were appropriate for new construction This symbol on any construction
and the rebuilding of lines: illustration means that the structure, if
built as shown,is avian protected for
1) no raptor restrictions, hawks and owls(zone 2),40").
2) a 40" guideline where hawks and owls
would be found but we do not expect eagles This symbol on any construction
to be found, and illustration means that the
structure, if built as shown, is
3) a 60" guideline where eagles would be avian protected for any kind of NW
found.Note that all federal and state(BLM, bird, including eagles (zone 3), 60").
FS) land is to be built by zone 3, eagle safe
standards. (The 138 kV Post Insulator and 138 kV"Steel
Construction"Polymer Deadend meets the
Maps are located on-line. "Eagle"clearance requirements.)
"`ppMR. Wildlife Protection
Al iDA-c P11V

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-041-01
Application. The "TR HL"structure is the preferred method to build a 138 kV TRiangular
configuration with polymer"Hi-Lite" insulators. It is used for tangent construction where no angles are
involved and where a shield wire is not required.
Note 10&3 Bill of Materials
00 481
4738
Detail D
Detail A
❑®
2'-8" 4744
1'-4"
o o
4816
VVV
0 0
0 0
See Note 1
Note 1,2&3 Bill of Materials
Detail B
12'-0"
min.
See Note 2
Detail C
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor reference
point for calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution underbuild.
This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If there is a possibility of energizing a broken or sagging down guy then guy strain
insulators are required.Anchor type may also require the use of guy strain insulators. See Section 04.
�PMR. 138 W TR-HL Structure

01-041-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 08-300 Suspension Clamps
08-200 Insulator Conductor Clamps 11-010 Armor Rod
08-205 Clamp Top Adapter
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.
22147 3 Detail A
5279 �3. 24" 5372
max.
5341 See bit sch
5371
5350 5170 3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
4708
5376 (See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
See bolt sch
O O
12" O O 18"min.
T5343 5374
25448
22150
5281
5352 18"
28806 10%of min.
5173 pole height
5700 +21-01.
5034
Detail B
Post Insulator Mount
(TI138HHPD)
Detail C
Pole Grounding
IWM WHO
138 kV TR-HL Structure WPOMRR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-041-03
Bill of Materials
5:22150 See the Work Order and PassPort for current
Bill of Materials information.
See bolt sch
Cat. ID Qty Description
5173 Note 1 3 CLP INS ALUM(size)
Note 2 2 CLP SUSP AL(size)
Note 3 3 ARMOR ROD AL(size)
5281 28806 3 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
4738 3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6
4706 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8'
4738 1 INS VERT CLP 138PLMR
O 5343 4744 2 INS HRZ 138 PLMR WD
4805 1 ADPTR CLT V138KV INS
5352 4816 2 CLV Y BALL 52-3
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8'
Insulator assembly 3657 See Bolt Sch BLT GALV DA 7/8X(long)
reduced in size to
keep from hiding See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
other details 28806 See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long)
5700 5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5173 6 WSHR CRVD 4X4X15/16
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8"
5281 2 CLIP BONDING 7/8"
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8"
Detail D 5342 2 NUT MF 3/4"
Post Insulator Mount 5343 10 NUT MF 7/8"
(TI138VP) 5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5352 6 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
Bolt Schedule 5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE ZINC EL STL
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376 6 STAPLE MILD SQ BARBED
Cat.ID Description Qty Per Pole Class 5700 3 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3 22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
5078 BLT GALV DA 7/8X24 22149 2 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
Post Mnt. - - 2 2 2 22150 8 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
5079 BLT GALV DA 7/8X26 25448 1 CONN. CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
Post Mnt. 2 2 - - - 1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12 clamps and clamp top adapters.
Anti-split - - 1 1 1 2 Refer to page 08-200-02 for suspension clamps.
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14 3 Refer to page 11-010-01 for armor rods.
Anti-split 1 1 - - -
5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16 PassPort Codes
Top Mnt. - - 2 2 2
5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
Top Mnt. 2 2 - - - CU Codes Qty
TASB 1
T1138HHPD 1
TI138VP 1
IDAHO
"` R„ 138 kV TR-HL Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-042-01
Note 1 &3 Bill of Materials Application. The 138 W
4805 "TRV—HL"structure is a
modified TR structure with
polymer"Hi-Lite"insulators.
It is used for tangent
4738 construction with no shield
wire or where small angles are
involved. It is designed for use
as a transition structure
Detail D between the TR HL
configuration and vertical
Detail A deadend or running angle
structures. It would normally
be the first structure out from a
2'-8" 4744 D1,D2, C1, or C2 structure.
1'-4"
o
4816
0
0
Note 1,2&3 Bill of Materials
6'-0" Detail B
0
VV
0
—See Note 1
12'-0"
min.
See Note 2
Detail C
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor
reference point for calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild.This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans,consult with
engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If there is a possibility of energizing a broken or sagging down guy then guy
strain insulators are required.Anchor type may also require the use of guy strain insulators.See
Section 04.
�PMR. 138 W TRV-HL Structure

01-042-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 1 1-010 Armor Rod
08-300 Suspension Clamps
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
L
3., Detail A
22147 24°
5372
5279 � max.Y
5371
5341 See bit sch
3657
5350 5170
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
4706
5376 (See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
22150
18"min.
2�18806
5281 See bolt sch
5374
25448
5700 0
1'-0" 0 18"
10%of min.
1 4744 pole height
5343
5034
5352 5173
Detail B
Post Insulator Mount
(TI138HP) Detail C
Pole Grounding
IWM WHO
138 kV TRV-HL Structure WPOMRR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-042-03
Bill of Materials
5:22150 See the Work Order and PassPort for current
Bill of Materials information.
See bolt sch
Cat. ID Qty Description
5173
Note 1 3 CLIP INS ALUM(size)
Note 2 2 CLIP SUSP AL(size)
5281 Note 3 3 ARMOR ROD AL(size)
28806 3 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
4738 3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6
4706 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8'
❑° 5343 4738 1 INS VERT CLIP 138 PLMR
4744 3 INS HRZ 138 PLMR WD
4805 1 ADPTR CLT V 138 KV INS
5352 4816 3 CLV Y BALL 52-3
Insulator assembly 3657 5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8'
reduced in size to See bolt sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
keep from hiding See bolt sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long)
other details 28806
5700 5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5173 6 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8"
5281 3 CLIP BONDING 7/8"
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8"
5343 6 NUT MF 7/8"
Detail D 5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
Post Insulator Mount 5352 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
(TI138VP) 5371 1 lb NAIL CW 10D
5372 40 CLIP GIRD WIRE
Bolt Schedule 5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376 6 STAPLE MILD SQ BARBED
5700 3 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6
Cat.ID Description Qty Per Pole Class 22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3 22150 6 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12 25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14 1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
Anti-split 1 1 - - - clamps and clamp top adapters.
2 Refer to page 08-200-02 for suspension clamps.
5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16 3 Refer to page 11-010-01 for armor rods.
Insulator - - 4 4 4
5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
Insulator 2 4 - - - PassPort Codes
5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
Insulator 2 -
5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16 CU Codes Qty
Top Mint. - - 2 2 2 TASB 1
5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18 T1138HP 2
Top Mint. 2 2 - - - T1138VP 1
IDAHO
"`POINER,, 138 W TRV-HL Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-052-01
Application. The Tangent Vertical structure with polymer `Hi-Lite'insulators or "TV-HL"is a 138
W structure used in tangent construction or where there are small angles involved and where a shield
wire is not required. This configuration is seldom used in new construction but it is used to replace similar
structures in existing lines.
Detail A
T-T 4744
0
0
T-6" 4816
1, Z
iNote 1,2&3 Bill of Materials
I o
See Note 1
12'-0"
min.
See Note 2
Detail C
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor reference
point for calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution underbuild.
This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If there is a possibility of energizing a broken or sagging down guy then guy strain
insulators are required.Anchor type may also require the use of guy strain insulators. See Section 04.
�PMRa. 138 W TV-HL Structure

01-052-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 11-010 Armor Rod
08-300 Suspension Clamps
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22147
3 Detail A
52793
24" 5372
5341 See bit sch max.
5350
5170 5371
3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
4706
22150
m� 28806 5376
(See Section 02-002
See bolt sch
5281 for Grounding Details),%\1'-0" 5700 0 }
18"min.
1I 4744 5374
25448
5343
5352 5173 18"
10%of min.
pole height
Detail B +21-01,
Post Insulator Mount
(TI138HP) 5034
Detail C
Pole Grounding
IWM WHO
138 kV TV-HL Structure WPOMRR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-052-03
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
Cat. ID Qty Description 5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Note 1 3 CLP INS ALUM(size) Anti-split 1 1 1
Note 2 3 CLP SUSP AL(size) 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
Note 3 3 ARMOR ROD AL(size) Anti-split 1 1
28806 5 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6 Insulator - - 6 6 6
4706 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT 5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
4744 3 INS HRZ 138 PLMR WD Insulator 4 6 - - -
4816 3 CLV Y BALL 52-3 5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT Insulator 2 - - - -
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long) PassPort Codes
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5173 6 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN CU Codes Qty
5281 3 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN TASB 1
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN T1138HP 3
5343 6 NUT MF 7/8 IN
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5352 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376 6 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
5700 3 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
22150 6 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
clamps and clamp top adapters.
2 Refer to page 08-200-02 for suspension clamps.
3 Refer to page 11-010-01 for armor rods.
IDAHO
"` R„ 138 kV TV-HL Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-053-01
Application. The Tangent Vertical structure with a Shield wire and polymer `Hi-Lite'insulators or
"TVS-HL"is a 138 W structure used in tangent construction or where there are small angles involved
and where a shield wire is required.
Detail A
�� Detail B
8'-0"
�l � Detail D
r
3'_6"
4744
3'-6" 4816
Note 1,2&3 Bill of Materials
1 —See Note 1
12'-0"
min.
See Note 2
Detail C
EL
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor reference
point for calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution underbuild.
This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If there is a possibility of energizing a broken or sagging down guy then guy strain
insulators are required. Anchor type may also require the use of guy strain insulators. See Section 04.
RNPOMR, 138 W TVS-HL Structure

01-053-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see pages:
02-002-01 Grounding 11-010-01 Armor Rod
08-200-01 Insulator Conductor Clamps
Details. (See page 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
Detail A
22147
� Detail B
5279 �� 3
24" 5372
5341
max.
See blt sch
5170 5371
5350 3657
Detail A f
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB) f
I
(See Section 02-002
f for Grounding Details)
28806 22149 r
5231
r18"
5342
5351 5374
25448
Note 2 —� 5280
5172 10%of
pole height
+21-01,
Detail B 5034
Shield Wire Mounting Assembly
(TBSW)
Detail C
Pole Grounding
138 kV TVS-HL Structure '99ppMRP
Al-CORPCa 1V

Transmission Revised 03/15 01-053-03
Bill of Materials
22150 28806 See the Work Order and PassPort for current
5281 See bolt sch Bill of Materials information.
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note 1 3 CLIP INS ALUM(size)
Note 2 3 CLIP SUSP AL(size)
1'-0" 5700 Note 3 3 ARMOR ROD AL(size)
0 28806 5 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6
i HO9E1 4744 4744 3 INS HRZ 138 PLMR WD
4816 3 CLV Y BALL 52-3
5343 5034 1 ROD GIRD CW 5/8 X 8'
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
5352 5173 See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long)
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5172 2 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X13/16
Detail D 5173 6 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16
Post Insulator Mount 5231 1 BRKT SHLDWIRE 3/4X16
(TI138HP) 5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8"
5280 1 CLIP BONDING 3/4"
5281 3 CLIP BONDING 7/8"
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8"
5342 1 NUT MF 3/4"
Bolt Schedule 5343 6 NUT MF 7/8"
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
Description Qty Per Pole Class 5352 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
Cat. ID Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12 5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
Anti-split - - 1 1 1 5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14 5700 3 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
Anti-split 1 1 - - -
22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16 22149 1 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
Insulator - - 4 6 6 22150 6 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18 25448 1 CONN,CU,GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
Insulator 2 2 2 - -
5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20 1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
4 4 - clamps and clamp top adapters.
2 Refer to page 08-200-02 for suspension clamps.
3 Refer to page 11-010-01 for armor rods.
PassPort Codes
CU Codes Qty
TASB 1
TBSW 1
T1138HP 3
IDAHO
"`POVIIIE R,, 138 kV TVS-HL Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-057-01
Application. The "TV-DC-HL"(Tangent Vertical Double Circuit with polymer"Hi—Lite"
insulators)is a 138 W structure used for tangent construction or where there are small angles involved
and where a shield wire is not required. In cases where two circuits are needed,it is a cost effective
alternative to constructing two separate lines.For new construction, structures built with polymer
insulators are preferred.
Detail A Air
Detail B
1'-0" 0 0
0 0
0 0
4816
6'-0"
0 0
IV V
0 0
0 0
6'-0" Note 1,2&3 Bill of Materials
4744
0 0
0 0
0 0
r See Note 1
12'-0"
min.
See Note 2
Detail C
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor
reference point for calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild.This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with
engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If there is a possibility of energizing a broken or sagging down guy then guy
strain insulators are required.Anchor type may also require the use of guy strain insulators. See
Section 04.
�PMRa. 138 W TV-DC-HL Structure

01-057-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 1 1-010 Armor Rod
08-300 Suspension Clamps
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22147
5279 3" 3^ Detail A
�
5341S,
341 See bit sch 24" 5372
max.
5350 5170
S
5371
3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
See bolt sch 4706
5376 (See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
O O
TTO O
1 5343
22150 }
5281 18"min.
5352 1
28806 5374
25448
5
5700 173
18"
10%of min.
Detail B pole height
Post Insulator Mount +2'-0"
(TI138HHPD)
5034
Detail C
Pole Grounding
IWM WHO
138 kV TV-DC-HL Structure WPOWERR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-057-03
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5078 BLT GALV DA 7/8X24
Cat. ID Qty Description Insulator 2 4 6 6 6
5079 BLT GALV DA 7/8X26
Note 1 6 CLP INS ALUM(size) Insulator 4 2 - - -
Note 2 6 CLP SUSP AL(size) 5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Note 3 6 ARMOR ROD AL(size) Anti-split - - 1 1 1
28806 5 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6
4706 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8' Anti-split 1 1
4744 6 INS HRZ 138 PLMR WD
4816 6 CLV Y BALL 52-3 PassPort Codes
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8'
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV DA 7/8X(/ong)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(/ong) CU Codes Qty
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16 TASB 1
5173 12 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16 T1138HHPD 3
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5"
5281 3 CLIP BONDING 7/8"
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8"
5343 24 NUT MF 7/8"
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5352 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376 6 STAPLE MILD SQ BARBED
5700 3 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
22150 18 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
clamps and clamp top adapters.
2 Refer to page 08-200-02 for suspension clamps.
3 Refer to page 11-010-01 for armor rods.
IDAHO
"` R„ 138 kV TV-DC-HL Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-058-01
Application. The "TVS-DC-HL"(Tangent Vertical with Shield wire Double Circuit with polymer
"Hi-Lite insulators) is a 138 W structure used for tangent construction or where there are small angles
involved and where a shield wire is required. In cases where two circuits are needed, it is a cost effective
alternative to constructing two separate lines.For new construction, structures built with polymer
insulators are preferred.
Detail A
6"
Detail B
8'-0"
Detail D
0 0
0 0
0 0
4816
6'-0"
r
0
4ftt�q--
0
Note 1,2&3 Bill of Materials
6'-0"
4744
0 0
VVV
0 P- See
Note 1
12--0"
min.
See Note 2
Detail C
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor reference
point for calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution underbuild.
This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If there is a possibility of energizing a broken or sagging down guy then guy strain
insulators are required.Anchor type may also require the use of guy strain insulators. See Section 04.
IORW
NEW—PMRa. 138 W TVS-DC-HL Structure

01-058-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 1 1-010 Armor Rod
08-300 Suspension Clamps
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
Detail A
22147
Detail B
52793
24" � 5372
5341 See blt sch max.
5371
5350 5170 3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
(See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
5231
1*6
221496" 18"min.
5342 25448
Note 2 5280 18"
10%of min.
5172 pole height
+21-01,
5034
Detail B
Shield Wire Mounting Assembly
(TBSW)
Detail C
Pole Grounding
IWM WHO
138 kV TVS-DC-HL Structure WPOMRR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-058-03
Bill of Materials
See bolt sch
See the Work Order and PassPort for current
Bill of Materials information.
O O Cat. ID Qty Description
12" O O Note 1 6 CLP INS ALUM(size)
Note 2 7 CLP (size)
5343 Note 3 7 ARMOROR ROD
AL(size)
28806 6 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
22150 3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6
4078 1 CN WLD 5/8 ROD46 CU
5281 4744 6 INS HRZ 138 PLMR WD
5352 4816 6 CLV Y BALL 52-3
28806 5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
5173
5700 See Bolt Sch BLT GALV DA 7/8X(/ong)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(/ong)
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
Detail D 5173 12 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16
Mount 5172 2 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X13/16
Post Insulator5231 1 BRKT SHLDWIRE 3/4X16
(TI138H
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 1 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
Bolt Schedule 5281 4 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
Cat.ID Description Qty Per Pole Class 5342 1 NUT MF 3/4 IN
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3 5343 24 NUT MF 7/8 IN
5078 BLT GALV DA 7/8X24 5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
Insulator - 2 4 6 6 5351 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5079 BLT GALV DA 7/8X26 5352 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
Insulator 4 4 2 - - 5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5080 BLT GALV DA 7/8X28 5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
Insulator 2 5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12 5700 3 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6
Anti-split - - 1 1 1 22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14 22149 1 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
Anti-split 1 1 - - - 22150 18 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
PassPort Codes 1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
clamps and clamp top adapters.
2 Refer to page 08-200-02 for suspension clamps.
CU Codes Qty 3 Refer to page 11-010-01 for armor rods.
TASB 1
TBSW 1
T1138HHPD 3
IDAHO
"` R„ 138 kV TVS-DC-HL Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-062-01
Application. The Tangent Angle with polymer ' Hi-Lite® 'insulators or TA HL structure is used to
turn small angles between 0°-15°. It is a 138 W,vertical configuration,angle structure built with polymer
insulators.A similar structure,the TAS HL, includes provisions for a shield wire. See page 01-063.
Notes:
3" Detail A 1. Design Reference. Use the
6,. a elevation of the bottom bolt of
Detail D the lowest insulator mount as a
1'6" 5" �� �`� conductor reference point for
calculating vertical clearances.
° 2. Framing Reference. Maintain
° 4727 a minimum of 12'to the
See note 3. crossarm mounting bolt of any
Note 1,2&3 Bill of Materials distribution underbuild.This
dimension is valid for spans of
6'-0" 300'or less. For longer spans,
consult with engineering.
4816 Detail C 3. Construction Practice. If
there is a possibility of
Detail B 5311 energizing a broken or sagging
down guy then guy strain
° insulators are required.Anchor
type may also require the use
of guy strain insulators. See
Section 04.
4744
6'-0"
5316
.® o
4060 � � 3669
3'-0"
12'-0"min. See note 1.
to distribution 5700
underbuild. 5310
See note 2.
16max
�'')1 (Distribution) `.
Small Line Angles (up to 151) Guy Anchoring
p R,. 138 W TA-HL Structure
AlI—ORPCa 11Y

01-062-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 04-600 Insulating Guys
04-100 Anchoring 08-200 Insulator Conductor Clamps
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 11-010 Armor Rods
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22147 3" Detail A
24" 5372
5279 Y max. O
5341 See bit sch 5371
5350 5170 3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB) 4706
5376 (See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
22150 28806
5281 T
�Q [ 18 min.
5374
5700 25448
0
;f
¢96 18"
5343 10%of min.
pole height
+2_0.
53524� 5173
5034
Detail B
Post Insulator Mount
(TI138HP)
Detail C
Pole Grounding
138 kV TA-HL Structure '99ppMRP
Al-CORPCa 1V

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-062-03
3657 Bill of Material
28806 5328 See the Work Order and PassPort for current
Bill of Materials information.
See bolt Sch
5280 Cat. ID Qty Description
CTQ 4845 Note 1 3 CLIP INS ALUM(size)
OO �� Note 2 3 CLIP SUSP AL(size)
O a 5316 Note 3 3 ARMOR ROD AL(size)
__0 28806 6 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
5342 3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6
3669 50 lb WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS
5351 4060 4060 2 CN PG 1 BOT 6-2/0
4706 1 MLDG GIRD PSTC 1X8'
5176 4727 2 INS GUY STIR30000 78
5700 4744 3 INS HRZ 138 PLMR WD
4816 3 CLV Y BALL 52-3
4845 2 CLV THMB BNK
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8'
Detail D See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long)
Pole Eye Assembly See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
(TPEA1) 5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5173 6 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16
5176 4 WSHR CRVD 3X4X15/16
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8"
5280 2 CLIP BONDING 3/4"
Bolt Schedule 5281 5 CLIP BONDING 7/8"
5310 1 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8
Cat.ID Description Qty Per Pole Class 5311 1 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8 LNG
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3 5316 6 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS
5328 2 EYE POLE PLT HD
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12 5341 1 NUT MF 5/8"
Anti-split - - 1 1 1 5342 4 NUT MF 3/4"
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14 5343 10 NUT MF 7/8"
Anti-split 1 1 5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12 5351 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
Pole Eye - - - - 2 5352 5 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
Pole Eye t 2 2 2 5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
5137 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X14 5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
Post Mnt. - - - 0 0 5376 6 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
Pole Eye t 2 2 2 2 - 5700 7 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16 22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
Post Mnt. 0 0 4 2 4 22150 6 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18 25448 1 CONN,CU,GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
Pole Eye t 2 2 - - - 1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18 clamps and clamp top adapters.
Post Mnt. 4 4 2 4 2 2 Refer to page 08-200-02 for suspension clamps.
5127 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20 3 Refer to page 11-010-01 for armor rods.
Post Mnt. 2 2 - - -
t For bonding to the top bolt as shown, increase 1 bolt for PassPort Codes
each pole eye by 2".
CU Codes Qty
TASB 1
T1138HP 3
TPEA1 2
IDAHO
"`POVIIE R,, 138 kV TA-HL Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-063-01
Application. The Tangent Angle with Shield wire and polymer `Hi—Lite®'insulators or TAS-HL
structure is used to turn small angles between 0°-15°. It is a 138 W,vertical configuration, angle structure
built with polymer insulators.For new construction,the TAS-HL is preferred
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the
ZofMaterials
„ Detail A elevation of the bottom bolt of
the lowest insulator mount as a
Detail E conductor reference point for
o calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain
8'-0" a minimum of 12'to the
crossarm mounting bolt of any
4727 distribution underbuild. This
See note 3. dimension is valid for spans of
vVVVVVV ° 300'or less. For longer spans,
° consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If
Note 1,2&3 Bill of Materials there is a possibility of
energizing a broken or sagging
6'-0" down guy then guy strain
5311 insulators are required.Anchor
Detail C type may also require the use
4816 of guy strain insulators. See
Section 04.
Detail B
4744
Detail D
6'-0"
4060 3669
3'-0"
0
1
12'-0"min. See note 1.
to distribution 5700
underbuild.
See note 2. 5310
15 16
rTEX mac
PsWbLim)
-----------------
Small Line Angles (Up to 15°) Guy Anchoring
AM
�PMR. 138 W TAS-HL Structure
al—OW C° 1

01-063-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 08-174 Shield Wire Assembly
04-100 Anchoring 08-200 Conductor Clamps
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 11-010 Armor Rods
04-600 Insulating Guys
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
Detail A
22147
Detail B
5279 3
24" � 5372
5341 See bit sch max.
5371
5350 5170
3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
(See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
i�22150
28806
5281 See bolt sch
18"min.
5374
I 25448
1'-0" 5700 0
0
1 18"
4744 10%of min.
5343 pole height
+21-01.
5352 5173 5034
Detail B
Post Insulator Mount
(TI138HP)
Detail C
Pole Grounding
IWMI P1HO
138 kV TAS-H L Structure W POMRR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-063-03
3657 Bill of Materials
28806 5328 See the Work Order and PassPort for current
Bill of Materials information.
See bolt Sch
5280
4845 Cat. ID Qty Description
® Note 1 3 CLP INS ALUM(size)
0 Note 2 4 CLP SUSP AL(size)
5316 Note 3 4 ARMOR ROD AL(size)
5342 28806 8 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6
5351 4060 3669 50 Ib WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS
4060 2 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0
5176 4727 2 INS GUY STIR30000 78
5700 4744 3 INS HRZ 138 PLMR WD
4816 3 CLV Y BALL 52-3
4838 1 SHKL AN (size)
4845 2 CLV THMB BNK
Detail D. Pole Eye Assembly 5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8'
(Cast Curved Washers) See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
(TPEA1) See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long)
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
28806 5173 6 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16
5176 2 WSHR CRVD 3X4X15/16
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8"
See bolt sch 5280 2 CLIP BONDING 3/4"
5280 5281 3 CLIP BONDING 7/8"
4845 5310 1 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8
o OO 5311 1 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 LNG
5328 0 5316 6 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS
5316 5328 3 EYE POLE PLT HD
5342 5341 1 NUT MF 5/8"
5342 4 NUT MF 3/4"
5351 4060 5343 6 NUT MF 7/8"
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
3657 5351 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5700 5352 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5371 1 Ib NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
Detail E. Pole Eye Assembly 5700 7 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6
(Back-to-Back Heavy Duty Pole Eye Plates) 22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
(TPEA) 22150 6 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
clamps and clamp top adapters.
2 Refer to page 08-200-02 for suspension clamps.
3 Refer to page 11-010-01 for armor rods.
�PMRa. 138 kV TAS-HL Structure

01-063-04 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Bolt Schedule PassPort Codes
Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class CU Codes Qty
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3 TASB 1
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12 T1138HP 3
Anti-split - - 1 1 1 TPEA 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14 TPEA1 1
Anti-split 1 1 - - -
5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
Pole Eye 2
5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
Pole Eye - - 2 2 -
5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
Pole Eye 2 2 2 2 2
5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
Pole Eye 2 2 - - -
5137 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X14
Post Mnt. - - - - 0
5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
Post Mnt. 0 0 0 0 4
5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
Post Mnt. 2 4 4 6 2
5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
Post Mnt. 4 2 2 - -
138 W TAS-HL Structure "`ERR

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-065-01
Application. The Corner or `C'structure is used to turn angles of up to 30°. It is a 138-kV,vertical
configuration,running angle structure built with polymer insulators or ball and socket disc insulators.
Conductor tension must be limited such that the transverse load,with a 1:1 guy slope, does not exceed the
5,900 lb design limit of the guy assembly. Line angles above 30'are possible with small conductors,
provided the pole eye limit is not exceeded. See page 08-100-01 for a special running angle assembly for
line angles greater than 30°.
3" Detail A �Nr
6° Notes:
5„ ® 1. Design Reference. Use the
See note 4. elevation of the bottom bolt of
the lowest insulator mount as a
3669 conductor reference point for
6'-0" calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain
Detail B rn a minimum of 12'to the
4060 crossarm mounting bolt of any
distribution underbuild. This
1 dimension is valid for spans of
® 300'or less. For longer spans,
4785 1 consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If
there is a possibility of
6'-0" energizing a broken or sagging
5311 down guy then guy strain
Detail C insulators are required.Anchor
type may also require the use
of guy strain insulators. See
® Section 04.
5316 4. Avian. Eagle safe construction
12'-0"min. See note 1. requires 138-kV steel
to distribution construction insulators or
underbuild. larger.See 06-10-04.
See note 2. 5310
4727
See note 3.
53 00
W
rr�c
�J
Running Angles (Up to 300) Guy Anchoring
PMR. 138-kV C Structure

01-065-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 08-100 Insulator Assembly
04-100 Anchoring 08-300 Suspension Clamps
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 11-010 Armor Rods
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22147
3" Detail A
5279��,
3"
5341 24" 5372
See bit sch max.
5350 5170 5371
3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
4706
28806 5376 (See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
See bolt sch
5280
o ® 4845
5328 00
5316 min.
5342 5374
25448
5351 4060
3657 5700 18"
10%of min.
— pole height
+2_0.
Detail B
Pole Eye Assembly 5034
(TPEA) (T1138S)
Li
Detail C
Pole Grounding
1WMI P1HO
138-kV C Structure WPOMRR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-065-03
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Cat. ID Qty Description Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
28806 5 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 Anti-split 1 1 - - -
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6 5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
3669 75 Ib WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS Pole eye - - - - 2
4060 3 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0 5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
4078 1 CN WLD 5/8 ROD46 CU Pole eye - 2 4 6 4
4706' 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8' 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
4727 3 INS GUY STIR 30000 78 Pole eye 4 4 2 - -
4786 3 INS SUSP 138 KV STL 1OK 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
4845 3 CLV THMB BNK Pole eye 2 - - - -
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8'
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16 PassPort Codes
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8"
5280 3 CLIP BONDING 3/4"
5310 2 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 CU Codes Qty
5311 1 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 LNG TASB 1
5316 9 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS T1138S 3
TPEA 3
5328 6 EYE POLE PLT HD
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8"
5342 6 NUT MF 3/4"
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376' 6 STAPLE MILD SQ BARBED
5700 6 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
IORM
"` R„ 138-kV C Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-066-01
Application. The Corner with Shield wire or CS structure is used to turn angles of up to 30°. It is a
138 W,vertical configuration,running angle structure built with polymer or ball and socket disc
insulators. Conductor tension must be limited such that the transverse load,with a 1:1 guy slope, does not
exceed the 5,900 lb design limit of the guy assembly. Line angles above 30' are possible with small
conductors,provided the pole eye limit is not exceeded. See page 08-100-01 for a special running angle
assembly for line angles greater than 30°.
Notes:
3" Detail A 1. Design Reference. Use the
6„ elevation of the bottom bolt of
See note 4. the lowest insulator mount as a
5" conductor reference point for
5316 calculating vertical clearances.
Note 1,2&3 Bill of Materials 2. Framing Reference. Maintain
3669 a minimum of 12'to the
4838 crossarm mounting bolt of any
distribution underbuild.This
Detail B dimension is valid for spans of
300'or less. For longer spans,
consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If
ZZ 4oso there is a possibility of
6'-0" 1 energizing a broken or sagging
down guy then guy strain
Detail C 1 insulators are required.Anchor
5311 type may also require the use
of guy strain insulators. See
Section 04.
4. Avian. Eagle safe construction
4785 requires 138 kV steel
6'-0" construction insulators or
larger.See 06-10-04.
5310
m
See note 1.
12'-0"min.
to distribution
underbuild.
See note 2.
5311
4727
See note 3.
5310
30, 300
max max
(Distribution) `
Running Angles (Up to 300) Guy Anchoring
SCALE: 1'-0" =50'-0"
SCALE: 1'-0" =600'-0"
p R,. 138 W CS Structure
AlI—ORPCa 11Y

01-066-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 08-100 Insulator Assembly
04-100 Anchoring 08-174 Shield Wire Assembly
04-600 Insulation Guys 08-300 Suspension Clamps
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 11-010 Armor Rods
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
Detail A
22147
� Detail B
Z5341 >��i
���g��
24" 5372
See bit sch m 5170ax.
5371
5350 3657
Detail A f
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB) f
(See Section 02-002
28806 f for Grounding Details)
See bolt sch f
5280
5328 3657 o� a rI 0
�- 44
5374
r18"
5342 516
25448
5351 400 10%of 5700 pole height
+2'-0"
Detail B 5034
Pole Eye Assembly
(TPEA) (TI138W)
Detail C
Pole Grounding
138 kV CS Structure '99ppMRP
Al-CORPCa 1V

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-066-03
Bill of Material Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Cat.ID Qty Description Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
Note 1 1 CLP INS ALUM(size) Anti-split 1 1 - - -
Note 2 1 CLP SUSP AL(size) 5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
Note 3 1 ARMOR ROD AL(size) Pole Eye - - - - 2
28806 8 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6 Pole Eye - 2 4 6 4
3669 100 Ib WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS
4060 4 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
Pole Eye 4 4 4 2 2
4727 4 INS GUY STIR 30000 78 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
4785 3 INS SUSP 138 KV WD 1OK Pole Eye 2 2 - - -
4838 1 SHKL AN(size) 5127 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20
4845 4 CLV THMB BNK
Pole Eye 2 - - - -
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long) PassPort Codes
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3/3 X11/16
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 4 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN CU Codes Qty
5310 2 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 TASB 1
5311 2 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 LNG T1138W 3
5316 12 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS TPEA 4
5328 8 EYE POLE PLT HD
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5342 8 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 4 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5700 8 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN,CU,GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
clamps and clamp top adapters.
2 Refer to page 08-200-02 for suspension clamps.
3 Refer to page 11-010-01 for armor rods.
IDAW
"` R,, 138 kV CS Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-070-01
Application. The DI structure is used to Deadend line tension in I direction. It is a 138-kV,vertical
configuration, deadend structure built with polymer or ball and socket disc insulators. Conductor tension
must be limited such that the transverse load,with a 1:1 guy slope, does not exceed the 5,900 lb design
limit of the guy assembly.A similar structure,the DIS, includes provisions for a shield wire. See page 01-
071-01.
Detail A Notes:
4%ew
6" 1. Design Reference. Use the
® � 845 � elevation of the bottom bolt of
See note 4. the lowest insulator mount as a
conductor reference point for
5" 3669 calculating vertical clearances.
Typ• 2. Framing Reference. Maintain
6'-0" a minimum of 12'to the
5316
o crossarm mounting bolt of any
Detail B distribution underbuild. This
4727 dimension is valid for spans of
® 1 See note 3. 300'or less. For longer spans,
consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If
4785 1 there is a possibility of
6'-0" energizing a broken or sagging
down guy then guy strain
insulators are required.Anchor
4060 5311 type may also require the use
of guy strain insulators. See
® Section 04.
4. Avian. Eagle safe construction
See note 1.� requires 138-kV steel
r construction insulators or
larger.See 06-10-04.
12'-0"min. 5310
to distribution Detail C
underbuild.
See note 2.
v
5310
(DsMbLion)
Guy Anchoring Deadend in One Direction
�PMR. 138-kV D1 Structure

01-070-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 04-600 Insulating Guys
04-100 Anchoring 08-150 Insulator Assembly
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 08-350 Conductor DE Clamps
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22147
3 Detail A
i
3�
24�� 5372
See bIt sch max.5170 5371
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
4706
28806
5376 (See Section 02-002
See bolt sch for Grounding Details)
5280
O ® 4845
5328
5316
5342 18'min.
5351 4060 5374
25448
3657 5700
18"
10%of min.
Detail B pole height
Pole Eye Assembly +21-01,
(TPEA) (T1138W)
5034
Detail C
Pole Grounding
IWMI P1HO
138-kV D1 Structure WPOWERR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-070-03
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Cat. ID Qty Description Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
28806 8 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 Anti-split 1 1 - - -
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6 5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
3669 75 Ib WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS Pole Eye t - - - - 2
4060 3 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0 5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
4706* 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT Pole Eye t - 2 4 6 4
4727 3 INS GUY STIR 30000 78 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
4785 3 INS SUSP 138 KV WD 1OK Pole Eye t 4 4 2 - -
4845 3 CLV THMB BNK 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT Pole Eye t 2 - - - -
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long) For bonding to the top bolt as shown, increase 1 bolt for
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16 each pole eye by 2".
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 3 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN PassPort Codes
5310 2 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8
5311 1 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8 LNG
5316 9 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS CU Codes Qty
5328 6 EYE POLE PLT HD TASB 1
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN T1138W 3
5342 6 NUT MF 3/4 IN TPEA 3
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376* 6 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
5700 6 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
* To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
IDAHO
"` R„ 138-kV D1 Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-071-01
Application. The DIS structure is used to Deadend line tension in I direction for a circuit with a
Shield wire. It is a 138 W,vertical configuration,deadend structure built with polymer or ball and socket
disc insulators.
3" Detail A Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the
6" 4060 elevation of the bottom bolt of
r-
5" �° I See note 4. the lowest insulator mount as a
Typ. o 5316 conductor reference point for
calculating vertical clearances.
Note 1 Bill of Mat 2. Framing Reference. Maintain
8'-0" 3669 a minimum of 12'to the
crossarm mounting bolt of any
Detail B distribution underbuild. This
° dimension is valid for spans of
4727 300'or less. For longer spans,
° See note 3. consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If
there is a possibility of
4785 1 energizing a broken or sagging
6'-0" down guy then guy strain
insulators are required.Anchor
s type may also require the use
4845 5311 of guy strain insulators. See
Section 04.
11 4. Avian. Eagle safe construction
requires 138 kV steel
construction insulators or
larger.See 06-10-04.
6'0" Detail C
� 5310
4�
See note 1.�
12'-0"min.
to distribution
underbuild.
See note 2.
5311
5310
(Distribution)
\ \
SCALE: 1'-0" =600'-0" Scale:1"=59
" DAHO
�ppR, 138 W D1 S Structure
AlI—ORPGa 11Y

01-071-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 08-150 Insulator Assembly
04-100 Anchoring 08-170 Shield Wire Assembly
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 08-350 Conductor Deadend Clamps
04-600 Insulating Guys
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
Detail A
22147
5279 d� Detail B
3' 24" 5372
5341 See blt sch max.
5350 5170 5371
3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB) f
I
f
28806
(See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
See bolt sch
5280 f
4845
o �
5328 a OO r18"
: 5316 534225448
5351 406036575700 10%of
pole height
Detail B
Pole Eye Assembly 5034
(TPEA) (TI138W)
Detail C
Pole Grounding
138 kV D1S Structure '99ppMRP
AlIMCORPCa 1V

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-071-03
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Cat.ID Qty Description Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
28806 11 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 Anti-split 1 1 - - -
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6 5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
3669 100 Ib WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS Insulator - - - - 2
4060 4 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0 5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
4727 4 INS GUY STIR 30000 78 Insulator - 2 4 6 4
4785 3 INS SUSP 138 KV WD 1OK 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
4845 5 CLV THMB BNK Insulator 4 4 4 2 2
5034 1 ROD GIRD CW 5/8 X 8 FT 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long) Insulator 2 2 - - -
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long) 5127 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16 Insulator 2 - - - -
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8"
5280 4 CLIP BONDING 3/4"
Note 1 1 GRIP GUY ALIT 5/16 RL Passport Codes
5310 2 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8
5311 2 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 LNG
5316 12 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS CU Codes Qty
5328 8 EYE POLE PLT HD
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8" TASB 1
T
5342 8 NUT M TPEA 3
F 3/4"
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8 EA 4
5351 4 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRD WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5700 8 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN,CU,GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
1 Refer to page 08-170-01 for Automatic Deadend
Assembly.
"`IDAHO
POVIIE R,, 138 kV D1S Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-072-01
Application. The DI-HP structure is used to Deadend line tension in I direction and to provide a
transition from a tension line to a slack span using Horizontal Post insulators. It is a 138 W,vertical
configuration, deadend structure used where transmission lines enter a substation or where the deadend
structure must be located a span away from a corner or line angle due to guying problems. The slack span
is offset from the anchor guys and deadends on a horizontal post insulator. Detail D shows the use of a
length of guy strand from the slack span deadend clamp to the tension deadend to reduce the cantilever
loading of the post insulator.A similar structure,the D1S-HP,makes provision for a shield wire. See page
01-073-01.
3"
Detail A Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the
o elevation of the bottom bolt of
o the lowest insulator mount as a
5" 4" conductor reference point for
6'-0"
Typ 3669 calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain
Detail B 5316 a minimum of 12'to the
crossarm mounting bolt of any
°0 o distribution underbuild.This
4727 dimension is valid for spans of
4785 300'or less. For longer spans,
6'-0" See Note 3. consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If
3669 there is a possibility of
energizing a broken or sagging
4845 down guy then guy strain
See note
0 insulators are required.Anchor
1.
type may also require the use
12'-0"min. of guy strain insulators. See
to distribution 5311 Section 04.
underbuild.
See note 2.
Details D&E
5310
Detail C
5310
(Distribution) `
Guy Anchoring
Scale:1"=66.67'
"RNppMR,, 138 W D1-HP Structure
Al I-ORP C1W11Y

01-072-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 04-600 Insulating Guys
04-100 Anchoring 08-150 Insulator String DE Assembly
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 08-350 Conductor Deadend Clamps
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22147
3„ Detail A
5279 3" 24^
max.
Seebsch4
f 553721
57
3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
4706
5376 (See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
28806
5280
5328
See bolt sch
IR OO - 4845 74 18"min.
o 0e ,B
16 25448
5342 r 53 53
5351 4060 18
10%of min.
3657 _ pole height
5700 +21-01,
5034
Detail B
Pole Eye Assembly
(TPEA) _
Detail C
Pole Grounding
138 kV D1-HP Structure '99ppMRP
AlIMCORPCa 1V

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-072-03
4838 4864 4785
4839
Note 1-Bill of Materials
5311
e 3669 See
Note 3-Bill of Materials °0 5311 clamp
mounting
4744 details
below.
Assembly with Bolted Deadend Fitting
4864
4838 4839
4785
5311
Note 1-Bill of Mat.
Assembly with Polymer Insulator Assembly with Porcelain Insulator
and Compression Deadend Fitting and Compression Deadend Fitting
5181 5181
5345
To
(Note 3-Bill of Mat.)
5119 ( '
TO
5311------.. 4149
5311
4744
Standoff Insulator Conductor Clamp Assembly
Detail D
Slack Span Deadend Assembly
SCALE:1'-0" =20'-0"
�POMR 138 W D1-HP Structure
Al,—"RPCa 1

01-072-04 Revised 04/17
Transmission
22150 28806
Bill of Materials
5281 See bolt sch
See the Work Order and PassPort for current
«Q a� I Bill of Materials information.
Cat.ID Qty Description
V-0" 5700 0
0 3513 14 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6
3669 75 lb WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS
[196 4744 4060 3 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0
5343 Note 3 2 CN PG(qty)BLT(size)
4149 3 DE BLTD AL 336-795
5352 5173 Note 1 3 DE BLTD AL(size)
Note 4 3 DE CMPR AL(Size)
4706* 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT
Detail E 4727 3 INS GUY STIR 30000 78
Post Insulator Mount 4744 3 INS HRZ 138 PLMR WD
(T1138HP) 4785 3 INS SUSP 138 KV WD 1OK
Note 2 3 CLP LP INS(size)
Bolt Schedule 4838 3 SHKL AN 5/8X2.75 30K
4839 3 SCKT CLV HL 52-3
Cat.ID Description Qty Per Pole Class 4845 3 CLV THMB BNK
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3 4864 3 LINK SGL 1/2 IN
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8'
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/812 See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
Anti-split - - 1 1 1 See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/814 See Bolt Sch 6 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long)
Anti-split 1 1 - -
5123 BLT GALV M 5170 CH 3/4X12 51 3 BLT GALV MCH 3/X11
2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
Pole Eye 2
5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14 5172 6 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X13/16
Pole Eye" 2 4 6 4 5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8"
5280 6 CLIP BONDING 3/4"
5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16 5281 3 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN
Pole Eye* 4 4 2 0 2
5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18 5310 2 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8
Pole Eye* 4 2 4 6 4 5311 7 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 LNG
5127 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20 5316 9 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS
Pole Eye* 2 4 2 - - 5328 6 EYE POLE PLT HD
5128 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X22 5341 1 NUT MF 5/8"
Post Eye 2 5342 12 NUT MF 3/4"
5137 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X14 5345 3 NUT EYE GALV 3/4"
Post Ins. - - - - 0 5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 6 NUT GALV PLAIN%
5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16 5352 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
Post Ins. - 0 0 0 2 5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18 5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
Post Ins. 2 2 4 6 4 5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376* 6 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20 5700 9 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
Post Ins. 2 4 2 - - 22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
5141 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X22 22149 6 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
Post Ins. 2 - - - - 25448 1 CONN,CU,GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
* Or Horizontal Post Insulator * To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
1 Refer to page 08-200-03 for bolted deadend clamps.
2 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
PassPort Codes clamps and clamp top adapters.
3 Refer to page 08-200-06 for parallel groove connectors.
CU Codes Qty 4 Refer to page 08-200-04 for compression deadend
TASB 1 clamps
TD1 GUY 3
T1138HP 3
TPEA 3
138 kV D1-HP Structure 99POUVERR

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-073-01
Application. The DIS HP structure is used to Deadend line tension in I direction for a circuit with a
Shield wire and to provide a transition from a tension line to a slack span using Horizontal Post
insulators. It is a 138 W,vertical configuration, deadend structure used where transmission lines enter a
substation or where the deadend structure must be located a span away from a corner or line angle due to
guying problems. The slack span is offset from the anchor guys and deadends on a horizontal post
insulator. Detail D shows the use of a length of guy strand from the slack span deadend clamp to the
tension deadend to reduce the cantilever loading of the post insulator. For locations where the shield wire
continues beyond the deadend structure, a shield wire running angle assembly can be used. See page 08-
176-01.
Note 5-Bill of Mat. 3" Detail A Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the
6" elevation of the bottom bolt of
5316 the lowest insulator mount as a
0 conductor reference point for
-F 4845 calculating vertical clearances.
8'-0" 3669 2. Framing Reference. Maintain
a minimum of 12'to the
5316 crossarm mounting bolt of any
distribution underbuild.This
o dimension is valid for spans of
V4727 300'or less. For longer spans,
e 3. consult with engineering.
6'-0" 3. Construction Practice. If
there is a possibility of
energizing a broken or sagging
Detail B down guy then guy strain
insulators are required.Anchor
° type may also require the use
of guy strain insulators. See
5785 5311 Section 04.
6'-0"
Detail C 4060
5328 5310
xC
°
See note 1.
12'-0"min.
to distribution
underbuild.
See note 2. Details D&E
5311
5310
(Distribution)
Deadend to Slack Span
ConfigbR09 H=50'
SCALE: 1'-0" =600'-0"
" pMR,, 138 W D1S-HP Structure
Al,—°RPGa 11Y

01-073-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 04-600 Insulating Guys
04-100 Anchoring 08-150 Conductor Deadends
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 08-170 Shield Wire Deadends
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22147 Detail A
5279 3„ Detail B
5341 xxx� 2a 5372
See bit sch max.
5350 5170 5371
3657
Detail A f
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
ff
(See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
28806
See bolt sch rjin.
5280
CM 4845 5374
o OO 25448
5328 a 00 B
5316
534210%of
pole height
5351 406 ++2'-0"
3657 5700 5034
Detail B
Pole Eye Assembly
(TPEA) Detail C
Pole Grounding
138 kV D1S-HP Structure '99ppMRP
Al-CORPCa 1V

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-073-03
4838 4864 4785
4839
Note 1-Bill of Materials
0
5311
3669 See
Note 3-Bill of Materials ®® 5311 clamp
® mounting
4744 o detai I s
o below.
Assembly with Bolted Deadend Fitting
4864
4838 4839
4785
5311
Note 1-Bill of Mat.
Assembly with Polymer Insulator Assembly with Porcelain Insulator
and Compression Deadend Fitting and Compression Deadend Fitting
5181 5181
5345
To
(Note 3-Bill of Mat.)
5119 '
To = 4149
5311
5311
4744
Standoff Insulator Conductor Clamp Assembly
Detail D
Slack Span Deadend Assembly
(TD1 GUY)
�POMR, 138 W D1S-HP Structure
AlI—ORPGa 11Y

01-073-04 Revised 04/14
Transmission
22150 28806 Bill of Materials
5281 See bolt sch See the Work Order and PassPort for current
Bill of Materials information.
Cat. ID Qty Description
28806 14 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
5700 3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6
3669 100 lb WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS
4060 8 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0
1 IIa� 4744 Note 3 2 CN PG(qty)BLT(size)
4149 3 DE BLTD AL 336-795
5343 Note 1 3 DE BLTD AL(size)
5352 5173 Note 4 3 DE CMPR AL(Size)
4727 4 INS GUY STIR 30000 78
Detail E 4744 3 INS HRZ 138 PLMR WD
Post Insulator Mount 4785 3 INS SUSP 138 KV WD 1OK
(T1138HP) Note 2 3 CLP LP INS(size)
4838 3 SHKL AN 5/8X2.75 30K
Bolt Schedule 4839 3 SCKT CLV HL 52-3
4845 5 CLV THMB BNK
4864 3 LINK SGL 1/2 IN
Cat.ID Description Qty Per Pole Class 5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3 See Bolt Sch 1 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12 See Bolt Sch 10 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
Anti-split - - 1 1 1 5119 3 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X3
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14 5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
Anti-split 1 1 - - - 5172 6 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X13/16
5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12 5181 6 WSHR RND 13/16 HOLE
Pole Eye - - - - 2 5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14 5280 7 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
Pole Eye* - 2 4 6 4 Note 5 1 GRIP GUY AUT 5/16 RL
5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16 5310 2 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8
Pole Eye* 4 4 4 2 2 5311 7 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8 LNG
5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18 5316 12 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS
Pole Eye* 2 2 2 4 6 5328 8 EYE POLE PLT HD
5127 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20 5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
Pole Eye* 4 4 4 2 - 5342 14 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5128 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X22 5345 3 NUT EYE GALV 3/4 IN
Post Ins. 2 2 - - - 5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5129 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X24 5351 7 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
Post Ins. 2 - - - 5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
* Or horizontal post insulator 5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5700 11 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
PassPort Codes 22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
22149 6 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN,CU,GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
CU Codes Qty * To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
TASB 1 1 Refer to page 08-200-03 for bolted deadend clamps.
TD1GUY 3 2 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
T1138HP 3 clamps and clamp top adapters.
TPEA 4 3 Refer to page 08-200-06 for parallel groove connectors.
4 Refer to page 08-200-04 for compression deadend
clamps.
5 Refer to page 08-170-01 for Automatic Deadend
Assembly.
138 kV D1S-HP Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-074-01
Application. The D2 structure is used to Deadend line tension in 2 directions.It is a 138-kV, vertical
configuration structure built with polymer or ball and socket disc insulators. It is used when there is a
change in line tension or a change in conductor size. This structure is intended for line angles greater than
80°. For line angles between 30°—80°, see structure D2-HP on page 01-081-01.A similar structure,the
D2S,includes provisions for a shield wire. See page 01-075-01.
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use Y Detail A `
the elevation of the bottom `
bolt of the lowest insulator 6" 4060 See note 4.
mount as a conductor
reference point for ® ° 3669
calculating vertical
clearances.
2. Framing Reference.
Maintain a minimum of 12' 6'-0"
to the crossarm mounting
T366
bolt of any distribution 5" .
underbuild.This dimension Typ
is valid for spans of 300'or
less. For longer spans, 41
consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If
there is a possibility of 14"
energizing a broken or 1 gr
sagging down guy then guy °
strain insulators are
required.Anchor type may 6'-0" 5311
also require the use of guy
strain insulators. See Detail C
Section 04. 0
4.Avian. Eagle safe Detail B
construction requires 138-kV I"/
steel construction insulators
or larger. See 06-10-04. 12'-0"min.
to distribution
underbuild. °
See note 2. ® 5310
See note 1
4845
More
Than
80 (Oshib hcn) 5310
2 Direction Guy Guy Anchoring
�PMR. 138-kV D2 Structure

01-074-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 04-600 Insulating Guys
04-100 Anchoring 08-150 Conductor Deadends
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 08-170 Shield Wire Deadends
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
C22147 Detail A
t5279 3 Detail B
5341 See bIt sch
ma
5372
ax.
5350 5170 5371
3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
(See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
28806
See bolt sch
5280 18"min.
o � 4845 5374
5328 00 25448
5316
5342
18"
10%of min.
5351 4060 pole height
+21_0.
3657
5034
Detail B
Pole Eye Assembly
(TPEA) (TI138W)
Detail C
Pole Grounding
IWMI P1HO
138-kV D2 Structure MPOWERR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-074-03
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Cat. ID Qty Description Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
28806 18 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 Anti-split 1 1 - - -
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6
3669 150 Ib WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS 5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
4060 6 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0 Pole Eye - - - - 2
5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
4706` 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT Pole Eye 4 4 8 12 10
4727 6 INS GUY STIR 30000 78 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
4845 6 CLV THMB BNK Pole Eye 4 8 4 - -
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long) Pole Eye 4 - - - -
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 6 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN PassPort Codes
5310 4 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8
5311 2 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8 LNG CU Codes Qty
5316 18 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS
5328 12 EYE POLE PLT HD TASB 1
T1138W 6
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN TPEA 6
5342 12 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 6 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376' 6 STAPLE MILD SQ BARBED
5700 12 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
IDAHO
"` R„ 138-kV D2 Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-0755-01
Application. The D2S structure is used to Deadend line tension in 2 directions for a circuit with a
Shield wire. It is a 138 W,vertical configuration structure built with polymer or ball and socket disc
insulators and used when there is a change in line tension or a change in conductor size. This structure is
intended for use where line angles greater than 80°. For line angles between 30°-80°, see structure D2S-
HP on page 01-080-01.
Detail A See note 4.
3 Detail B
(Distributon)
6 4060
�a
° 3669
Note 1 -Bill of Mat.
JJ V
Guy Anchoring 8'.
SCALE: 1'-0" =600'-0"
5 � 4727
Typ' See Note 3.
4"I 0 �
Mor
e
80 5310
Detail C
2 Direction Guy
6'-0" o
5311
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of
the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator
mount as a conductor reference point for
calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a °
minimum of 12'to the crossarm
mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild.This dimension is valid for c °
spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, See note 1.� 5310
consult with engineering. 1 d
3. Construction Practice. If there is a 12'-0"min. \�
possibility of energizing a broken or to distribution
sagging down guy then guy strain underbuild.
insulators are required.Anchor type may See note 2.
also require the use of guy strain
insulators. See Section 04.
4. Avian. Eagle safe construction requires
138 kV steel construction insulators or 5311
larger. See 06-10-04.
"�ppMR,, 138 W D2S Structure
AlI—ORPCa 11Y

01-075-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 08-150 Insulator Assembly
04-100 Anchoring 08-170 Shield Wire Assembly
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 08-350 Conductor DE Clamps
04-600 Insulating Guys
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22147 Detail A
52 99 �� 3" � ' Detail B
5341 See bit sch 2 5372
max.
5350 0 5371
517
3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly f
(TASB) f
I
I
(See Section 02-002
f for Grounding Details)
28806 f
See bolt sch Tn. 7
52804845328 0 " 53165342
15351 4060 10%of mi
pole height
3657 +2'-0"
5700
5034
Detail B
Pole Eye Assembly
(TPEA) (TI138W)
Detail C
Pole Grounding
AM
138 kV D2S Structure WNPOMRP
AlIMCORPCa 1V

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-075-03
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Cat.ID Qty Description Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
28806 24 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 Anti-split 1 1 - - -
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6 5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
3669 200 Ib WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS Pole Eye - - - 2 4
4060 8 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0 5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
4727 8 INS GUY STIR 30000 78 Pole Eye 4 4 8 10 8
4845 10 CLV THMB BNK 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT Pole Eye 4 8 8 4 4
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long) 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long) Pole Eye 4 4 - - -
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16 5127 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20
5184 1 WSHR SPR 11/16 HOLE Pole Eye 4 - - - -
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 8 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
Note 1 2 GRIP GUY ALIT(size)
5310 4 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 PassPort Codes
5311 4 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 LNG
5316 24 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS
5328 16 EYE POLE PLT HD CU Codes Qty
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN TASB 1
5342 16 NUT MF 3/4 IN T1138W 6
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8 TPEA 8
5351 8 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5700 16 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN,CU,GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
" To be used where there is no distribution underbuild.
1 Refer to page 08-170-01 for Automatic Deadend
Assembly.
"`IDAHO
POVIIE R,, 138 kV D2S Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-080-01
Application. The D2S HP structure is used to Deadend line tension in 2 directions with Shield wire
and Horizontal Post jumper support. It is a 138 W vertical configuration structure built with polymer or
ball and socket disc insulators and used when there is a change in line tension or in conductor size. This
structure is intended for use with line angles between 30°-80°. For line angles greater than 80°, see
structure D2S on page 01-075-01.
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the
— elevation of the bottom bolt of
3" Detail A the lowest insulator mount as a
6
See note 4. conductor reference point for
(L Detail B
✓ calculating vertical clearances.
° d 2. Framing Reference. Maintain
5308
4 5316 a minimum of 12'to the
° crossarm mounting bolt of any
8'-0" ° 0 4727 distribution underbuild.This
See Note 3. dimension is valid for spans of
TYP 300'or less. For longer spans,
5" Detail c consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If
0 there is a possibility of
energizing a broken or sagging
down guy then guy strain
4" insulators are required.Anchor
6'-0" 5311 type may also require the use
of guy strain insulators. See
Detail D Section 04.
4. Avian. Eagle safe construction
requires 138 W steel
construction deadend
insulators or larger.
See 06-10-04.
5310
of
]oo
12'-0"min. 5311
to distribution See note 1.
underbuild.
See note 2.
v
5310
138 W D2S-HP Structure
Al,—"RPGa 11Y

01-080-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
so°-eo
(Distribution) `
Deadend in 2 Directions at Guy Anchoring
Angles between 300-800
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 08-150 Insulator Assembly
04-100 Anchoring 08-170 Shield Wire Assembly
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 08-200 Horizontal Post Insulator Clamps
04-600 Insulating Guys 08-205 Polymer Clp Top Adapter
06-200 Porc Horizontal Post Ins 08-350 Conductor Deadend Clamps
06-300 Polymer Horizontal Post his
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22147 28806
5279 3"
See bolt sch
5341 See blt sch 5280
4845
5350 5170
5328
5316
5342
Detail A 5351 4060
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB) 3657 5700
Detail B
Pole Eye Assembly
(TPEA)
138 kV D2S-HP Structure '99ppMRP
Al-CORPCa 1V

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-080-03
Detail A 22150
28806
Detail B 5281 See bolt sch
24" 5372 eta
max.
5371 1 0 5700
0
3657
4744
5343
r5352 5173
I
Detail D
Post Insulator Mount
(See Section 02-002 (T1138HP)
f for Grounding Details)
I
4
18"min.
5374
25448
18"
10%of min.
pole height
+21_01,
5034
Detail C
Pole Grounding
UOROMR, 138 kV D2S-HP Structure
AlI—ORPCa 11Y

01-080-04 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Note 5
Note 3
u
Note 6
o a
0 0
4785
4839 4744
Note 7
4806
Note 4
Detail F
Pole Insulator Adapter
(TI138W) (TCTA)
138 kV D2S-HP Structure WOOMRP
Al-CORPCa 1V

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-080-05
Bill of Materials Bill of Materials (continued)
See the Work Order and PassPort for current
Bill of Materials information. Cat. ID Qty Description
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
Cat.ID Qty Description 4806 3 ADPTR CLT H138KV INS
5700 20 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
28806 29 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6 22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
3669 200 lb WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS 22150 6 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
4060 8 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0 25448 1 CONN,CU,GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
Note 1,6 2 CN PG(qty)BLT(size) 1 Use these items with the bolted DE clamp.
Note 1,3 6 DE BLTD AL(size) 2 Use these items with the compression DE clamp.
Note 2,7 6 DE CMPR AL(size) 3 Refer to page 08-200-03 for bolted deadend clamps.
4727 8 INS GUY STIR 30000 78 4 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
4744 3 INS HRZ 138 PLMR WD clamps and clamp top adapters.
4785 6 INS SUSP 138KV WD10K 5 Refer to page 2-311 in the Materials Manual for hot line
socket eyes.
4806 3 ADPTR CLT H138KV INS 6 Refer to page 08-200-06 for parallel groove connectors.
Note 4 3 CLP LP INS(size) 7 Refer to page 08-200-04 for compression deadend
Note 1,5 6 SCKT EYE HL(size) clamps.
48392 6 SCKT CLV HL 52-3 8 Refer to page 08-170-01 for Automatic Deadend
4845 10 CLV THMB BNK Assembly.
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long) Bolt Schedule
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
See Bolt Sch 6 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long) Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16 Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5173 6 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16 5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5280 8 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
5281 3 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN Anti-split 1 1 - - -
Note 8 1 GRIP GUY ALIT 5/16 RL 5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
5310 4 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8 Pole Eye - - - 2 4
5311 4 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 LNG 5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
5316 24 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS Pole Eye 4 4 8 10 8
5328 16 EYE POLE PLT HD 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN Pole Eye 4 8 8 4 4
5342 16 NUT MF 3/4 IN 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
5343 6 NUT MF 7/8 IN Pole Eye 4 4 2 4 4
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8 5127 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20
5351 8 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4 Pole Eye 6 4 4 2 2
5352 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8 5141 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X22
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D Post Ins. 2 2 - - -
5372 40 CLIP GIRD WIRE
5142 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X24
Post Ins. 2 - -
Bill of Material continues in the next column
PassPort Codes
CU Codes Qty
TASB 1
TCTA 3
T1138HP 3
T1138W 6
TPEA 8
IDAHO
"`POVIIE R,, 138 kV D2S-HP Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-081-01
Application. The D2-HP structure is used to Deadend line tension in 2 directions with Horizontal
Post jumper support. It is a 138 kV vertical configuration structure built with polymer or ball and socket
disc insulators and used when there is a change in line tension or in conductor size. This structure is
intended for use with line angles between 30°-80°. For line angles greater than 80°, see structure D2 on
page 01-075-01.A similar structure,the D2S-HP,makes provision for a shield wire. See page 01-080-01.
3. Detail A
Notes:
n6^ t W 1. Design Reference. Use the
® ° 3669 See note 4. elevation of the bottom bolt of
the lowest insulator mount as a
® 5316 conductor reference point for
calculating vertical clearances.
6'-0" q 4727 2. Framing Reference. Maintain
See Note 3. a minimum of 12'to the
Typ. Detail D crossarm mounting bolt of any
5"
f" Detail c distribution underbuild. This
dimension is valid for spans of
®" ° ° 3669 300'or less. For longer spans,
consult with engineering.
0 3. Construction Practice. If
there is a possibility of
energizing a broken or sagging
6-0" 5311 down guy then guy strain
--On x insulators are required.Anchor
type may also require the use
o ° of guy strain insulators. See
Section 04.
Detail B 4. Avian. Eagle safe construction
° requires 138 kV steel
5310 construction deadend
di Z"0"min. See note 1. insulators or larger.
to distribution ° See 06-10-04.
underbuild.
See note 2.
5310
°30-8D
(Distribution)
Deadend in 2 Directions at Guy Anchoring
Angles between 30°-80°
�PMR. 138 W D2-HP Structure

01-081-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 08-150 Insulator Assembly
04-100 Anchoring 08-170 Shield Wire Assembly
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 08-200 Horizontal Post Insulator Clamps
04-600 Insulating Guys 08-205 Polymer Clp Top Adapter
06-200 Porc Horizontal Post Ins 08-350 Conductor Deadend Clamps
06-300 Polymer Horizontal Post Ins
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22147
T' Detail A
S
3. 24" 5372
See bit sch max.
5170 5371
3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
4706
5376 (See Section 02-002
28806 for Grounding Details)
See bolt sch
5280
o ® 4845 }
18"min.
5328 0
5316 5374
25448
!t5l
4060
18"
3657 10%of min.
5700 pole height
+2'-0"
Detail B 5034
Pole Eye Assembly
(TPEA)
Detail C
Pole Grounding
IWMI P1HO
138 kV D2-HP Structure MPOMRR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-081-03
22150 28806
5281 See bolt sch
1'-0" 5700
0
4744
!!5343
5352 5173
Detail D
Post Insulator Mount
(TI138HP)
Note 6
Note 4
Note 7
0 0
0 0
4785
4839 4744
Note 8
4806
Note 5
Detail F
Pole Insulator Adapter
(TI138W) (TCTA)
AM
ILMPMR. 138 kV D2-HP Structure
al.—�.Ia

01-081-04 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Bill of Materials Bill of Materials (continued)
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Qty Description
Bill of Materials information. 22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
22150 6 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
Cat. ID Qty Description 25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
28806 23 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 1 To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6 2 Use these items with bolted DE clamps.
3669 150 lb WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS 3 Use these items with compression DE clamps.
4060 6 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0 4 Refer to page 08-200-03 for bolted deadend clamps.
Note 27 2 CN PG(qty)BLT(size) 5 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
Note 2,4 6 DE BLTD AL(size) clamps and clamp top adapters.
Note 3,8 6 DE CMPR AL(size) 6 Refer to page 2-311 in the Materials Manual for hot line
4706 Note 1 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT socket eyes.
7 Refer to page 08-200-06 for parallel groove connectors.
4727 6 INS GUY STIR 30000 78 8 Refer to page 08-200-04 for compression deadend
4744 3 INS HRZ 138 PLMR WD clamps.
4785 6 INS SUSP 138KV WD10K 9 Refer to page 08-170-01 for Automatic Deadend
4806 3 ADPTR CLT H138KV INS Assembly.
Note 5 3 CLP LP INS(size)
Note 2,6 6 SCKT EYE HL(size) Bolt Schedule
4839 Note 3 6 SCKT CLV HL 52-3
4845 6 CLV THMB BNK Cat.ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long) 5108 BLT GA MCH 5/8X12
See Bolt Sch 6 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long) Anti-splitt 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5173 6 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16 Anti-split 1 1
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN 5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
5280 8 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN Pole Eye 2
5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
5281 3 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN Pole Eye 4 4 8 12 10
Note 9 1 GRIP GUY ALIT(size) 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
5310 4 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 Pole Eye 4 8 4 - -
5311 2 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8 LNG 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
5316 18 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS Pole Eye 4 - - - -
5328 12 EYE POLE PLT HD 5137 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X14
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN Post Ins. - - 0
5342 12 NUT MF 3/4 IN 5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
5343 6 NUT MF 7/8 IN Post Ins. - 0 0 0 2
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8 5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
5351 6 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4 Post Ins. 2 2 4 6 4
5352 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8 5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D Post Ins. 2 4 2 - -
5372 40 CLIP GIRD WIRE 5141 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X22
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2 Post Ins. 2
5376 Note 1 6 STAPLE MILD SQ BARBED
4806 3 ADPTR CLT H138KV INS
5700 18 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6 PassPort Codes
Bill of Material continues on the next column CU Codes Qty
TASB 1
TCTA 3
T1138HP 3
T1138W 6
TPEA 6
138 kV D2-HP Structure "`ERR

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-141-01
Application. This "TR-HL"structure is a 69-kV TRiangular configuration built with polymer `Hi-
Lite®'insulators. It is used for tangent construction where small angles are involved and where a shield
wire is not required.
This configuration is not applicable in rural areas due to raptor issues. For preferred 69-kV raptor
construction,refer to 138-kV"TR HL"on page 01-041-01. Consult with T&D Design and the
Environmental Department before using this design in rural areas.
Note 1 &3 Bill of Materials
4737
Detail D
o Detail A
0
3 Detail B
2'-6"
Detail C
8
See Note 1 y
4743
12'-0"
min.
See Note 2
Detail E
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor reference
point for calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution underbuild.This
dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering.
AM
NEW—PMR. 69-kV TR-HL Structure

01-141-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
Note 1 &3
00
22149
4737
4737 516 9
474
4 8235
22147 a 7„ 54 3„
5279 28 T
See bolt sch
5280 5341
5350 5170
See bolt sch
5351
Detail A Detail B
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly Pole Top Bracket Mount
(TASB) (TPTB)+(T169VP)
28806 Note 1 &3
5280
22149 0
5351
Note 1 &3 5342 4737
5700
c0
o LAPP= 12"
O.B. = 12"
4874
See bolt Sch 48235 0
0
Detail C
Post Insulator Mount
(T169HPDC) Detail D
Insulator Assembly Detail
IWM WHO
69-kV TR-HL Structure WPOMRR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-141-03
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 08-200 Clamp
08-300 Suspension Clamp 11-010 Armor Rod
f- Bill of Materials
YJ
See the Work Order and PassPort for current
24" 5372 Bill of Materials information.
max. Cat. ID Qty Description
5371 Note 1 3 CLP INS ALUM(size)
Note 3 3 ARMOR ROD AL(size)
3657 28806 2 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6
4706* 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT
4737 1 INS VERT CLT 69 PLMR
4743 2 INS HRZ CLT 69 PLMR
4874 1 STUD INS 3/4X1 3/4
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV DA 3/4X(long)
4706 See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
5169 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3X1/, 13/16
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3X1/4, 11/16
5376 (See Section 02-002 48235 1 BRKT POLETOP 69KV INS
for Grounding Details) 5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 3 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5342 7 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 4 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
18"min. 5372 40 CLIP GIRD WIRE
1 5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5374 r
5376* 6 STAPLE MLD SO BARBED
5700 1 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
18" 22149 6 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
10%of min. 25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
pole height *To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
+2'-0" 1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
clamps and clamp top adapters.
5034 3 Refer to page 11-010-01 for armor rods.
Bolt Schedule
Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5064 BLT GALV DA 3/4X18
Post Mnt. - - 2 2 2
Detail E 5065 BLT GALV DA 3/4X20
Pole Grounding Post Mnt. 2 2 - - -
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
PassPort Codes Anti-split 1 1 - - -
CU Codes Qty 5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
Top Mnt. - - - 2 2
TASB 1 5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
T169HPDC 1 Top Mnt. - - 2 2 2
T169VP 1 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
TPTB 1 Top Mnt. 2 2 - -
�PMRa. 69-kV TR-HL Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-151-01
Application. The "TV-DC-HL"structure is a 46-kV or 69-kV Tangent Vertical Double Circuit
structure with polymer `Hi-Lite'insulators. It is used for construction where there are small or no angles
involved and where a shield wire is not required.When two circuits are required, it provides a cost
effective alternative to constructing two separate lines
DetailA
Detail B
g
5'-0„
Note 1&3 BillofNbterials
0
4743
See Note 1
12'-0"
ruin.
See Note 2
Detail C
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor reference
point for calculating vertical clearances..
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild.This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering
RW
NEW—PMR. 46-kV & 69 kV TV-DC-HL Structure

01-151-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22147
5279 �Y
5341 See bit sch
5350 5170
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
28806
5280
22149
5351
Note 1 &3 5342
5700
o
o LAPP=12"
O.B. =12"
i
See bolt Sch
Detail B
Post Insulator Mount
(T169HPDC)
IWM WHO
46-kV & 69 kV TV-DC-HL Structure WPOMRR
Al ioncoar[amya"Y

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-151-03
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 11-010 Armor Rod
08-300 Clamp
Bill of Materials
3„ Detail A See the Work Order and PassPort for current
24" Bill of Materials information.
max. 5372 Cat. ID Qty Description
5371 Note 1 6 CLP INS ALUM(size)
Note 3 6 ARMOR ROD AL(size)
3657 28806 5 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6
4706* 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT
4743 6 INS HRZ CLT 69 PLMR
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV DA 3/4X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
4706 5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 3 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5376 (See Section 02-002 5342 12 NUT MF 3/4 IN
for Grounding Details) 5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376* 6 STAPLE MILD SQ BARBED
18"min. 5700 3 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
5374 25448 22149 12 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
* To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
18" 1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
10%of min. clamps and clamp top adapters.
pole height 3 Refer to page 11-010-01 for armor rods.
+2,-0"
5034
Bolt Schedule
Cat.ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
Detail C 5064 BLT GALV DA 3/4X18
Post Mnt. - 2 6 6 6
Pole Grounding 5065 BLT GALV DA 3/4X20
Post Mnt. 4 4 - - -
PassPort Codes 5066 BLT GALV DA 3/4X22
Post Mnt. 2
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
CU Codes Qty Anti-split - - 1 1 1
TASB 1 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
T169HPDC 3 Anti-split 1 1 - - -
IDAHO
"` R„ 46-kV & 69 kV TV-DC-HL Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-180-01
Application. The DEBA2 structure is a Dead End Buck Arm configuration used where a
2 directional deadend is required on 46 kV and 69 kV lines.The loading of this structure is limited by the
vertical component of force applied to the down guy; not by the arm strength.This structure should only
be used with 2/0 Quail,4/0 Penguin, 247 MCM Alliance, and other small conductors strung with low
design tensions. Consult T&D Design for design tensions above 20001bs per phase.
0
00
® a oAN. o � ®
0
For Deadend Arm mounting,
grounding,and bonding details,see
Details A,B,and D.
For Anti-Split bolt
assembly details,
see Detail C.
�� Note 2-Bill of Materials
0
48"
o
E�
4727
Maintain 5320
required
clearances 5314
3671
MMPOMR, 46 kV & 69 kV DEBA2 Structure
AlI—ORPCa 11Y

01-180-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
4961
4q
Detail B
Detail A
Bonding Crossarm Hardware
(TALDE10H)
4737 22147
8"
5279
Q�
5341 See blt sch
5350 5170
22149
5351
5185
4875
Detail B Detail C
Bonding Detail Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TSS7.5) (T169VP) (TASB)
46 kV & 69 kV DEBA2 Structure 'WVppMRP
Al-CORP CI-V

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-180-03
22150
See bolt sch
Note 1 -Bill of Materials
5343
5352
4737
5173
Detail C
4"
4"
4783 n
5" ® _
22149 6"
5345
See bolt sch �0 Q
5342 P
5351 See note 1.
5172
3657
28806
5700
22150
See bolt sch
5343
Note 1-
If the lower guy mounting
p
5352 5173 position is used,a 4th
mounting bolt may be
5281 required.Consult with
T&D Design.
Detail D
Deadend Arm Mounting
(T169W)
RNPOMR, 46 kV & 69 kV DEBA2 Structure
Al I-ORP G1W11Y

01-180-04 Revised 04/14
Transmission
—
3" p Detail A
48„ 24" f 5372
max.
E � � 5371
3ti57
12'
min.
f
See Section 04
for proper application
of guy strain insulators. 4706
5376 (See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
Detail E
Distribution Underbuild
18"min.
5374
25448
18"
10%of min.
pole height
+2'-0"
5034
Detail F
Pole Grounding
46 kV & 69 kV DEBA2 Structure �POMR.
Al-CORP CI-V

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-180-05
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat.ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Cat.ID Qty Description Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
28806 6 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 Anti-split 1 1 - - -
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
3671 90 Ib WIRE GALV GUY 1/2 EHS Crossarm - - - - 2
Note 2 2 CN PG(qty)BLT(size) 5127 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20
4706* 1 MLDG GIRD PSTC 1X8 FT Crossarm - - 2 2 -
4727 2 INS GUY STIR 30000 78 5128 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X22
Crossarm 2 2 - - -
4737 2 INS VERT CLT 69 PLMR 5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
4783 6 INS SUSP 69KV WD 1OK Crossarm - - - - 4
Note 1 3 CLP INS ALUM(size) 5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
4875 2 STUD INS 3/4x7 1/2 Crossarm - - 4 4 -
4961 2 XARM 10 FT HVY DE 5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT Crossarm 4 4 - - -
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long) PassPort Codes
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5172 2 WSHR CRVD 4x4x13/16
5173 4 WSHR CRVD 4x4x15/16 CU Codes Qty
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN TALDE10H 2
5280 2 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN TASB 1
5281 2 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN T169VP 2
5314 2 GRIP GUY ALIT 1/2 LNG T169W 6
5320 2 GRIP GUY FMD 1/2 EHS TSS7.5 2
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5342 2 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5343 4 NUT MF 7/8 IN
5345 2 NUT EYE GALV 3/4 IN
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5352 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376* 6 STAPLE MILD SQ BARBED
5700 3 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
22149 2 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
22150 4 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN,CU,GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
* To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
clamps.
2 Refer to page 08-200-06 for parallel groove connectors.
�POMR,, 46 kV & 69 kV DEBA2 Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-190-01
Application. The ADE structure is used on 46-kV and 69-kV lines. It is constructed with an
Aluma-Form deadend arm.
For Deadend Arm mounting,
grounding,and bonding details,see
Details A,B,and C.
Note 2 Bill of Materials
0
o a
0 0
ForADE structures with
distribution underbuild,see 4727
Detail D.
----------------
Detail E
5320
3671
5314
IORM
ILMPMR. 46-kV & 69-kV ADE Structure
al.—�.Ia

01-190-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22150
See bolt sch Note 1 -Bill of Materials
5343
4737
5352
5173
4" ❑
4"
4783
5" 4
22149 v 6"
See bolt sch 5345
a — See note 1.
5342
5351
3657
5172
28806 5700
22150
See bolt sch
5343 Note 1-
If the lower guy mounting
5352 5173 position is used,a 4th
mounting bolt may be
5281 required.Consult with
T&D Design.
Detail A
Deadend Arm Mounting
(T169W)
1'Q IDAHO
46-kV & 69-kV ADE Structure COMM
Al ioncoar[amya"Y

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-190-03
Detail C
4874 4737
48235
4961
Detail D
Detail B. Crossarm Hardware Bonding
(TALDE10H)
Note 1
00
4737
4737
5169
Stud assembly
48235 in square nut,
22149 MF lock nut,
2-1/4"square washer,
5342 3" and lock washer.
3513 7"
5280 0 8'.
22149
5351
See bolt Sch 5280
5351 4875
Detail C. Pole Top Bracket Mount Detail D. Bonding Detail
(T169VP) (TPTB) (TSS7.5) (T169VP)
IORW
ILMPMR. 46-kV & 69-kV ADE Structure

01-190-04 Revised 04/14
Transmission
3 Detail A
° 24" 5372
max.
5371
3657
12'
min.
4706
See page 04 600 01
for proper application
of guy strain insulators. 5376 (See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
Detail E
Distribution Underbuild }
18'min.
5374
25448
18"
10%of min.
pole height
+2'_0"
5034
Detail F
Pole Grounding
IOMO
46-kV & 69-kV ADE Structure OWN POMRR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-190-05
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5065 BLT GALV DA 3/4X20
Cat. ID Qty Description Crossarm 1
5066 BLT GALV DA 3/4X22
28806 8 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 Crossarm - - 1 1 -
3657 80 ft CND CW SLID 6 5067 BLT GALV DA 3/4X24
3671 45 Ib WIRE GALV GUY 1/2EHS Crossarm 1 1 - - -
Note 2 2 CN PG(qty)BLT(size) 5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
4706* 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT Top Mnt. - - 2 2 2
4727 1 INS GUY STIR 300000 78 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
4737 3 INS VERT CLT 69 PLMR Top Mnt. 2 2 - - -
4783 6 INS SUSP 69KV WD 1OK 5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
Note 1 3 CLP INS ALUM(size) Crossarm - - 2
4874 1 STUD INS 3/4 X 7 1/2 5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
4875 2 STUD INS 3/47 1/2 Crossarm - - 2 2 -
4961 1 XARM 10 FT HVY DE 5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT Crossarm 2 2 - - -
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV DA 3/4X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long)
5169 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3X1/4, 13/16 PassPort Codes
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3X1/4, 11/16
5172 1 WSHR CRVD 4X4X1/4, 13/16
5173 2 WSHR CRVD 4X4X1/4, 15/16 CU Codes Qty
48235 1 BRKT POLETOP 69KV INS TALDE10H 1
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN T169VP 3
5280 5 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN T169W 6
5281 1 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN TPTB 1
5314 1 GRIP GUY ALIT 1/2 LNG TSS7.5 2
5320 1 GRIP GUY FMD 1/2 EHS
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5342 6 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5343 2 NUT MF 7/8 IN
5345 2 NUT EYE GALV 3/4 IN
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 9 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5352 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5371 1 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 40 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376* 6 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
5700 1 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 1 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
22149 6 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
22150 2 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
* To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
clamps.
2 Refer to page 08-200-06 for parallel groove connectors.
IDAW
"` R„ 46-kV & 69-kV ADE Structure

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-350-01
Application. This Tangent structure is used for 46-kV and 69-kV. This structure is assembled using
vertical polymer post insulators on an I V crossarm with saddles to support the insulators. The center
insulator is mounted on a pole top bracket that shares the through bolt of the crossarm. This is the
preferred 69-kV structure in eagle and hawk zones.
Detail C
Detail B
o
40"
Detail A
0
12"min. Detail D
10'-0" Detail E
NOTE. When designing and building
this configuration, always face the
transmission and distribution underbuilt
arms on the same side of the pole. On
this page,the distribution underbuilt
crossarm was intentionally shown on
the opposite of the transmission arm to
illustrate the clarity of bonding
�POMR. 46-kV & 69-kV Tangent Structure
Al I—C1W11Y

01-350-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding 11-010 Armor Rod
08-200 Clamp
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
Fyn
00
Note 1
4737
4737
4874
5359
22147 5170
5279 22147 4-1
® 8" 12"
5341 �� 5106 5350 0
5350 5180 5341
5279
5280 22149
5351 48235
5342 4877 See bolt sch
Detail A
Insulator&Saddle (TXASAD,T169VP)
Detail B
Insulator& Pole Top Bracket
(TPTB) (T169VP) (TASB)
22147
4737 5350
5279
5350
See bolt Sch 5341
5170 28806
22149
5351 5169
5342 11
11 4950
22149
5351 5193
5280 5351
5342
See bolt Sch
Detail C Crossarm Mounting & Bonding (TASM11)
WHO
46-kV & 69-kV Tangent Structure M—'6M—POW ERR
Al ioncoar[amya"Y

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-350-03
5099
22146 3" Detail A
/(�5188
24" 5372
max.
5371
3657
5177
5240
5349
5340
4706
5376 (See Section 02-002
5240 for Grounding Details)
22147
o �
See bolt sch 18"min.
5341
J5374
25448
5350 5170
18"
10%of min.
pole height
+21-01,
5034
Detail D
Brace Attachment
Detail E
Pole Grounding
�POMR. 46-kV & 69-kV Tangent Structure

01-350-04 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Bill
of Materials information. Cat.ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
Cat. ID Qty Description 5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
3657 55 ft CND CU CW SLID 6 Anti-split - - 1 1 1
4706* 1 MLDG PSTC GRID WIRE 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
4737 3 INS LNPST POLY 69 KV CL Anti-split 1 1 - - -
4874 1 STUD, INSUL,3/4x1-3/4" 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
4877 2 STUD, INSUL,3/4x14" Crossarm 1
Note 1 3 CLP INS ALUM(size) 5127 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20
4950 1 XARM,WOOD, 11 FT HD Crossarm - - 1 1 -
5034 1 ROD GRID 5/8 X 8 FT 5128 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X22
5099 2 BLT GALV MCH 1/2X10" Crossarm 1 1 - - -
5106 2 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X8" 5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
5169 1 WSHR CRVD 3X3X1/4, 13/16" PT Bracket - - 1 1 1
5170 3 WSHR CRVD 3X3X1/4, 11/16" 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
5177 2 WSHR FLGD 3X3, F/1/2"BLT PT Bracket 1 1 - - -
5180 4 WSHR RND 11/16"HOLE 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
5188 2 WSHR SQ 2X2,9/16"HOLE Bottom Brace - - - - 1
5193 1 WSHR SQ 4X4, 13/16"HOLE 5110 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X16
48235 1 BRKT, POLE TOP,69kV Bottom Brace - - 1 1 -
5240 1 pr BRC XARM WOOD 72" 5111 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X18
5279 3 CLIP BONDING 5/8" Bottom Brace 1 1 - -
5280 3 CLIP BONDING 3/4"
5340 2 NUT MF 1/2"
5341 4 NUT MF 5/8"
5342 4 NUT MF 3/4" PassPort Codes
5349 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 1/2"
5350 6 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8"
5351 7 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4" CU Codes Qty
5359 4 SADDLE CROSSARM TASB 1
5371 1 lb NAIL CW 10D TASM11 1
5372 25 CLIP GRID WIRE T169VP 3
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1-1/2" TPTB 1
5376* 6 STAPLE SQ BARBED TXASAD 2
22146 2 WSHR DBL COIL 9/16"HOLE
22147 4 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16"HOLE
22149 4 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16"HOLE
25448 1 CONN,CU,GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
28806 4 ft. CND CU BR SLID 6 SD
* To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator conductor
clamps.
Bonding and Grounding. The pole ground is to be terminated in a halo at a minimum of 12"
below the attachment point of the crossarm brace.Any outside insulator steel pins on the crossarm are to
be bonded to the crossarm anti-split bolts and the center insulator steel pin is to be bonded to the crossarm
through-bolt and the pole anti-split bolt. These changes have been made to help eliminate the problem of
nuisance tripping and the extreme difficulty that follows in attempting to locate the source of the problem.
The pole ground is terminated in a halo to eliminate radio noise and near the top of the pole to provide a
convenient ground point for maintenance personnel. For additional details concerning appropriate
grounding practices, seepage 02-002-01.
46-kV & 69-kV Tangent Structure 99PR.

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-450-01
Application. The GX-14D1 is an H-frame deadend structure used to deadend line tension in one
direction. It is used as a 46 kV or a 69 kV,horizontal configuration structure,built with a 14' crossarm and
an X-brace.The structure is commonly used in conjunction with a flying tap.
INote 1 -Bill of Materials I
wy�
See note 4.
Detail A
4783
Down Down
Guy Guy
6'-6"
B
4951 A
a
0III A0
® A
4'-0" B
4727 3657
5239 Detail B
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of 5261
the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator
mount as a conductor reference point for
calculating vertical clearances. Detail D
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum
of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any
distribution underbuild. This dimension is
valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer
spans, consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If there is a
possibility of energizing a broken or Detail C
sagging down guy then guy strain u
insulators are required. Anchor type may
also require the use of guy strain
insulators. See Section 04.
4. Avian. Eagle safe construction requires
138 kV steel construction insulators or
larger. See 06-10-04.
SCALE: 1'-0" =40'-0"
"RNPOMR 46 W & 69 W GX-14D1 Structure
AlI-ORPC. 11Y

01-450-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes, see sections:
02-002 Grounding Information 04-600 Down Guy Assembly
04-000 Anchoring 08-150 Deadend Insulator Assembly
04-100 Anchoring 08-350 Conductor Clamps
04-300 Anchoring 10-050 Vibration Dampers
04-510 Down Guy Assembly
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22147 4951 4838
5279 W
C
5341 See blt sch O �®
5350 5170 C QI4
4865 4783
Detail A Section A-A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly Deadend Attachment(T169W)
(TASB) (Materials not labeled are supplied with the crossarm)
Nut&Bolt
Assembly See bolt Sch
22150 5352
5281 5343
28806
Detail A t 4"
3657 16"
5700 ��
4"
5328 4 5"Typ-
4727
5342
5318
5351 Nut&Bolt
3669
5280 Assembly
See bit sch
5310
Section B-B
Crossarm Mount(TAG14)&Pole Eye Assembly(TPEA)
46 W & 69 W GX-14D1 Structure '99ppMRP
Al-CORPCa 1V

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-450-03
22149
3,. Detail A
5281
24" 5372
5352 See bolt sch max.
5371
5343 5173 3657
5700
4706
Detail B 5376 (See Section 02-002
Upper X-Brace Mount for Grounding Details)
(TXB6)
4
18"min.
5374 25448
5352
See bolt sch
18'
5343
5173 10%of min.
pole height
22150 +2'-0"
5034
Detail C
Lower X-Brace Mount
(TXB6)
Detail D
Pole Grounding
RNPOIMR 46 kV & 69 kV GX-14D1 Structure
AlI—ORPCa 11Y

01-450-04 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Cat.ID Qty Description Anti-split - - 2 2 2
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
28806 15 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 Anti-split 2 2 - - -
3657 160 ft CND CW SLID 6 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
3669 50 Ib WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS Pole eye' - - 4 8 8
4706 Note 1 2 MLDG GIRD PSTC 1X8 FT 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
Note 2 3 DE BLTD AL(size) Pole eye* 4 4 4 - -
4727 2 INS GUY STIR 30000 78
4783 3 INS SUSP 69KV WD 1OK 5127 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20
4838 3 SHKL AN 5/8x2.75 30K Pole eye* 4 4 -
4951 1 XARM ASSY DE 4X10X14 5137 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X14
5034 2 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT Crossarm - - - - 4
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long) 5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long) Crossarm - - 4 4 -
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long) 5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
5170 4 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16 Crossarm 4 4 - - -
5172 4 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X13/16
Or cross brace
5239 1 pr BRC X 2BY3&6-6 PS
5261 1 CENTER CLAMP Passport Codes
5279 2 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 2 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5281 2 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN CU Codes Qty
5310 2 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8
5316 2 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS TAG14 1
5328 4 EYE POLE PLT HD TASB 2
5341 2 NUT MF 5/8 IN T169W 3
5342 4 NUT MF 3/4 IN TPEA 2
TXB6 1
5343 4 NUT MF 7/8 IN
5350 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 7 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5352 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5371 2 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 90 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376 Note 1 12 STAPLE MILD SQ BARBED
5700 8 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 2 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
22149 4 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
22150 4 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN,CU,GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
1 To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
2 Refer to page 08-200-03 for bolted deadend clamps.
46 kV & 69 kV GX-14D1 Structure "` R.

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-455-01
Application. The GX-14 is a 46 kV or a 69 kV,two directional,H-frame, deadend structure built with
an X-brace and a 14-foot crossarm. It is used to deadend line tension in two directions where there is a
change in line tension or a change in conductor size.
o a o
0 0 0
Detail A
� a
W W
Down Down
Guy Guy
a a o
4737
I� 3'-3" 6'-6"
4951 B
A
LL
4'-0" B
4727 3657
5261 Detail B
Detail D
5239
Detail C
a
MMPOMR, 46 kV & 69 kV GX-14 Structure
AlIo ORPCa 11Y

01-455-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes, see sections:
02-002 Grounding Information 08-150 Deadend Insulator Assembly
04-000 Anchoring 08-350 Conductor Clamps
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 10-050 Vibration Dampers
06-200 Vertical Post Insulators
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
l� 4805
o o Note 1
4737
4737
C
C DED
5280 22147
0
5342 5351
4877
CJ
3" 6" -
Section A-A Section W-W
Deadend Attachment(Supplied with crossarm) Jumper Support
(T169W) (T169VP)
28806 See Nut Nut&Bolt Assembly#1
Detail A Y
3657 i 16"
4352 [
4 Nut&Bolt
5328 4 A 5"Typ Assembly#1 See bolt sch
4727 22150 5352
5281 5343
5318 y
5342
3669 Nut& Bolt 5351
Assembly 5280
#2
See bolt sch
5310
Section B-B. Crossarm Mount&Pole Eye Assembly(TAG14)(TPEA)
46 W & 69 W GX-14 Structure '99ppMRP

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-455-03
i
8"
3"
Detail A5 3725279 22147 � max.
531 5371
54
5170 3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly(TASB)
22149 4706
5281 NW 5376
(See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
5352 See bolt sch
5343 5173
18"min.
5700 5374
25448
18"
Detail B 10%of min.
Lower X-Brace Mount(TXB6) pole height
+2_0,
5351
See bolt sch Detail D
5342 5172
Pole Grounding
�
22149
Detail C
Lower X-Brace Mount(TXB6)
RNPOMR, 46 kV & 69 kV GX-14 Structure
AlI—ORPCa 11Y

01-455-04 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Cat.ID Qty Description Anti-split - - 2 2 2
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
28806 12 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 Anti-split 2 2 - - -
3657 160 ft CND CW SLID 6 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
3669 100 Ib WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS Pole eye' - - 4 8 8
4706 Note 1 2 MLDG GIRD PSTC 1X8 FT 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
4727 4 INS GUY STIR 30000 78 Pole eye* 4 4 4 - -
4737 3 INS VERT CLT 69 PLMR
4805 3 ADPTR CLT V138KV INS 5127 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20
Note 2 3 CLP LP INS(size) Pole eye* 4 4 -
4877 3 STUD INS 3/4X14 WD 5137 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X14
4951 1 XARM ASSY DE 4X10X14 Crossarm - - - - 4
5034 2 ROD GIRD CW 5/8 X 8 FT 5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long) Crossarm - - 4 4 -
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long) 5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long) Crossarm 4 4 - - -
5170 4 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5172 4 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X13/16 Or cross brace
5239 1 pr BRC X 2BY3&6-6 PS
5261 1 CENTER CLAMP PassPort Codes
5279 2 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 7 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5281 2 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN CU Codes Qty
5310 4 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8 TAG14 1
5316 4 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS TASB 2
5328 4 EYE POLE PLT HD T169VP 3
5341 2 NUT MF 5/8 IN T169W 6
5342 11 NUT MF 3/4 IN TPEA 2
5343 4 NUT MF 7/8 IN TXB6 1
5350 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 7 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5352 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5371 2 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 90 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376 Note 1 12 STAPLE MILD SQ BARBED
5700 7 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 2 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
22149 7 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
22150 4 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN,CU,GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
1 To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
2 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator clamps.
46 kV & 69 kV GX-14 Structure "` R.

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-460-01
Application. The GX-28 is a 138-kV,two directional,H-frame, deadend structure built with an X-
brace and a 28-foot crossarm. It is typically used as an in-line deadend structure. It may also be used to
deadend line tension in two directions where there is a change in line tension or a change in conductor
size. When it is used where there is a change in line tension or conductor size, consult with T&D Design.
AS, e W t t
See note 4. Detail A
0 0
0 0
tDown Down
Guy Guy
13'-6"
8" 4955 B A
B A
4727 C C
3657
6'-0"
Detail B
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the
elevation of the bottom bolt of the
lowest insulator mount as a 5262
conductor reference point for
calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a
minimum of 12'to the crossarm Detail D
mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild.This dimension is
valid for spans of 300'or less. For
longer spans, consult with
engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If there 5236
is a possibility of energizing a
broken or sagging down guy then
guy strain insulators are required. Detail C
Anchor type may also require the
use of guy strain insulators. See
Section 04.
4. Avian. Eagle safe construction
requires 138-kV steel
construction insulators or larger.
See 06-10-04.
AM
111111111MPMR. 138-kV GX-28 Structure

01-460-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes, see sections:
02-002 Grounding Information 08-150 Deadend Insulator Assembly
04-000 Anchoring 08-350 Conductor Clamps
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 10-050 Vibration Dampers
06-200 Vertical Post Insulators
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
4785
0
Note 1 -Bill of Mat 4839
See Note 1
-Note 1-
Use the compression deadend
clamp for cable sizes 397 and
up. Use a bolted deadend
clamp for cable sizes below 397.
Section A-A
Deadend Attachment
(TAG28) (T1138W)
22150 5281
5079 Detail A
8
5343 5194 5352 6
Crossarm Bolt 28806 5328 ° I 5"Typ.
Assembly
4727
5320
5342
3671 Nut&Bolt 5351
Assembly 5280
See bolt sch
5313
Section B-B
Crossarm Mount& Pole Eye Assembly
IWM WHO
138-kV GX-28 Structure WPOWERR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-460-03
22147
Crossarm
5 5341 279 �3��
Assembly See blt sch
5350 5170
® 5280 Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
506 (TASB)
3" Detail A
Section C-C 24" 5372
Deadend Mounting Brackets max.
5371
22149 3657
5281
5352 See bolt sch
5343 5173
4706
5700 5376 (See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
Detail B
Upper X-Brace Mount(TXB13)
18"min.
5374
25448
18"
5351 10%of min.
See bolt sch pole height
5342 � 5172 5034
22149
Detail C Detail D
Lower X-Brace Mount(TXB13) Pole Grounding
�PMRa. 138-kV GX-28 Structure

01-460-04 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5079 Crossarm - - 2 2 2
Cat. ID Qty Description 5080 Crossarm 2 2 - - -
3469 3 WIRE TIE SD AL 4 5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
28806 17 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 Anti-split - - 2 2 2
3657 160 ft CND CW SLID 6 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
3671 1000 ft WIRE GALV GUY 1/2EHS Anti-split 2 2 - - -
Note 1 3 DE CMPR AL(size) 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
4706 2 MLDG GIRD PSTC 1x8 FT Pole eye - - 4 4 4
4727 4 INS GUY STIR 30000 78 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
4736 3 INS LP VERT TIE 69KV Pole eye 4 4 - - -
4839 3 SCKT CLV HL 52-3 5137 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X14
4877 3 STUD INS 3/4X14 WD Cross brace - - - - 2
4955 1 XARM ASSY 6X8X28 5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
5034 2 ROD GIRD CW 5/8 X 8 FT Cross brace - - 2 2 2
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long) 5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long) Cross brace 2 2 2 2 -
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long) 5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
Cross brace 2 2 - -
5170 4 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5173 4 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16
5236 1 pr BRC X 3BY4&13-6 PS
5262 1 CENTER CLAMP PassPort Codes
5279 2 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 5 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5281 4 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN CU Codes Qty
5313 4 GRIP GUY ALIT 1/2 TASB 2
5320 4 GRIP GUY FMD 1/2 EHS TAG28 1
5328 4 EYE POLE PLT HD T1138W 6
5341 2 NUT MF 5/8 IN TPEA 2
5342 4 NUT MF 3/4 IN TXB13 1
5343 8 NUT MF 7/8 IN
5350 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 5 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5352 4 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5371 2 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 90 CLIP GIRD WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376 12 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
5700 6 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 2 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
22149 7 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
22150 8 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
1 Refer to page 08-200-04 for compression deadend
clamps.
138-kV GX-28 Structure WMPOWERR

Transmission Revised 10/18 01-500-01
Application. The AXES is a 69 kV or 138 kV horizontal configuration,H—frame,tangent structure
with an X-brace, arm Brace, and a Shield wire support. It is used where long conductor spans are possible
helping to minimize the number of structures needed.
Use the subassemblies shown as details in this section for maintenance of existing 69 kV structures with
11'-6"pole spacing utilizing a 28'arm. See Section 1-252 of the Materials Manual for the required 69 kV
X-brace replacement.
I � Detail A
1 �A
A
Detail B
5'-6"
g C
B
6'-0"
C
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the
elevation of the bottom bolt of the
lowest insulator mount as a
conductor reference point for
calculating vertical clearances. Detail C
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a
minimum of 12'to the crossarm
mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild.This dimension is
valid for spans of 300'or less. For
longer spans, consult with
engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If there
is a possibility of energizing a
broken or sagging down guy then
guy strain insulators are required.
Anchor type may also require the
use of guy strain insulators. See
Section 04.
4. Standard Drawing:
Transmission DWG#23A-67783
ON PMER. 69 W & 138 W AXBS Structure

01-500-02 Revised 04/15
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes, see sections:
02-002 Grounding Information 08-300 Conductor Clamps
08-100 Insulator String Assembly 10-050 Vibration Dampers
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
5123
5173
22150
5173
5352
5138
t
5343
28806 5281
28806
��5342
5700
7 5236
5123
5262
5140
Detail A
Head Brace Mount
(THDBR136)
5173 Detail C
0
5352 Cross Brace
(TXB13)
5343 ° 5138
5281
22150
v
54949
Detail B 5352
Guy Brace Assembly
(TA28BA) 5343
°
5135
5187
IWM IDAHO
69 W & 138 W AXBS Structure W@POWERR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 12/15 01-5OO-03
l 2'_0"
3„ max.
5371
5372
3657
5374
o
12"min.
10%of
Pole Height
+2'-0" 18"
min. 5034
Detail D
Pole Grounding
5258 5194
22150 5194
5281
4115 5352
4823 j!j
5343
O
5077
4952
Section A-A 5700
Shield Wire Attachment
TCLVYE12,TCS3
Section B-B
Crossarm Mount
TA28
PIMR. 69 kV & 138 kV AXBS Structure

01-500-04 Revised 04/15
Transmission
U Bill of Materials (continued)
0 0
Cat. ID Qty Description
-_� 22147 2 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
22149 2 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
Supplied with 4816 22150 10 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
Crossarm 25448 2 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
28806 12ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
4775 54949 2 FGRD W/22 TRNBL,F/28WA AXBS
Bolt Schedule
Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5077 BLT GALV DA 7/8X22
Crossarm - - - 2 2
Section C-C 5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Spacer Bracket&Insulator Anti-split - - 2 2 2
TCLVYB,T110BS 5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
Head brace - - 2 2 2
Bill of Materials 5135 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X6
Head brace 2 2 - - -
See the Work Order and PassPort for current 5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
Cross brace - - 2 2 4
Bill of Materials information. 5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
Cross brace - 2 2 2 -
Cat.ID Qty Description
3657 160 ft CND CW SLID 6 Passport Codes
4115 2 CLP SUSP FIE0.3-0.7
4223 2 ROD,ARMR GALV 16 BLK
4775 24 INS SUSP 10 PRC 20K CU Codes Qty
4816 3 CLV Y BALL 52-3 TASB 2
4823 2 CLV Y-EYE TWTD 1/2 TA28 1
4952 1 pr XARM ASSY LAM 7-1/2X3-1/4X28 TA28BA 2
5034 2 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT TCLVYB 3
THDBR136 1
5077 2 BLT GALV DA 7/8X22 TXB13 1
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long) T11 OBS 24
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long)
5170 4 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5172 8 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X13/16
5173 4 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16
5187 4 WSHR SO 2X2X 15/16
5194 4 WSHR SO 4X4 X 15/16
5236 1 pr BRC X 3 BY 4&13-6PS
5258 1 BRC HD STL H-FRAME
5262 1 CENTER CLAMP
5279 2 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 2 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5281 8 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN
5341 2 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5342 2 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5343 10 NUT MF 7/8 IN
5350 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5352 20 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5371 2 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 80 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5700 6 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6
Bill of Materials continues on the next column
69 kV & 138 kV AXBS Structure "`ERR

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-510-01
Application. The AHXS structure is a 69-kV or 138-kV horizontal configuration deadend structure. It
is used for turning line angles greater than 30°. Conductor tension must be limited such that the deadend
load,with a 1:1 guy slope,does not exceed the 10,300 lb design limit of the guy assembly(5,900 lb for
the shield wire).Pole bands and 1/2" guys will be needed if the 5,900 lb tension limit is exceeded.Always
check the phase to shield-wire down-guy clearances on this structure. If the line angle is shallow,guy
strain insulators may be required on more guys than just the inner shield wire guys as shown below.
Pole spacing is typically 16'-6" for 69-kV and 138-kV lines; 25'for 230-kV construction or when
additional pole spacing is required. See IPCo drawing Vault#13380006 for construction dimensions of
the 230-kV structure
See note 4.
Detail K
4"x 10"x 18'-0"Timber 4"x x Timber
trimmed to 23'-6"
5'6" 5'-6„ Detail A
® Detail B
5'-6" Detail D Detail C
1
Detail J
Detail E
J1
1 Detail H
Detail L
Detail F
Detail G
Notes 16'-6" T 16'-6"
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor reference
point for calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution underbuild.This
dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans,consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If there is a possibility of energizing a broken or sagging down guy then guy strain
insulators are required.Anchor type may also require the use of guy strain insulators. See Section 04.
4. Avian. Eagle safe construction requires 138-kV steel construction insulators or larger. See 06-10-04.
�POMR. 69-kV & 138-kV AHXS Structure

01-510-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
See bolt sch
See bolt sch
5173
24267 22147
5170 5350
See blt sch 5341
Anti-split bolt 5279
24269
5194 22150 5194
22150
5281 ;�_ 5352 5281 5352
5343 5343
3"
12"
o � o
3513
3513 5700
Center Pole
Outside Poles
5342 5351
22149 5192 22146
5278 5096
5340
j--050093::)
51885349
Crossarm Anti-split Bolt
Hanging Bolt Assembly
Detail A Crossarm Mounting (TTAHX16) (or TTAHX25)
IWMI P1HO
69-kV & 138-kV AHXS Structure 991130WERR
Al ipncoar company

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-510-03
22147 5342 /�519
52793 22149 2
5341 See blt sch
5350 5170
® 5093
Detail B
Anti-split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
5342 5351 Note 3-Bill of Mat.
5280
22149 5192
28806
o
r~6'- I—6"—
5093
Detail C
Crossarm Anti-split Bolt Bonding Side View
Note 2-Bill of Mat.
Detail D
Suspension Insulator Bolt Attachment Assy
(Hanging bolt and hardware included in TTAHX16
or TTAHX25.)
Note 3-B II of M t. Note 4-Bi of Mat Note 1 -B I of IV
Detail E
Insulator/Deadend Assembly
(See pages 08-150-01 through-12 for various other insulator assemblies.)
�POMR. 69-kV & 138-kV AHXS Structure

01-510-04 Revised 04/14
Transmission
®®® ®®® ®® ®®
Detail H
5245
°
5263
® ° o
Detail G
Detail F
X-Brace Assembly
16'6" Pole Spacing (TXB16) or 25' Pole Spacing (TXB25)
5281
5245 5343 5352
°
53 °
72,
52
53 243 See bolt sch
22150 5172 150
Detail G Detail H
X-Brace Mounting to Outside Poles X-Brace Grounding Detail
IWM WHO
69-kV & 138-kV AHXS Structure WPOWERR
Al ipncoar company

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-510-05
Note 5-Bill of Materials
5334
5362 - _
5352
5206 5134
5343
0
o � IIID
0 8"
EM Note 3-Bill of Mat.
0 28806
3671
3657
5313
Detail J
Pole Band Assembly
(TDG12) (TPB2...S, M, or L)
ILMPOMR. 69-kV & 138-kV AHXS Structure

01-510-06 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Detail B
Y 4845
6"
0 0
�
4060 5„
o 3669
5312 See note 3.
3669
4060
g
4727 �
5310
Detail K
Static Wire Assembly
(TSWDDE38)(TPEA)(TDG38)
Bolt Schedule Cat.ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class X-Brace* - - 2 2 3
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3 5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
X-Brace' 2 2 3 3 1
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12 5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
Anti-split - - 3 3 3 Crossarm - - 2 2 2
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14 5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
Anti-split 3 3 - - - X-Brace 3 3 1 1 -
5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14 5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
Pole Eye - - - 8 8 Crossarm 2 2 - -
5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16 5141 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X22
Pole Eye 8 8 8 - - X-Brace" 1 1 - -
5137 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X14 5141 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X22
X-Brace* 2 Crossarm 1 1 1 1 1
Double the number of bolts for pole spacings of 25'-0". Double the number of bolts for pole spacings of 25'-0".
IwM I P1HO
69-kV & 138-kV AHXS Structure MPOWERR
Al ipncoar company

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-510-07
Detail A
Detail B
24" 5372
max.
5371
3657
(See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
18"min.
5374
25448
18"
10%of min.
pole height
+2'-0"
5034
Detail L
Pole Grounding
INEW—POMRa. 69-kV & 138-kV AHXS Structure
al.—�.Ia

01-510-08 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Bill of Materials
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Bill of Materials (continued)
Bill of Materials information.
Cat. ID Qty Description
Cat. ID Qty Description 5278 1 CLIP BONDING 1/2 IN
28806 35 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 5279 3 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
3657 160 ft CND CW SLID 6 5280 4 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
3669 100 lb WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS 5281 3 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN
3671 175 lb WIRE GALV GUY 1/2EHS 5310 4 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8
4060 4 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0 5312 4 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 RL
4061 6 CN PG 1 BLT 397&2/0 5313 6 GRIP GUY ALIT 1/2
Note 2 3 CLP SUSP AL(size) 5316 8 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS
Note 1 3 DE BLTD AL(size) 5320 6 GRIP GUY FMD 1/2 EHS
4727 4 INS GUY STIR 30,000 78"X3/4" 5328 8 EYE POLE PLT HD
Note 3 9 INS SUSP 138 kV(stl/wd) 5334 12 pr LINK HD 2WAY POLEBND
4838 3 SHKL AN 5/8X2.75 30K 5340 1 NUT MF 1/2 IN
4845 4 CLV THMB BNK 5341 3 NUT MF 5/8 IN
Note 4 6 SCKT EYE HL(size) 5342 8 NUT MF 3/4 IN
24267 1 TIMBER 4 X 10 X 18FT 5343 15 NUT MF 7/8 IN
24269 1 TIMBER 4 X 10 X 28FT 5349 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 1/2
5034 3 ROD GRID CW 5/8x8 FT 5350 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5093 3 BLT SHDR EYE 3/4X12 5351 4 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5096 1 BLT GALV MCH 1/2x6 5352 15 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
See Bolt Sch 3 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X 5362 6 SHV POLE BND 7/8
See Bolt Sch 8 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X 5371 3 lb NAIL GALV 10D
See Bolt Sch 3 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X 5372 105 CLIP GRID WIRE
5134 12 BLT GALV MCH 7/8 X 3 5700 23 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
5170 6 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X 11/16 22146 1 WSHR DBL COIL 9/16 HOLE
5173 6 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X 15/16 22147 3 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
5188 2 WSHR SQ 2X2 X 9/16 22149 3 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
5192 3 WSHR SQ 3X3 X 13/16 22150 9 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
5194 4 WSHR SQ 4X4 X 15/16 25448 3 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
5206 6 CLIP BONDING POLEBND 1 Refer to page 08-200-03 for bolted deadend clamps.
Note 5 6 BND POLE 2WAY(size) 2 Refer to page 08-200-02 for suspension clamps.
5245 2 pr BRC CROSS 3X7X16'-6" 3 Refer to page 06-010-01 for suspension insulators.
5263-Note 6 2 CENTER CLAMP 4 Refer to page 2-311-01 in the Materials Manual for hot
line socket eyes.
5 Refer to page 04-505-02 for pole band assemblies.
6 This Bill of Materials is typical for 16'-6"pole spacing.
PassPort Codes
CU Codes Qty
TASB 2
TPB2... 6
TPEA 4
TSWDDE38 2
TTAHX16orTTAHX25 1
TXB16 or TXB25 2
69-kV & 138-kV AHXS Structure WMPRR

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-525-01
Application. The EXS is a 69-kV or 138-kV horizontal configuration, H-frame, heavy running
angle structure with an X-brace and a shield wire support. It is used for turning line angles from
15°-30°. Line angles above 30' are possible with small conductors provided the pole eye assembly
load limit is not exceeded. Conductor tension must be limited to keep the transverse load below the
5,900 pound design limit of the guy assembly. See section 08-130 for a special running angle
assembly for line angles greater than 30°.
300 300 See
8.0
a m x
Note 3 J See Note 4.
Heavy Running Angles (up to 300)
Detail A 6„
A A 4'-6"
6"
9'-0"
4'-6"
Detail B
See Note 1
4727
1 1 See Note 2
1 1
Detail C
5245 5316 Detail E
5263
5310
Detail D
16'-6" 16'-6"
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor
reference point for calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild.This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with
engineering.
3. Construction Practice. If there is a possibility of energizing a broken or sagging down guy then guy
strain insulators are required.Anchor type may also require the use of guy strain insulators. See
Section 04.
4. Avian. Eagle safe construction requires 138-kV steel construction insulators or larger. See 06-10-04.
�POMR. 69-kV & 138-kV EXS Structure
al.—�­

01-525-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see sections:
02-002 Grounding Information 08-100 Insulator String Assembly
04-000 Anchoring 08-174 Shield Wire Assembly
04-100 Anchoring 08-300 Conductor Clamps
04-300 Anchoring 10-050 Vibration Dampers
04-510 Down Guy Assembly 11-010 Armor Rods
04-600 Down Guy Assembly
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
5361
5214 5312
5316
4823
3669
5333
5206 3657 6
a
28806 ® 5316
4114 5700
4060
5310
Detail A
Shield Wire/Head Guy Assembly(THG)
5214 5379
5333
5361
�o
5351
5119
5206 5342
Section A-A
4-Way Pole Band (TPB4) (TBPL)
IWMI P1HO
69-kV & 138-kV EXS Structure MPOMRR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-525-03
28806 5328
5280 See bolt sch
5342
00 4845
5316
5351
/ 4060
3657 5700
Detail A
Note 2&3 Bill of Materials Detail B
Detail B Pole Eye Assembly 24" z
(TPEA) max.
22150
3657
5281
5352 See bolt sch
5343 5173
5700 (See Section 02-002
for Grounding Details)
Detail C Upper X-Brace Mount
(T2XB16) 18"min.
5374
25448
18"
10%of min.
pole height
5352
See bolt sch
5034
i22150
5173
Detail E Pole Grounding
Detail D Lower X-Brace Mount(T2XB16)
�POMR. 69-kV & 138-kV EXS Structure

01-525-04 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat.ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
Cat. ID Qty Description 5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
Note 2 5 CLP SUSP AL(size) Pole eye 6
Note 3 5 ARMOR ROD AL(size) 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
28806 17 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 Pole eye 6
3657 240 ft CND CW SLID 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
3669 100 Ib WIRE GALV GUY 3/8ENS Pole eye 6
4060 2 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0 5127 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20
Pole eye 6 6 - - -
4113 2 CLP SUSP FE(size) 5137 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X14
4727 4 INS GUY STIR 30000 78 Cross brace - - - - 2
4785 3 INS SUSP 138KV WD1OK 5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
4823 2 CLV Y EYE TWTD 1/2 Cross brace - - 2 2 3
4845 3 CLV THMB BNK 5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
5034 3 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT Cross brace 2 2 3 3 1
5119 3 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X3 5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long) Cross brace 3 3 1 1 -
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long) 5141 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X22
5173 4 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16 Cross brace 1 1 - - -
5206 3 CLIP GRD POLE BAND
5214 3 BND POLE 4WAY 8-11
5245 2 pr BRC CROSS 3X7X16-6
5263 2 CENTER CLAMP Passport Codes
5280 3 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5281 12 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN
5312 4 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 RL CU Codes Qty
5312 2 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8 RL THG 1
5316 6 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS TPBL 7
5328 6 EYE POLE TPB4 3
5333 7 LINK MD POLE BND TPEA 3
5342 11 NUT MF 3/4 IN TXB16 2
5343 6 NUT MF 7/8 IN
5351 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5352 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5361 5 SHV POLE BND 3/4
5371 3 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 120 CLIP GRID WIRE
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5379 9 SCREW LAG 1/2 X 4 IN
5700 10 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6
22150 6 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN, CU, GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
2 Refer to page 08-200-02 for suspension clamps.
3 Refer to page 11-010-01 for armor rods.
69-kV & 138-kV EXS Structure WMPRR

Transmission 01-700-01
length +2'
10 Incising Flat Top
o `t
6' 2"
Pole Marking Sweep Pole Face
Groundline Length
Class
Butt Marking Species
-Length Producer
-Class Plant
Preservative
-Species Treament Date
Retention
Application. The following is a listing by Cat.ID,short description,and PassPort Code of the treated
wood poles used on the Idaho Power transmission and distribution system.
Cat.ID Short Description PassPort Code Cat.ID Short Description PassPort Code
4933 POLE WOOD 35 FT CL5 DP35C5 4888 POLE WOOD 75 FT CL H2 TP75CH2
4908 POLE WOOD 40 FT CL 2 DP40C2 TP40C2 4889 POLE WOOD 75 FT CL H1 TP75CH1
4919 POLE WOOD 40 FT CL 3 DP40C3 TP40C3 4915 POLE WOOD 75 FT CL 2 TP75C2
POLE WOOD 75 FT CL 1 TP75C1
49
4930 POLE WOOD 40 FT CL 4 DP40C4
4926 POLE WOOD 75 FT CL 3 TP75C3
4897 POLE WOOD 45 FT CL 1 DP45C1 TP45C1 4890 POLE WOOD 80 FT CL H2 TP80CH2
4909 POLE WOOD 45 FT CL 2 DP45C2 TP45C2 4891 POLE WOOD 80 FT CL H1 TP80CH1
4920 POLE WOOD 45 FT CL 3 DP45C3 TP45C3 4904 POLE WOOD 80 FT CL 1 TP80C1
4931 POLE WOOD 45 FT CL 4 DP45C4 4916 POLE WOOD 80 FT CL 2 TP80C2
19930 POLE WOOD 50 FT CL H1 TP50CH1 4927 POLE WOOD 80 FT CL 3 TP80C3
4898 POLE WOOD 50 FT CL 1 DP50C1 TP50C1 4892 POLE WOOD 85 FT CL H2 TP85CH2
4910 POLE WOOD 50 FT CL 2 DP50C2 TP50C2 4893 POLE WOOD 85 FT CL H1 TP85CH1
4921 POLE WOOD 50 FT CL 3 DP50C3 TP50C3 4905 POLE WOOD 85 FT CL 1 TP85C1
19929 POLE WOOD 55 FT CL H2 TP55CH2 4917 POLE WOOD 85 FT CL 2 TP85C2
4882 POLE WOOD 55 FT CL H1 TP55CH1 19931 POLE WOOD 85 FT CL 3 TP85C3
4899 POLE WOOD 55 FT CL 1 DP55C1 TP55C1 18515 POLE WOOD 90 FT CL H2 TP90CH2
4911 POLE WOOD 55 FT CL 2 DP55C2 TP55C2 4894 POLE WOOD 90 FT CL H1 TP90CH1
4922 POLE WOOD 55 FT CL 3 DP55C3 TP55C3 4906 POLE WOOD 90 FT CL 1 TP90C1
4883 POLE WOOD 60 FT CL H2 TP60CH2 19932 POLE WOOD 90 FT CL 2 TP90C2
4884 POLE WOOD 60 FT CL H1 TP60CH1 19933 POLE WOOD 90 FT CL 3 TP90C3
4900 POLE WOOD 60 FT CL 1 DP60C1 TP60C1 19934 POLE WOOD 95 FT CL H2 None
4912 POLE WOOD 60 FT CL 2 DP60C2 TP60C2 19935 POLE WOOD 95 FT CL H1 TP95CH1
4923 POLE WOOD 60 FT CL 3 DP60C3 TP60C3 4907 POLE WOOD 95 FT CL 1 TP95C1
4885 POLE WOOD 65 FT CL H2 TP65CH2 19936 POLE WOOD 95 FT CL 2 None
4886 POLE WOOD 65 FT CL H1 TP65CH1 19937 POLE WOOD 95 FT CL 3 None
4901 POLE WOOD 65 FT CL 1 DP65C1 TP65C1 19938 POLE WOOD 100 FT CLH2 None
4913 POLE WOOD 65 FT CL 2 DP65C2 TP65C2 4895 POLE WOOD 100 FT CLH1 TP100CH1
4924 POLE WOOD 65 FT CL 3 DP65C3 TP65C3 4936 POLE WOOD 100 FT CL 1 None
13571 POLE WOOD 70 FT CL H2 TP70CH2 4939 POLE WOOD 100 FT CL 2 None
4887 POLE WOOD 70 FT CL H1 TP70CH1 4942 POLE WOOD 100 FT CL 3 None
4902 POLE WOOD 70 FT CL 1 TP70C1 19939 POLE WOOD 105 FT CLH2 None
4914 POLE WOOD 70 FT CL 2 TP70C2 19940 POLE WOOD 105 FT CLH1 TP105CH1
4925 POLE WOOD 70 FT CL 3 TP70C3 4937 POLE WOOD 105 FT CL 1 None
4940 POLE WOOD 105 FT CL 2 None
4943 POLE WOOD 105 FT CL 3 None
19941 POLE WOOD 110 FT CLH2 None
19942 POLE WOOD 110 FT CLH1 TP110CH1
4938 POLE WOOD 110 FT CL 1 None
4941 POLE WOOD 110 FT CL 2 None
4944 POLE WOOD 110 FT CL 3 None
�ppMR Wood Poles
Revised 10/03

Transmission Revised 08/21 01-701-01
Wood Pole Stubbing
When to Stub. ♦ Wrap the top pole-band around the pole and
stub. Follow these steps to secure the pole-
Wood and steel stubs are no longer used to band:
reinforce poles. Replace poles suffering from 1. Insert a DA bolt through a hole on the
obvious damage. back side of the band,passing it
between the pole and the stub,but
However, emergency use of stubs to temporarily stopping short of the front side of the
reinforce a damaged pole is allowed.After the pole band.
installation, a work order must be created to
replace the damaged pole. 2. Use the special band tightening tool or a
spud wrench to cinch up the band as
How to Stub. tight as possible.
♦ Install the treated wood stub at the same 3. With the band held taught,push the DA
depth as the original pole and bind it to the bolt through the hole on the front side of
original pole with metal band assemblies as the band.
shown in Figure 2. 4. Tighten the assembly using curved
See the table below for the appropriate stub to washers and nuts.
use. 5. Fasten the free end of the band with a
1/2" lag screw through one of its end
Table 1. Stub Selection Guide holes and one of the holes in the band
Stub Dimensions below it.
Pole Height Stub Min.Top Min.Top
6. Repeat this procedure for each of the
(Ft) Length(Ft) Dia.(In) Circ. (In) p
45-50 12 14 44 other bands.This results in a rigid and
55&Taller 16 16 50 secure installation.
♦ Place the stub at a right angle to the line of Date Nails. A"date nail"must be driven flush
poles and preferably on the field side.A with the stub one-inch above the top pole-band
structure change-out is required where space as shown in Figure 1 Banding a Wood
is limited, such as in alleys, and when a pole Pole Stub Assembly.
is rejected.In-line placement of stubs is not
acceptable for transmission applications. Optional Steel Stub.A steel stub is an
option to the wood stub. However,it requires
♦ Dig the stub hole,taking care not to obstruct that the pole have at least one inch of shell at the
or damage cables, ground wires, and ground ground line to meet the strength requirements.
rods that are connected below ground level. Even so,the steel stub provides a cost savings in
♦ Remove all rotted wood around the pole. Do labor,which may be advantageous.
not reuse this material as back-fill,because
the fungus that caused the decay is still
present and will continue to cause damage.
♦ Place and compact the back-fill around the
stub in 6" layers.
"`�R. Wood Pole Stubbing

01-701-02 Revised 10/03
Transmission
Bill of Materials
5051
line Table 2. Bill of Materials for a 12'Stub
5170
Cat.ID Qty Description
Street If(_ Property 3657 13 ft CND CW SLID 6
5033 1 ROD GRID CW 1/2X8 FT
Side `J Side 4086 1 CLP GRID 1/2 IN 10-2
4982 1 STUB POLE WOOD 12 FT
5218 3 BND POLE STUB LG
5379 5051 3 BLT GALV DA 5/8X16
5170 6 WSHR CRVD 3X3X11/16
5379 3 SCREW LAG 1/2X4 IN
5700 1 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6
8878 1 ea NAIL DATE AL 2X3/16
4982
I 4983
Table 3. Bill of Materials for a 16'Stub
Date Cat.ID Qty Description
Nail 1 V min.
3657 13 ft CND CW SLID 6
5033 1 ROD GRID CW 1/2X8 FT
00000 o000 4086 1 CLP GRID 1/2 IN 10-2
1 4983 1 STUB POLE WOOD 16 FT
5218 III S I (I 12"to 18" 5218 3 BND POLE STUB LG
0000 � o00
5051 3 BLT GALV DA 5/8X16
�I 5170 6 WSHR CRVD 3X3X11/16
min. 5379 3 SCREW LAG 1/2X4 IN
min. 5700 1 CONN, C-TAP,#6 to#6
8878 1 ea NAIL DATE AL 2X3/16
5700 r
0 12"Max.
�18"min. PassPort Codes
CU Codes For a
TWSB12 12'Stub
TWSB16 16'Stub
10%of 25448
pole height
+2-0 5034
Locate the
ground rod
at least 6"
away from
the stub.
Figure 1 Banding a Wood
Pole Stub Assembly
Wood Pole Stubbing '`per RR.

Transmission 01-701-03
Bill of Materials
Table 2. Bill of Materials for a 12'Stub Table 3. Bill of Materials for a 16'Stub
Cat.ID Qty Description Cat.ID Qty Description
3657 13 ft CND CW SLID 6 3657 13 ft CND CW SLID 6
5033 1 ROD GRID CW 1/2X8 FT 5033 1 ROD GRID CW 1/2X8 FT
4086 1 CLP GRID 1/2 IN 10-2 4086 1 CLP GRID 1/2 IN 10-2
4982 1 STUB POLE WOOD 12 FT 4983 1 STUB POLE WOOD 16 FT
5218 3 BND POLE STUB LG 5218 3 BND POLE STUB LG
5051 3 BLT GALV DA 5/8X16 5051 3 BLT GALV DA 5/8X16
5170 6 WSHR CRVD 3X3X11/16 5170 6 WSHR CRVD 3X3X11/16
5379 3 SCREW LAG 1/2X4 IN 5379 3 SCREW LAG 1/2X4 IN
5700 1 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6 5700 1 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
8878 1 ea NAIL DATE AL 2X3/16 8878 1 ea NAIL DATE AL 2X3/16
PassPort Codes
CU Codes For a
TWSB12 12'Stub
TWSB16 16'Stub
`ppR Wood Pole Reinforcement - Wood Stubs
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-705-01
Mod/Pole Butt Replacement System
OBSOLETE
Application. The Mod/Pole Butt
Replacement(MPBR)system is a"splice-
repair"method used to restore poles damaged Existing wood 1
by decay or insects,fire,vehicle accidents, pole
and so forth on both the transmission and the I Pole ground
distribution systems. The Mod/Pole is a wire
tapered,prestressed concrete module used to 'Max O.D.
replace the damaged lower section of a pole. 14-3/4"
p g p Quick setting
The entire upper section of the wood pole,if grout
exhibiting no decay problems,is transferred
and secured to the Mod/Pole with a galvanized
steel connector and quick-setting grout. - `I.D. 15-3/4"
The length of the Mod/Pole will be specified 60" 0 0 Weep holes(4)
based on how deep the wood pole is buried - Steel connector
and where the decay or damage is located. 30"
Both 9'and 14'Mod/Poles are available fo
transmission line work; an 18'Mod/P is - Rubber boot
available for distribution class poles ly. Concrete Ground wire
module duct
In order to assure that the loa the d
structure do not exceed the pacit of t Ground wire
entry hole
Mod/Pole,any applications the M o
must adhere to the foll ing
18"min.
1. The 18'Mo ole can t e u for
transmission tur 9'or 14'
2. T axl Ole th t e Ground rod
c sidered fo BR 10%of original
wood pole
3. Th imum po class to be considered length+2'
for s clas Locate the
ground rod
at least 18"
4. The following poles can use the MPBR away from
system if the actual pole diameter does not the concrete
exceed the connector diameter minus 1". module.
Class 2 Class 3
50' 50' Note: The connector inside diameter(ID)and the
55, 55, maximum wood pole outside diameter(OD)shown in
60' 60',65',and 70' the illustration are for the standard size connector. If
the extra large connector(17-1/4"OD, 17"ID)used,
the maximum wood pole diameter increases to 16".
"`�R OBSOLETE-Mod/Pole Butt Replacement System
Revised 07/05

01-705-02
Transmission
These poles were selected so that if a 5. Types of structures to be considered for
Mod/Pole is used, it will have an ultimate MPBR include:
groundline bending moment capacity greater
than that of the wood pole it replaces. • Poles damaged by vehicles.
• Poles carrying circuits that need to be
Additional Guidelines raised.
• Poles supporting critical circuits that
1. The MPBR system should not be used cannot be taken out of service.
as a maintenance replacement unless the • Junction poles o d poles that are
remaining portion of the wood pole is in costly to repl
excellent condition and exhibiting no • Single pol les i H-frame
internal and only limited external decay. structur co il, in be ing,
due nd loads,
2. Idaho Power T&D Design should be
consulted prior to using or ordering a i ast g of struct es are
Mod/Pole. Decay evaluation of the pole normally repla ed with a new wood
using borings is required.Use of the pol ecause it usually more
POLETEST device is also o is over'the life of the
recommended. Consult T&D Design cture.
for more information.
6. Ref to Materials Manual, section
3. A field measurement is required to 0 1-0 , or Mod/Pole and connector
verify that the sleeve will fit wit siz formation. The two available
least 1/2" of clearance on each de of nector sizes are 15-3/4" ID (16" OD)
the pole at the height of the cut ation. nd 17" ID (17-1/4" OD). Therefore,the
maximum pole diameter allowed at the
4. The priority of the lin nd th esti d cut-off location is 14-3/4" for the
required service life o e line n to standard connector and 16" for the extra
be considered.A complete replac t large connector.The diameter of the
with a new pole may be more wood pole may actually control the use
economical than a Mod/Pole when of a Mod/Pole rather than the loads on
considering th t age of the the structure.
pol air
E—RIORHO
OBSOLETE-Mod/Pole Butt Replacement System WEPOWER
Revised 07/05

Transmission 01-705-03
Installation Procedure 7. Center the wood pole above the concrete
module and lower the connector sleeve
1. Support the existing wood pole with a to the correct location for splicing.
boom-grabber and winch cable, etc.
8. Lower the rubber boot, or use 2"tape,
2. Cut the wood pole close to the between the module and the connector
groundline or above the damaged area. to form a seal before pouring the grout.
3. Pull the wood pole butt and clean the 9. Secure wood wedge the sleeve to
existing hole of loose material. center the wood . Plu any holes,
and then pour mix tu until the
4. Set the concrete module into the old connector i ed.
pole location. The preferred setting
depth is the same as the existing pole Depe pon the Mo _ le odel
that is being replaced. Backfill and tamp or re either one or two 66 lb bags
after setting the concrete module. e 22 lb bucket of grout are
urnis d.Additional grbut may be
5. Cut the wood pole at the desired height ere ar tely. Refer to Materials
or at the same height as the top of the al, secti 01-052, for specific
concrete module. info ion Cat. IDs. If the space
44 betwee ole and the connector is
6. Slip the connector sleeve slightly above mor h 1",pea-gravel should be
the new bottom of the wood pole mix ith the grout.
the pole ground wire into the h in the
module and pull the ground wir 10. emove the plugs,if any,when the
through using the pull w' at i grout is hardened. Clean any spilled
included. The pole gr nd sh ld grout from the surface of the pole and
the Mod/Pole through enOS
connector.
located just below the g
shown in the ' stration on page
"`PO R OBSOLETE-Mod/Pole Butt Replacement System
Revised 07/05

Transmission 01-710-01
Transmission Line Numbering
Numbering & Labeling Wood Pole
Structures
Single and Double Circuit Transmission
Lines with a Single Line Number. All
single circuit transmission lines and all
double circuit transmission lines with the
same line number for both circuits shall be 1 1
numbered consecutively with 4" adhesive
backed numbers adhered to aluminum plate
CID 13631 as illustrated in figure 1.
Structure#1 will be located at the power
source.Adhesive backed numbers are
described in the Materials Manual section
16-102.
Double Circuit Transmission Lines with
Separate Line Numbers. A double circuit Figure 3. Helicopter Patrol Numbering on
transmission line with separate line numbers Wood Poles
must be numbered on both sides of each Signs for Helicopter Patrols. To aid in
structure with 4" adhesive backed numbers
adhered to aluminum plated CID 13631 as helicopter patrols, 6" adhesive backed
illustrated in figure 2. Each circuit is numbers shall be attached to every tenth
numbered consecutively and the circuit structure as shown in figure 3.These
numbers are placed in addition to the 4"
numbers are attached to their corresponding numbers described in paragraphs"A"and
sides of the pole. °B".These 6" numbers are attached to the
pole on an aluminum plate CID 8760 at a
location near the top. of the structure. See
also page 16-102 in the Materials Manual.
Numbering Line Tap Circuits. If the line
is a tap line,the first structure into the tap
begins again with#1.
7- 7-
Figure 1. Single Figure 2. Double
Circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering
1pc Numbering Transmission Line Structures
Revised 06/10

01-710-02
Transmission
Numbering & Labeling Steel must be numbered on both sides of each
Structures structure with 4" adhesive backed numbers
as illustrated in figure 2. Each circuit is
Single and Double Circuit Transmission numbered consecutively. The numbers are
Lines with a Single Line Number. All attached to their respective sides of the pole
single circuit transmission lines and all or structure.
double circuit transmission lines with the
same line number for both circuits shall be Placement on Lattice Steel Towers.
numbered consecutively with structure 1 Lattice steel towers are to be numbered as
located at the power source. shown in figure 4. If the steel lattice member
is large enough, apply the 4" numbers
Double Circuit Transmission Lines with directly to the member. Otherwise, apply the
Separate Line Numbers. A double circuit numbers to an aluminum plate and attach the
transmission line with separate line numbers plate to the member using adhesive or wire.
See
Detail A
Detail A
Aerial Number
or
Detail B
Structure Number
If the lattice member is large enough,
apply adhesive backed numbers directly
to the member. If not, place the numbers
on a sign plate and secure the plate to the
member.
See
Detail B
Figure 4. Labeling Circuits on Towers
Numbering Transmission Line Structures �R
Revised 06/10

Transmission 01-71 U-03
Placement on Tubular Steel Poles. Signs for Helicopter Patrols. The first
Numbers for tubular steel poles are applied structure in each mile must be marked with
by the pole manufacturers.Additionally,4" an aerial number,which can be seen by
adhesive backed numbers applied to helicopter patrols.Aerial number signs have
aluminum plates CID 8760 and attached to 6" adhesive-backed numbers that are applied
the pole as illustrated in figure 5. to a sign bracket plate CID 46575. See
Figure 6.
Numbers are to be placed on the patrol road
side of the pole or structure. The sign is attached to the top of each
structure or to the cross arm.A separate sign
for each side of the structure is required.
Numbering Line Tap Circuits. If the line
is a tap line,the first structure into the tap
begins again with 1.
Label
7' Both Sides
vl
Figure 5. Tubular Steel Pole Numbering
Figure 6. Helicopter Patrol Numbering
on Steel Poles
IDAW
p Numbering Transmission Line Structures
Revised 06/10

Transmission Revised 09/08 01-800-01
Application. Light Duty Steel poles, also known as LD poles, are utilized for economic reasons in
high strength applications. The standard steel pole classification of LD 1 is equivalent to a wood class 1.
See the chart below for LD Pole-Wood Pole equivalents. If the strength requirements are greater than an
LD 10 a custom steel pole,multi-pole or lattice structure is required. Wood pole equivalencies are valid
for Grade B Construction.
1
6"
JWood Pole Class
IShield
LD Pole Equivalentfi
ire LD1 1
g LD2 H 1
LD3 H2
LD4 H3
LD5 H4
LD6 H5
LD7 H6
LD8 N/A
LD9 N/A
LD10* N/A
* If the strength requirements are
o greater than an LD10 a custom
steel pole, multi-pole or lattice
structure is required.
fi Wood pole equivalencies are valid
for Grade B Construction.
Detail B
Ground Across �3„
Pole Splice
(Flat 3-4)
11-01,
11 12
Provide 1/2"ss nut 10 1
0
on face(5-6)at 22' 9 2
above ground line (Field) (Road)
for joint use grounding. X X 8 3
44
6 5
(Face)
Section X-X
Detail C Pole Orientation
Pole Grounding 1'-6"
RA, t
Detail D
Groundline Collar
"`ppVM Light Duty Steel Poles

01-800-02 Revised 01/17
Transmission
Specification. Idaho Power's specification Grounding and Cathodic Protection. The
for LD poles requires them to be ASTM details show typical locations for grounding
A871 Modified(Self Weathering steel). For nut locations relative to different types of
most urban applications they will be painted attachments. The shield wire shall be
Hazelton Grey. All attachments, grounding bonded to the pole as shown in Detail B and
nuts, holes, bolt on hardware, vangs, the pole splice requires bonding as well.
coatings, and steel arms must be specified Cathodic protection is provided through the
for each pole ordered. LD poles will receive use of a sacrificial magnesium anode and is
most distribution facilities that will mount to required for all LD poles. Cathodic
a wood pole. Transmission shield wire protection of direct buried engineered steel
brackets and gain base insulators will also pole structures shall be evaluated for each
attach with through-bolts similar to wood specific project. Pole grounding material is
pole construction. Contact T&D Design included in the pole compatible unit.
Engineering for assistance in specifying LD
poles.
1/2"SS Nut
5181 1 by Specification
/ 5231
5351 / 3852
5342 6" 1,� 3657
14651
4115
3853 4224
3669
56234 Detail B
o�
Slip Joint Bonding
4�1
Detail A
Shield Wire Bonding
(TBSW) (TRD38) (TCS3)
See Note 1.
Notes:
1. Parts and CUs shown are for 3/8"shield wire
with armor rod. 5/16"shield wire, 3/8"shield wire
without armor rod, or optical ground wire will
require different material.
Light Duty Steel Poles '`per RR.

Transmission Revised 01/17 01-800-03
See Detail D
"ry
fTwist Wires Together
1'-6"Min Until Below Grade
5'-0"Min
See Section 02-002
56674 #10 Wire for Grounding Details.
3657
5034 -►
5884
• 5'-0"Min
Min
See Note 2
Corrosion
- 6
Detail C
Protective ----- -
Pole Grounding Coating Collar
(TANODE)(TPLDXX) 2'-0"lMin 11'-0" Min
1 VI 1
Notes:
4b"
1. Corrosion protective coating to bottom of pole by
specification. Contractor is to touch up damaged
coating.
2. 1/2"SS Nuts, Groundline Collar and coating
must be specified by the Project Engineer. See Note 1
Detail D
R Light Duty Steel Poles

01-800-04 Revised 04/17
Transmission
Bill of Materials PassPort Codes
See the Work Order and PassPort for current CU Codes Qty
Bill of Materials information. TANODE 1
TBSW 1
Cat. ID Qty Description TPLD... 1
3657 13 ft COND CU CW#6 SLD
3669 1 GALV EHS 3/8"STIR
3852 3 CONN CU VISE,#6 to 1/0
3853 1 CONN CU VISE#3 to 4/0
4060 1 CONN PG AL 1 BLT
4115 1 CLP SUSP FE 0.30-0.70
4224 1 ARMOR ROD 3/8"EHS
5034 1 GIRD RD 5/8"X8"CU BNDED
5181 1 WSHR RND F/3/4"BLT
5231 1 BRKT SHLD WIRE 3/4"X16"
5342 1 NUT LOCK MF 3/4"
5351 1 NUT SQ 3/4"
5884 1 ANODE MAGN 17LB
14651 1 WSHR LOCK F/3/4"USS
56674 1 CONN CU GIRD ACORN
56234 5 ft CONDUCTOR,CU,#2 CU FLEX
Light Duty Steel Poles

Transmission Revised 09/21 01-800-05
Steel Pole Policy Statement
Idaho Power will utilize steel poles or structures for new transmission line construction projects built to
138kV standards and above to minimize damage from wildfires and improve transmission line resilience.
Wood poles may be used on 138kV structures for emergency and maintenance replacements based on the
specific engineering,right-of-way,permitting, and scheduling requirements for each project. Wood
construction is used for voltages below 138kV,unless a different material is needed to meet specific
engineering or planning requirements.
"`ppVM Light Duty Steel Poles

Transmission 01-900-01
Application. Multiple pole and lattice structure types vary widely across the property.The
drawings of this section illustrate the configuration of the major structure types that are
encountered on our lines.Although not comprehensive,this list is intended to give a general idea
of what a structure looks like for quick identification purposes and not necessarily to be used as a
naming convention.Actual structures in the field will vary slightly from the drawings shown.
Typically, a structure that has a shield wire will have an `S'succeeding the title i.e. an AX
structure with a shield wire is an AXS.
/ X/ \ / X f \
A&AX AS&AXS AH
7T
AHD AHX AKX
`P R Multiple Pole and Lattice Structure Types
Revised 10/03

01-900-02
Transmission
x x
BLOC D (Line 432&433)
1-D D or LS(with)&E or MS(without brackets)
xx
DX-w or EX-w-o brackets F
Multiple Pole and Lattice Structure Types ' O R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-900-03
`C 4 `C `C
FX GX-28
H HA-G
C x XIX X,
HX HX-5
`P R Multiple Pole and Lattice Structure Types
Revised 10/03

01-900-04
Transmission
K L3-DE
/xx\
L3-T TX
Steel A&B
Steel A&B&C
Multiple Pole and Lattice Structure Types ' �R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-900-05
�xz
x z
Steel C Steel E
I i
Steel 2E
F&G&H
Steel T
Steel H
`IDAW
R Multiple Pole and Lattice Structure Types
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9040-01
Application. (OBSOLETE) The "TR"structure is a 138 kV TRiangular configuration
which is built with porcelain insulators. It is used for tangent construction where no angles are
involved and where a shield wire is not required.A similar structure,the TR HL structure,built
with polymer insulators, is preferred. See page 01-041-01.
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see pages:
02-002-01 Grounding 11-010-01 Armor Rod
08-200-01 Insulator Conductor Clamps
Note 1 -Bill of Materials
4748
5233
4"
Detail A
FW
Detail B
2'-6"
Detail C
e(m
See Note 1
4742
12'-0"
min.
See Note 2
Detail D
m
Notes:
1.Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor
reference point for calculating vertical clearances.
2.Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild.This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering.
�ppWR (Obsolete) 138-kV TR Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9040-02
Transmission
Details. (See page 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
5185 5280
5351
5342
4352
5184 LAPP=12"
O.B.=18"
8"
5279
5341 See blt sch
3513
5350 5170 See blt sch
Detail A Detail B
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly Post Insulator Mount
(TASB) (TI138VC)
5180
5183
(452-5500
�A
5280
4"
See blt sch
0 5233
10"
5280
m 5342
5351
4352
3513
Detail C
Post Insulator Mount
(Obsolete) 138-kV TR Structure ' er R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9040-03
L Bill of Materials
8„ Detail A
Catalog ID Qty Description
24". 5373
max 3513 3 lb CND CU SLID SD BR 6
3657 7 lb CND CW SLID 6
4078 1 CN WLD 5/8 ROD46 CU
5370 4352 2 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6
3657 4706* 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT
4724 2 INS LP HRZ CLP 138KV
4748 1 INS LP VERT CLP138KV
Note 1 3 CLP LP INS(size)
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
see bolt sch BLT GALV DA 3/4X(long)
see bolt sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
4706 see bolt sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
452-5500 4 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X1-1/2
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5376 5180 4 WSHR RND 11/16 HOLE
(See page 02-002-02 5184 1 WSHR SPR 11/16 HOLE
for grounding details) 5185 6 WSHR SPR 13/16 HOLE
18499 4 WSHR LOCK GALV 5/81N
5233 1 BRKT POLETOP 138 INS
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
} 5280 2 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
18"min. 5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5342 6 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5374 5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
4078 5351 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5370 1 lb NAIL CW 10D
5373 40 CLIP GRID WIRE#6 CU
18" 5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
10%of min. 5376' 4 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
pole height ' To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
plus 2'-0" 1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator
clamps.
5034
Bolt Schedule
Catalog ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Detail D Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
Pole Grounding 5064 BLT GALV DA 3/4X18
Post Mnt. - - 2 2 2
5065 BLT GALV DA 3/4X20
Post Mnt. 2 2 - - -
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
Anti-split 1 1 - - -
5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
Top Mnt. - - 2 2 2
5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
Top Mnt. 2 2 - - -
`�R (Obsolete) 138-kV TR Structure
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9050-01
Application. (OBSOLETE) The Tangent Vertical or "TV"structure is a 138-kV
structure used for tangent construction where no angles are involved and where a shield wire is
not required.A similar structure, the TR-HL structure,built with polymer insulators, is preferred.
See page 01-041-01.
1'-0" Detail A
Detail B
T-6"
Note 1 -Bill of Materials
T-6" 4742
See Note 1
12'-0"
min.
See Note 2
Detail C
m
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor
reference point for calculating vertical clearances..
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild. This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering.
�PMER (Obsolete) 138-kV TV Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9050-02
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see pages:
02-002-01 Grounding 11-010-01 Armor Rod
08-200-01 Insulator Conductor Clamps
Details. (Seepage 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
5184
3" Detail A
5279 -TY
24" 5373
5341 See blt sch max.
5350 5170 5370
- 3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
4706
5376
(See page 02-002-02
for grounding details)
5185
3513
5280
See bolt sch 18"min.
4352 5374 4078
4742
LAPP=12"
O.B.18" 18"
10%of min.
_ pole height
3657 +2'-0"
5034
5342
5351 5147
Detail B Detail C
Post Insulator Mount Pole Grounding
(TI138HP)
(Obsolete) 138-kV TV Structure ' er R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9050-03
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
Catalog ID Qty Description Catalog ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
3513 31b CND CU SLID SD BR 6
3657 7 lb CND CW SLID 6 5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
4078 1 CN WLD 5/8 ROD46 CU Anti-split - - 1 1 1
4352 3 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
4706* 1 MLDG GIRD PSTC 1X8 FT Anti-split 1 1 - - -
Note 1 3 CLP LP INS(size) 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
4724 3 INS LP HRZ CLP 138KV Insulator - - 6 6 6
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
See bolt sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long) Insulator 6 6 - - -
See bolt sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5174 6 WSHR CRVD 6X6 X13/16
5184 1 WSHR SPR 11/16 HOLE
5185 6 WSHR SPR 13/16 HOLE
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 3 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5342 6 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5370 1 lb NAIL CW 10D
5373 40 CLIP GRID WIRE#6 CU
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376' 4 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator
clamps.
QPW R (Obsolete) 138-kV TV Structure
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9051-01
Application. (Obsolete) The Tangent Vertical with Shield wire or "TVS"structure is
138-kV structure used in tangent construction where there are no angles involved and a shield
wire is required. The TVS-HL structure is the preferred structure of this type. See page
01-053-01.
6" Detail A
8'-0"
Detail B
Detail D
3'-6"
Note 1 -Bill of Materials
T-6" 4742
See Note 1
12'-0"
min.
See Note 2
Detail C
Mn
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor
reference point for calculating vertical clearances..
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild. This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering.
�PMER (Obsolete) 138-kV TVS Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9051-02
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see pages:
02-002-01 Grounding 08-300-01 Suspension Clamps
08-200-01 Insulator Conductor Clamps 11-010-01 Armor Rod
Details. (Seepage 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
i53
3 Detail A
3
24" 5373
See blt sch max.
5170 5370
3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
4706
5376
(See page 02-002-02
for grounding details)
18"min.
5185
5374
4078
5231
6"
18"
5342 10%of min.
pole height
5351 +2'-0"
Note 2 5280
5034
5172
Detail B Detail C
Shield Wire Mounting Assembly Pole Grounding
(Obsolete) 138-kV TVS Structure ' er R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9051-03
5185 3513 Bill of Materials
5280
See bolt sch Catalog ID Qty Description
3513 3 lb CND CU SLID SD BR 6
3657 7 lb CND CW SLID 6
4352 4078 1 CN WLD 5/8 ROD-#6 CU
4742 LAPP= 12" Note 2 3 CLP SUSP AL(size)
O.B. 18" 4352 3 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6
4724 3 INS LP HRZ CLP 138KV
_ Note 1 3 CLP LPINS(size)
3657 5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
5342 See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5351 5147 5172 2 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X13/16
5174 6 WSHR CRVD 6X6 X13/16
5184 1 WSHR SPR 11/16 HOLE
Detail D 5185 7 WSHR SPR 13/16 HOLE
Post Insulator Mount 5231 1 BRKT SHLDWIRE 3/4X16
(TI138HC) 5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 4 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5342 7 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 4 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5370 1 lb NAIL CW 10D
5373 40 CLIP GRID WIRE#6 CU
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator
clamps.
2 Refer to page 08-200-02 for suspension clamps.
Bolt Schedule
Catalog ID DescriptionQty Per Pole Class
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
Anti-split 1 1 - - -
5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
Insulator - - 4 6 6
5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
Insulator 4 4 2 - -
5227 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20
Insulator 2 2 -
"QP R (Obsolete) 138-kV TVS Structure
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9055-01
Application. (Obsolete) The "TV-DC"(Tangent Vertical Double Circuit) structure is a
138-kV structure used in tangent construction where there are no angles involved and where a
shield wire is not required. The TV-DC-HL structure,built with polymer insulators, is the
preferred structure of this type. See page 01-057-01.
Detail A
12„ Detail B
6'-0"
6'-0"
Note 1-Bill of Materials
12'-0" See Note 1 4742
min.
See Note 2
Detail C
m
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor
reference point for calculating vertical clearances..
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild. This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering.
11 1 R (Obsolete) 138-kV TV-DC Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9055-02
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see pages:
02-002-01 Grounding 11-010-01 Armor Rod
08-300-01 Suspension Clamps
Details. (See page 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
i53
3 Detail A
3
24" 5373
See blt sch max.
5170 5370
3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
4706
5376
(See page 02-002-02
for grounding details)
5185 5280
5351
5342 18"min.
4352
5374
4078
LAPP= 12"
O.B.= 18" 18"
10%of min.
pole height
+2'-0"
� 5034
3513
See blt sch
Detail B Detail C
Post Insulator Mount Pole Grounding
(Obsolete) 138-kV TV-DC Structure ' er R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9055-03
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
Catalog ID Qty Description Catalog ID DescriptionQty Per Pole Class
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
3513 3 lb CND CU SLID SD BR 6
3657 7 lb CND CW SLID 6 5064 BLT GALV DA 3/4X18
4078 1 CN WLD 5/8 ROD46 CU Insulator - 2 6 6 6
4352 3 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6 5065 BLT GALV DA 3/4X20
4706* 1 MLDG GIRD PSTC 1X8 FT Insulator 4 4 - - -
4724 6 INS LP HRZ CLP 138KV 5066 BLT GALV DA 3/4X22
Note 1 3 CLP LP INS(size) Insulator 2
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT 5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
see bolt sch BLT GALV DA 3/4X(long) Anti-split - - 1 1 1
see bolt sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long) 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16 Anti-split 1 1
5184 1 WSHR SPR 11/16 HOLE
5185 12 WSHR SPR 13/16 HOLE
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 3 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5342 12 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5370 1 lb NAIL CW 10D
5373 40 CLIP GIRD WIRE#6 CU
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376* 4 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
* To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator
clamps.
QPW R (Obsolete) 138-kV TV-DC Structure
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9056-01
Application. (Obsolete) The "TVS-DC"(Tangent Vertical with Shield wire Double
Circuit) structure is a 138-kV structure used in tangent construction or where there are small
angles involved and where a shield wire is required. The TVS-DC structure should be used only
to match existing construction. The TVS-DC-HL structure, built with polymer insulators, is the
preferred structure of this type. See page 01-058-01.
Detail A
6"
8'-0" Detail B
Detail D
6'-0" Note 1-Bill of Materials
6'-0"
4742
See Note 1
12'-0"
min.
See Note 2
Detail C
m
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor
reference point for calculating vertical clearances..
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild. This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering.
11 1 R (Obsolete) 138-kV TVS-DC Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9056-02
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see pages:
02-002-01 Grounding 11-010-01 Armor Rod
08-200-01 Insulator Conductor Clamps
Details. (Seepage 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
i53
3 Detail A
3
24" 5373
See blt sch max.
5170 5370
- 3657
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
4706
5376
(See page 02-002-02
for grounding details)
18"min.
5185
5374
4078
5231
° 6"
18"
5342 10%of min.
pole height
5351 +2'-0"
Note 2 5280 5034
5172
Detail B Detail C
Shield Wire Mounting Assembly Pole Grounding
(Obsolete) 138-kV TVS-DC Structure 'Qp�R
Revised 10/03

O L-
1
Z:)
(D CD W W M �. N M CO
cO U OY 00 z�-c) JJX `O V
O co (0 00 ax OO�Z Z cn v UN iv m U 04 c0
O m ( � M X XmXX 22Mo Ln M cD� 3 U 4)
1 ❑.N U) 00 1- LO co V cD CO W Lf7 M Z_ Z �t N O V/
r �(DO� wd NZ M2MX ���U U Q Q W LLJ O a � V N i
o U C: U
O o� �Q aU QUpp �Z zZZIL as Z 0 y � N
c J N U U 0 �>> d w 0� p o v ��w m Q d o N CD ,I N
U�LnU) �=Z� J >�� aa=0 OI�iIMiQ Q��w .c �` X X X °X° °X°� ��/�
'C UU �(q Ua�O UU�Q-' Q-'��m m��U UU�a O O �2 co i MNM� = i =� v/
G) ZZ zZ zJ JUDO J J(n(n (n(nofd :3 �Q�� N 0 0 0
o UUUU �?UW 0300 ��00 Uzzz zzUcn o O 0 > > > > > >
O O J J J J J
� o o aN Q oQ oQ o Q QQ Q �C
y. >• -2 2 00 00 U O C7 io C7 is C7 a U` w U` w 1
CJ CO f M M CO M c D N N CO V N V—O— O O N M
�1 O N na G) 3 J J J J C J C
m _m_m_ co mQ
t t
o N 0 0 w Ew o
lC MIS W d NV dV mm0N V LO O O NO OMV O m O '~ m V M W O
nw Ln � Lf) N M d d �� MOMS .0 't Lo Lf) �� � U � O +' cD cD CD O O
m Lt7 M O O M I— O O O O N N N M M co M M co co M U O O O O
FBI U M Cl) 7 Z Z Lo (n (n Lo Lo U) U)U) U) U)U) U)U) U) Ln Lc Lo N F+H (n
O
N 00
0- II
d m
v QO
co
M Ln
O LO M
00
C M
7
O
0 L
d 3
0 to
C
r
M
s a
O
w O
N
N LC) N
E W ) N

Transmission 01-9060-01
Application. (Obsolete) The Tangent Angle or TA structure is used to turn small angles
between 0°-15°. It is a 138-kV, vertical configuration, angle structure built with porcelain
insulators. The TA-HL and TAS-HL are preferred. See pages 01-062-01 and 01-063-01.
3"
6„ Detail A
1'-6" 5" o Detail D
4727
6'-0" See note 3.
Detail C
Detail B
5310
4742
4060
6'-0"
o °
5316
Note 1 -Bill of Mat. 3669
3'-0"
12'-0"min. "notel. 4352
to distribution
underbuild.
See note 2. 5311
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor
reference point for calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild. This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering.
3. Construction Practice. Use a guy strain insulator on structures without shield wires. For proper
placement of the guy strain insulators, see figure 3 on page 04-600-04.
15,
max
(Distribution)
Small Line Angles(up to 150) Guy Anchoring
�PMER (Obsolete) 138-kV TA Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9060-02
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see pages:
02-002-01 Grounding 04-600-01 Insulating Guys
04-100-01 Anchoring 08-200-01 Conductor Clamps
04-510-01 Down Guy Assembly 11-010-01 Armor Rods
Details. (See page 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
L
3" Detail A
5184
24" 5373
52793" max.
5341 See bit sch 5370
3657
5350 5170
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
4706
5376
(See page 02-002-02
for grounding details)
5185
3513
5280
See bolt sch
18"min.
FL4
4742 5374 4078
LAPP= 12"
O.B. 18"
18"
10%of min.
CWD pole height
+2'-0"
5342 5034
5351 5147
Detail B
Post Insulator Mount
(TI138HC) Detail C
Pole Grounding
(Obsolete) 138-kV TA Structure ' er R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9060-03
Bill of Materials
3657
3513 5328 Catalog ID Qty Description
3513 3 lb CND CU SLID SD BR 6
See bolt Sch 3657 7 lb CND CW SLID 6
5280 3669 50 lb WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS
04845 4060 2 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0
4078 1 CN WLD 5/8 ROD46 CU
5316 4352 6 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6
5342 4706" 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT
4727 2 INS GUY STIR 30000 78
5351 4060 4724 3 INS LP HRZ CLP 138KV
Note 1 3 CLP LP INS(size)
5176 4352 4845 2 CLV THMB BNK
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
Detail D 5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
Pole Eye Assembly 5174 6 WSHR CRVD 6X6 X13/16
(TPEA1) 5176 4 WSHR CRVD 3X4X15/16
5184 1 WSHR SPR 11/16 HOLE
Bolt Schedule 5185 6 WSHR SPR 13/16 HOLE
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 5 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
Catalog ID Description Qty Per Pole Class 5310 1 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3 5311 1 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 LNG
5316 6 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12 Anti-split 1 1 1 5328 2 EYE POLE PLT HD
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14 5342 10 NUT MF 3/4 IN
Anti-split 1 1 5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12 5351 5 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
Post 2 5370 1 lb NAIL CW 10D
5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14 5373 40 CLIP GIRD WIRE#6 CU
5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
Post 2 4 4 5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
Post Mnt. 6 8 8 6 4 5376' 4 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
Post Mnt. 4 2 - - - To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator
5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12 clamps.
Pole Eye t - - - - 2
5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
Pole Eye t - - 2 2 2
5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
Pole Eye t 2 2 2 2 -
5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
Pole Eye t 2 2 - - -
t For bonding to the top bolt as shown,increase the
length of 1 bolt for each pole eye by 2"
QPW R (Obsolete) 138-kV TA Structure
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9061-01
Application. (Obsolete) The Tangent Angle with Shield wire or TAS structure is used to
turn small angles between 0°-15°. It is a 138-kV, vertical configuration, angle structure built with
porcelain insulators. The TAS-HL is the preferred structure. See page 01-063-01.
3" Detail A
6" Notes:
5., a ° — Details D&E 1. Design Reference. Use the
elevation of the bottom bolt of the
8'4-1 Note 2-Bill of Materials 3669 lowest insulator mount as a
4838 See note 3. conductor reference point for
calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a
5311 minimum of 12'to the crossarm
mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild. This dimension is valid
for spans of 300'or less. For
6'-0" longer spans, consult with
engineering.
Detail C 3. Construction Practice. When the
Detail B shield wire is grounded at every
Note 1 -Bill of Mat. structure,the pole ground wire
may be considered"effectively
grounded". If there is no
distribution underbuild and if the
structure is anchored with a
4742 4060 Tubeco anchor or copperweld rod,
6-4- the guy strain insulator is omitted
o 5316 as shown in the adjacent
illustration. If a galvanized anchor
rod has been used, guy strain
3'-0" 5310 insulators, as shown on page 01-
060-01 are required.Also, if there
is distribution underbuild, guy
strain insulators may be required.
12'-0"min. See note 1. - 4352
to distribution
underbuild.
See note 2.
151 151
max max
1l (Distribution) `
Small Line Angles(Up to 15°) Guy Anchoring
lllll�"QPMER (Obsolete) 138-kV TAS Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9061-02
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see pages:
02-002-01 Grounding 08-174-01 Shield Wire Assembly
04-100-01 Anchoring 08-200-01 Insulator Conductor Clamps
04-510-01 Down Guy Assembly 11-010-01 Armor Rods
04-600-01 Insulating Guys
Details. (Seepage 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
L
3" Detail A
5184
24" 5373
5279 13" max.
5341 See bit sch
5370
5350
5170 3ti57
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
4706
5376
(See page 02-002-02
for grounding details)
5185
3513
5280
See bolt sch 18"min.
5374
4352 4078
4742
_APP= 12"
O.B. 18" 18"
10%of min.
pole height
l 3657 +21-01,
5342 5034
5351 5147
Detail B
Post Insulator Mount Detail C
(TI138HC) Pole Grounding
(Obsolete) 138-kV TAS Structure ''pO R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9061-03
3657 Bill of Materials
3513 5328
See bolt Sch Catalog ID Qty Description
5280 3513 3 Ib CND CU SLID SD BR 6
48 3657 7 Ib CND CW SLID 6
3669 50 Ib WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS
5316
4060 2 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0
5342 Note 2 3 CLP SUSP AL(size)
4078 1 CN WLD 5/8 ROD46 CU
5351 4060 4352 6 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6
4706* 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT
5176 4352 4724 3 INS LP HRZ CLP 138KV
Note 1 3 CLP LP INS(size)
4838 1 SHKL AN 5/8x2.75
Detail D. Pole Eye Assembly 4845 2 CLV THMB BNK
(With Cast-Curved Washers) 5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
(TPEA1) See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5174 6 WSHR CRVD 6X6 X13/16
5176 2 WSHR CRVD 3X4X15/16
5184 1 WSHR SPR 11/16 HOLE
3513 5185 6 WSHR SPR 13/16 HOLE
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
See bolt sch 5280 5 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5280 5310 1 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8
4845 5311 1 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 LNG
5328 0 1 5316 2 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS
5316 5328 3 EYE POLE PLT HD
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5351 5342 10 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 4060 5351 5 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
3657 5370 1 Ib NAIL CW 10D
4352 5373 40 CLIP GRID WIRE#6 CU
5374 1 Ib STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376* 4 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
Detail E. Pole Eye Assembly
(With Back-to-Back Heavy Duty Pole Eye * To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
Plates) 1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator
( clamps.
TPEA)
2 Refer to page 08-200-02 for suspension clamps.
`" IDAW
R (Obsolete) 138-kV TAS Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9061-04
Transmission
Bolt Schedule
Catalog ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
Anti-split 1 1 - - -
5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
Pole Eye t - - - - 2
5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
Pole Eye t - - 2 2 2
5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
Post Mnt. - - - 2 4
5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
Pole Eye t 2 2 2 2 -
5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
Post Mnt. 2 4 4 4 2
5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
Pole Eye t 2 2 - - -
5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
Post Mnt. 4 2 2
t For bonding to the top bolt as shown,increase 1 bolt
for each pole eye by 2".
(Obsolete) 138-kV TAS Structure WNPO R
Revised 10/03

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-9100-01
Application. (OBSOLETE) The AXS is a 69 kV or 138 kV horizontal configuration, H—frame,
tangent structure with an X-brace and a Shield wire support. It is used where long conductor spans are
possible helping to minimize the number of structures needed. For heavy loading conditions, guy braces
can be installed for additional support.
Use the subassemblies shown as details in this section for maintenance of existing 69 kV structures with
11'-6"pole spacing. See Section 1-252 of the Materials Manual for the required 69 kV X-brace
replacement.
N— ,'W- 6" 13'-6" —
See note 4. Detail A
B
B
5258
5'-10"
C D
C D
g 4952 T
6'-0"
4115
Detail B
Notes: 5236
1. Design Reference. Use the
elevation of the bottom bolt of the
lowest insulator mount as a
conductor reference point for
calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a Detail D
minimum of 12'to the crossarm
mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild.This dimension is
valid for spans of 300'or less. For
longer spans, consult with
engineering. 5262
3. Construction Practice. If there
is a possibility of energizing a Detail C
broken or sagging down guy then
guy strain insulators are required.
Anchor type may also require the
use of guy strain insulators. See
Section 04.
4. Avian. Eagle safe construction
requires 138 kV steel
construction insulators or larger.
See 06-10-04.
IDAHO
�PME R,, (Obsolete) 69 W & 138 W AXS Structure
AlI-ORPG. 11Y

01-9100-02 Revised 04/14
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes, see sections:
02-002 Grounding Information 08-300 Conductor Clamps
08-100 Insulator String Assembly 10-050 Vibration Dampers
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
22147
Detail A
5279
c � 3 � � Detail B
5341 See bolt sch
24" 5372
5350
5170 max.
5371
3657
Detail A
Anti-*�&lllifbltlAsslMM( (ASB)
22150
5281
5352 � See bolt sch I
(See Section 02-002
5343 5173 for Grounding Details)
' 5700
18"min.
5374
Detail B 25448
Upper X-Brace Mount(TXB13)
18"
10%of min.
pole height
+2,-0„
�� 5034
5352
See bolt sch
C
5343 Detail D
5173 Pole Grounding
22150
Detail C
Lower X-Brace Mount(TXB13)
SCALE: 1'-0" = 12'-6"
IDAHO
(Obsolete) 69 W & 138 W AXS Structure "99 RP
Al-CORPCa 1V

Transmission Revised 04/14 01-9100-03
5342 See bolt sch
5351
5280 5258
5172 22149
)� 4823 4115
28806 �/ 0
5258
Section B-B
Shield Wire Attachment
Section A-A
Head Brace Mount
(THDBR136)
22150 4952
5352
See bolt sch
5343 519406-
5281 O O
5700
28806
Section C-C Section D-D
Crossarm Mount Crossarm Spacer Fitting
(TA28) (Supplied with Crossarm)
IDAHO
RN R, (Obsolete) 69 kV & 138 kV AXS Structure
AlI-ORPCa 11Y

01-9100-04 Revised 04/14
Transmission
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for current Cat. ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5077 BLT GALV DA 7/8X22
Cat.ID Qty Description Crossarm - - - 2 2
28806 12 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6 5078 BLT GALV DA 7/8X24
3657 160 ft CND CW SLID 6 Crossarm - - 2 - -
4115 2 CLP SUSP FE 0.3-0.7 5079 BLT GALV DA 7/8X26
Crossarm 2 2 - - -
4823 2 CLV Y-EYE TWTD 1/2
4952 1 pr XARM ASSY LAM 7X3X28 5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
5034 2 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT Anti-split - - 2 2 2
5077 2 BLT GALV DA 7/8X22 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
Anti-split 2 2 -
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long) 5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 7/8X(long) Head brace - - 2 2 2
5170 4 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16 5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
Head brace 2 2 - - -
5172 2 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X13/16
5173 4 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16 5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
5194 4 WSHR SQ 4X4 X 15/16 Cross brace - - 2 2 4
5236 1 pr BRC X 3 BY 4&13-6PS 5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
Cross brace 2 2 - - -
5258 1 BRC HD STL H-FRAME 5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
5262 1 CENTER CLAMP Cross brace - 2 2 2
5279 2 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN 5141 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X22
5280 2 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN Cross brace 2 - -
5281 4 CLIP BONDING 7/8 IN
5341 2 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5342 2 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5343 8 NUT MF 7/8 IN PassPort Codes
5350 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4 CU Codes Qty
5352 4 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8 TASB 2
5371 2 lb NAIL GALV 10D
5372 80 CLIP GRD WIRE TA28 1
THDBR136 1
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2 TXB13 1
5700 6 CONN,C-TAP,#6 to#6
22147 2 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
22149 2 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
22150 8 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE
25448 1 CONN,CU,GRID, DRV-ON,5/8
(Obsolete) 69 kV & 138 kV AXS Structure 99POI�N R,.

Transmission 01-9140-01
Application. (Obsolete) This "TR"structure is a 69-kV TRiangular configuration which is
built with porcelain, line-post insulators. It is used for tangent construction where no angles are
involved and where a shield wire is not required. The TR-HL structure is the preferred structure
of this type. See page 01-141-01.
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see pages:
02-002-01 Grounding 11-010-01 Armor Rod
08-200-01 Insulator Conductor Clamps
Note 1 -Bill of Materials
4774
Detail D
o Detail A
3„ Detail B
2'-6"
Detail C
See Note 1
4741
12'-0"
min.
See Note 2
Detail E
0 0 0
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor
reference point for calculating vertical clearances.
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12' to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild. This dimension is valid for spans of 300' or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering.
�PMER (Obsolete) 69-kV TR Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9140-02
Transmission
Details. (Seepage 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
Note 1 -Bill of Mat.
4474
4474
5170
4874 5184 5234
5184 5341 3 1
0 7" 5313 7"
i5350
5279 o 8"
See bolt sch
5170
See Bolt Sch
5350
Detail A Detail B
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly Pole Top Bracket Mount
(TASB) (T169C)
Note 1
3513
5185 5280
5351
Note 1 -Bill of Materials 4774
5342
0
LAPP= 12"
O.B.= 12" 4874
See bolt Sch
5234 0
0
4352
Detail C Detail D
Post Insulator Mount Insulator Assembly Detail
(T169HCDC)
(Obsolete) 69-kV TR Structure ''pO R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9140-03
Bill of Materials
L Catalog ID Qty Description
Detail A 3513 3 lb CND CU SLID SD BR 6
7 3657 7 lb CND CW SLID 6
4078 1 CN WLD 5/8 ROD46 CU
24" 5373 4352 1 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6
max. - 4706* 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT
- 4741 2 INS LP HRZ CLP 69 KV
5370 4774 1 INS LP VERT CLP 69KV
3657 Note 2 3 CLP LP INS(size)
4874 1 STUD INS 3/4X1 3/4
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV DA 3/4X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
5170 4 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5184 3 WSHR SPR 11/16 HOLE
4706 5185 4 WSHR SPR 13/16 HOLE
5234 1 BRKT POLETOP 69KV INS
5279 2 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5376 5280 1 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5341 3 NUT MF 5/8 IN
(See page 02-002-02 5342 4 NUT MF 3/4 IN
for grounding details.) 5350 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5370 1 lb NAIL CW 10D
5373 40 CLIP GRID WIRE#6 CU
} 5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
in. 5376 4 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
5374 * To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
4078 2 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator
clamps.
18" Bolt Schedule
10%of min.
pole height
+2'-0" Catalog ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5034 5064 BLT GALV DA 3/4X18
Post Mnt. - - 2 2 2
5065 BLT GALV DA 3/4X20
Post Mnt. 2 2 - - -
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Detail E Anti-split - - 1 1 1
Pole Grounding 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
Anti-split 1 1 - - -
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
Top Mnt. - - 2 2 2
5110 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X16
Top Mnt. 2 2 - - -
� AM
PMER (Obsolete) 69-kV TR Structure
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9150-01
Application. (Obsolete) The Tangent Vertical Double Circuit or "TV-DC"structure is a
structure used in 46-kV or 69-kV tangent construction where there are no angles involved and
where a shield wire is not required.When two circuits are required,it provides a cost effective
alternative to constructing two separate lines. The TV-DC structure is built with porcelain
insulators. The TV-DCHL is the preferred structure of this kind. See page 01-151-01.
Detail A
Detail B
6-0"
Note 1 -Bill of Materials
6-0"
See Note 1 -
12'-0" 4741
min.
See Note 2
Detail C
0 0
Notes:
1. Design Reference. Use the elevation of the bottom bolt of the lowest insulator mount as a conductor
reference point for calculating vertical clearances..
2. Framing Reference. Maintain a minimum of 12'to the crossarm mounting bolt of any distribution
underbuild. This dimension is valid for spans of 300'or less. For longer spans, consult with engineering.
NEW—ppWR (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV TV-DC Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9150-02
Transmission
Details. (See page 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
i
-TY
See blt sch
5170
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
(TASB)
3513
5185 5280
5351
Note 1 -Bill of Materials
5342
0
LAPP=12"
O.B.= 12"
See bolt Sch
4352
Detail B
Post Insulator Mount
(T169HCDC)
AW
(Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV TV-DC Structure POW R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9150-03
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see pages:
02-002-01 Grounding 08-300-01 Clamp
11-010-01 Armor Rod
Bill of Materials
L
Detail A Catalog ID Qty Description
3 3513 3 lb CND CU SLID SD BR 6
24„ 3657 7 lb CND CW SLID6
5373 4078 1 CN WLD 5/8 ROD-#6 CU
max. 4352 3 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6
5370 4706* 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT
4741 6 INS LP HRZ CLP 69 KV
3657 Note 1 3 CLP LP INS(size)
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV DA 3/4X(long)
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
5170 2 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5184 1 WSHR SPR 11/16 HOLE
5185 12 WSHR SPR 13/16 HOLE
4706 5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 3 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5341 1 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5376 5342 12 NUT MF 3/4 IN
(See page 02-002-02 5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
for grounding details) 5351 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5370 1 lb NAIL CW 10D
5373 40 CLIP GIRD WIRE#6 CU
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
} 5376* 4 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
18"min. * To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
1 1 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator
5374 clamps.
rmin.18
4078
Bolt Schedule
10%of
pole height
+2'-0" Catalog ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5034 5064 BLT GALV DA 3/4X18
Post Mnt. - 2 6 6 6
5065 BLT GALV DA 3/4X20
Post Mnt. 4 4 - - -
5066 BLT GALV DA 3/4X22
Post Mnt. 2
Detail C 5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
Pole Grounding Anti-split - - 1 1 1
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
Anti-split 1 1 - - -
lll� R (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV TV-DC Structure
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9352-01
Application. (Obsolete) The "T"structure is a 46-kV or a 69-kV Tangent structure used
on the Idaho Power Company transmission system. It was originally developed using pin
insulators, as shown in this standard. Later,the "T"structure was modified to be built with line
post insulators. See page 01-350-01.Today,the "T"structure is typically used to match or
replace existing structures. For new construction,the preferred tangent structure is the "TR"
structure shown on page 01-141-01.
Pin insulators are an inactive stock item which will not be reordered. Replacement of the pin
insulators and pins will be limited to the remaining stock in stores. Defective wood pins will be
replaced with steel pins,using pinhole adapters (Cat. ID 5202). Line post insulators will be
installed when the pin insulator stock has been depleted. For the installation of line post
insulators, see page 01-350-01.
Bonding and Grounding The pole ground is to be terminated in a halo at a minimum of
12"below the attachment point of the crossarm brace.Any outside insulator steel pins on the
crossarm are to be bonded to the crossarm anti-split bolts and the center insulator steel pin is to
be bonded to the crossarm through-bolt and the pole anti-split bolt. These changes have been
made to help eliminate the problem of nuisance tripping and the extreme difficulty which follows
in attempting to locate the source of the problem. The pole ground is terminated in a halo to
eliminate radio noise and near the top of the pole to provide a convenient ground point for
maintenance personnel. For additional details concerning appropriate grounding practices, see
page 02-002-01.
Details A&C
4"
Detail B �
Remove any bonding
between insulator pins.
Detail D
`�o a
Remove pole ground
wire above the halo. 12"Min.
Halo
Detail E
Obsolete bonding
and Grounding Method
NEW—ppWR (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T (Pin) Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9352-02
Transmission
For hardware details and PassPort Codes see pages:
02-002-01 Grounding 11-300-01 Formed Tie
11-010-01 Armor Rod
Details. Seepage 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
4767
5161 22147
22147 5279
See bolt Sch
5350
4"
i 5180 5341
5106
3513
5341 5280 22149
5350
5170 5342 5351
5279
Detail A Detail B
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly Bonding Pin Insulator Mounting and Bonding
(TASB) (TI69)
See bolt sch 5172
5193
22149
4950
5351
5313
5342 5280
Detail C
Crossarm Mounting and Bonding
(TAS M 11)
(Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T (Pin) Structure ''pp MR
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9352-03
5099 Detail A
22146 8"
5188
24° 5373
max.
5370
3657
5177
5240
5349
5340 4706
5376
a. Mounting the Crossarm Brace to the Crossarm
(See page 02-002-02
for grounding details)
5240
18"min.
Z
0 5374
See bolt sch 4078
18"
10%of min.
5350 5170 pole height
plus 2'-0"
5034
b.Mounting the Crossarm Brace to the Pole
Detail D Detail E
Mounting the Crossarm Brace Pole Grounding
(TWB72) (With a Halo)
NEW—ppWR (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T (Pin) Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9352-04
Transmission
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
See the Work Order and PassPort for Catalog ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
current Bill of Materials information. Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
5098 BLT GALV MCH 1/2X8
Catalog ID Qty Description Crossarm 2 2 2 2 2
3513 3 lb CND CU SLID SD BR 6 5099 BLT GALV MCH 1/2X10
Crossarm 2 2 2 2 2
3657 7 lb CND CW SLID6
4078 1 CN WLD 5/8 ROD46 CU 5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
4352 1 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6 Anti-split* - - - 1 1
4706* 1 MLDG GIRD PSTC 1X8 FT 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
4 Anti-split* 1 1 1 1
767 3 INS PIN 69 KV
4950 1 XARM 6X8X11 SM HOLE 5110 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X16
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT Anti-split* 1 1 1
5111 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X18
5098 2 BLT GALV MCH 1/2X8 Anti-split* 1 - - -
5099 2 BLT GALV MCH 1/2X10 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long) Crossarm - - - - 1
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long) 5227 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20
5161 3 PIN STL 12 IN LONG Crossarm - - 1 1 -
5170 3 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16 5128 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X22
5172 1 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X13/16 Crossarm 1 1 - - -
5177 2 WSHR TAP FLGD 3X3X5 * or cross brace,or top mount insulator
5179 2 WSHR RND 9/16 HOLE
22146 4 WSHR DBL COIL 9/16 HOLE
22147 2 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16 HOLE
22149 4 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16 HOLE
5188 2 WSHR SQ 2X2X9/16
5193 1 WSHR SQ 4X4X13/16
5240 1 pr BRC XARM WOOD 72 IN
5278 2 CLIP BONDING 1/2 IN
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 4 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5340 4 NUT MF 1/2 IN
5341 2 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5342 4 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5349 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 1/2
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 4 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5370 1 lb NAIL CW 10D
5373 40 CLIP GIRD WIRE#6 CU
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376* 4 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
* To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
IDAHO
(Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T (Pin) Structure �POIX R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9353-01
Application. (Obsolete) This 46 kV to 69 kV Tangent or "T"structure is constructed with
a ridge iron and post insulators. The ridge iron is no longer being stocked,which makes these
structures, essentially, Obsolete. Existing structures,however,must still be maintained. Please
refer to page 01-350-01 for a replacement "T"structure. For new construction,the preferred
tangent structure is the "TR"structure shown on page 01-141-01.
Bonding and Grounding. The pole ground is to be terminated in a halo at a minimum of
12"below the attachment point of the crossarm brace.Any outside insulator steel pins on the
crossarm are to be bonded to the crossarm anti-split bolts and the center insulator mounting
bracket is to be bonded to the crossarm through-bolt and the pole anti-split bolt. These changes
have been made to help eliminate the problem of nuisance tripping and the extreme difficulty
which follows in attempting to locate the source of the problem. The pole ground is terminated in
a halo to eliminate radio noise and near the top of the pole to provide a convenient ground point
for maintenance personnel. For additional details concerning appropriate grounding practices,
see page 02-002-01.
A pole top bracket
has been shown
Remove any bonding as a replacement
between insulator studs. for the ridge iron.
Et
4"
Remove pole ground
wire above the"halo".
12"Min Alternate Method for
Attatching Center Phase
Insulator Mounting Bracket
7"
T o
T
Obsolete Bonding&
Grounding Method
��DAW
PO R (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T (Ridge Iron) Structure
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9354-01
Application. (Obsolete)This Tangent structure is the preferred 46-kV to 69-kV "T"
structure used on the Idaho Power Company transmission system. It was originally developed
using pin insulators, as shown on page 01-352-01. Later,the "T"structure was modified to be
built with line post insulators using a crossarm and ridge iron design. See page 01-353-01. Today,
the "T"structure is typically used to match or replace existing structures. For new construction,
the preferred tangent structure is the "TR"structure shown on page 01-141-01.
This "T"structure is assembled using post insulators on an 11 foot crossarm.As indicated above,
this structure should only be used as a replacement in an existing line.
Bonding and Grounding.The pole ground is to be terminated in a halo at a minimum of
12"below the attachment point of the crossarm brace.Any outside insulator steel pins on the
crossarm are to be bonded to the crossarm anti-split bolts and the center insulator steel pin is to
be bonded to the crossarm through-bolt and the pole anti-split bolt. These changes have been
made to help eliminate the problem of nuisance tripping and the extreme difficulty which follows
in attempting to locate the source of the problem.The pole ground is terminated in a halo to
eliminate radio noise and near the top of the pole to provide a convenient ground point for
maintenance personnel. For additional details concerning appropriate grounding practices, see
page 02-002-01.
Details A&C
b
4"
Remove any bonding
between insulator studs.
Detail B
Detail D
12"m Remove pole ground
b wire above the"halo".
Detail E
Obsolete Bonding&
Grounding Method
�ppMR (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T (Post) Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9354-02
Transmission
For hardware details and ECMS Codes see pages:
02-002-01 Grounding 11-010-01 Armor Rod
08-200-01 Clamp 11-300-01 Formed Tie
Details. (See page 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
4736
or
4774
5183
5359 5278
ff
See bolt sch 5349
5179 4" 5340
8 cm98
3513
5185
5341 5280
5350 5342 5351
5170
5279 4876
Detail A Detail B
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly Bonding Pin Insulator Mounting and Bonding
(TASB) (T169)
See bolt sch 5172
Note 4
5193
4774
5185
4950
5351
3513
5342
5280
Detail C Detail D
Crossarm Mounting and Bonding (TASM11) Clamp top insulators may be used in
place of the tie top insulators shown
in details A, B, &C
(Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV kV T (Post) Structure 'Qp�R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9354-03
5099
5183
5188 8" Detail A
24" 5373
max.
5370
3657
5177
5240
5349
5340
a) Mounting Crossarm Brace to Crossarm
4706
5376
(See page 02-002-02
5240 for grounding details)
5184
o
See bolt sch 18"min.
5341
5374
4078
5350 5170
18"
10%of min.
pole height
plus 2'-0"
b) Mounting Crosssarm Brace to Pole 5034
Detail D
Mounting the Crossarm Brace
(TWB72)
Detail E
Pole Grounding
(With Halo)
�ppR (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T (Post) Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9354-04
Transmission
Bill of Materials Bolt Schedule
Catalog ID Qty Description Catalog ID Description Qty Per Pole Class
3513 3 lb CND CU SLSLIDSD BR 6 Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
3657 7 lb CND CW SLID 6 5098 BLT GALV MCH 1/2X8
4078 1 CN WLD 5/8 ROD46 CU Crossarm 2 2 2 2 2
Note 3,5 3 ROD ARMOR AL(size) 5099 BLT GALV MCH 1/2X10
Note 2,6 3 TIE FMD TOP(size) Crossarm 2 2 2 2 2
4352 1 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6 5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12
4706 Note 1 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT Anti-split` - - - 1 1
4736 Note 2 3 INS LP VERT TIE 69KV 5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
4774 Note 3 3 INS LP VERT CLP 69KV Anti-split' - 1 1 1 1
Note 4 3 CLP LP INS(size) 5110 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X16
4876 3 STUD INS 3/4 X 10 Anti split` 1 1 1
5111 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X18
4950 1 XARM 6X8X11 SM HOLE
Anti-split` 1 - - - -
5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT 5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 1/2X(long) Crossarm - - - - 1
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long) 5227 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20
See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long) Crossarm - - 1 1 -
5170 3 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16 5128 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X22
5172 1 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X13/16 Crossarm 1 1 - - -
5177 2 WSHR TAP FLGD 3X3X5
5179 2 WSHR RND 9/16 HOLE or cross brace or top mount insulator
5183 4 WSHR SPR 9/16 HOLE
5184 2 WSHR SPR 11/16 HOLE
5185 4 WSHR SPR 13/16 HOLE
5188 2 WSHR SQ 2X2X9/16
5193 1 WSHR SQ 4X4X13/16
5240 1 pr BRC XARM WOOD 72 IN
5278 2 CLIP BONDING 1/2 IN
5279 1 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 4 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5340 4 NUT MF 1/2 IN
5341 2 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5342 4 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5349 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 1/2
5350 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 4 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5359 3 SADDLE XARM
5370 1 lb NAIL CW 10D
5373 40 CLIP GRID WIRE#6 CU
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376 Note 1 4 STAPLE MILD SQ BARBED
1 To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
2 Use tie top line post insulators on conductors sized
4/0 and smaller.
3 Use clamp top insulators on conductors sized larger
than 4/0,or where conductor galloping is a problem.
4 Refer to page 08-200-01 for line post insulator
clamps.
5 Refer to page 11-010-01 for Armor Rods.
6 Refer to page 11-300-01 for Formed Top Ties
(Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV kV T (Post) Structure 9@Pd�W R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9360-01
Application. (Obsolete) The 46-kV and 69-kV Tangent Before Corner or "TBC"
structure is constructed with a pole top bracket, a crossarm and post insulators.The ridge iron,
with which it was once constructed, is no longer being stocked. This makes these structures
essentially OBSOLETE. Existing structures,however,must still be maintained.Although
obsolete, a replacement "TBC"structure similar to 01-361-01 can be constructed with polymer
insulators.
Bonding and Grounding. The pole ground is to be terminated in a halo at a minimum of
12"below the attachment point of the crossarm brace.Any outside insulator steel pins on the
crossarm are to be bonded to the crossarm anti-split bolts and the center insulator mounting
bracket is to be bonded to the pole anti-split bolt.These changes have been made to help
eliminate the problem of nuisance tripping and the extreme difficulty which follows in
attempting to locate the source of the problem. The pole ground is terminated in a halo to
eliminate radio noise and near the top of the pole to provide a convenient ground point for
maintenance personnel. For additional details concerning appropriate grounding practices, see
page 02-002-01.
o- A pole top bracket
has been shown
as a replacement
3^� for the ridge iron.
4-6"
0
Remove any
bonding between
insulator pins
Remove pole ground
12"Min wire above the"halo'.
Y
e Bonding&
ing Method
��DAW
PO R (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV TBC (Ridge Iron) Structure
Revised 10/03

C CD ¢CD CD CDv CCD
Q C� p a O �.. CD CD
aQ A y
�J CD N �Q �.O O o
cO � CD rr
O O yc. °
aQ C � CD CD n y l A� O1 N
¢ CD aQ C .� r� O
O_ 5 G. CD Cr O O A� O
n p ? CL A� Q\ O rr
1p
0 0 CD BCD CD CrCD O O ,{' o 0
CD
O 0 y
n a CD .may p ."'ram' `.T''
0 O n
CD CD ¢ co co cu C Er 5
v a � 0 Id o -4 C
0 CD
N n v C n O CD
0 CD
A�CD
¢ CA
O�
m CA It � 0 C � 0 � ff
O �
rt = n? p CD CD p CD p
3 W �• O CCD YCD
O O
U�q CD O O "�. �C CD 0 "pis• CD
CD O c� C, cn "'t O
G O CD CD CD rL90 CD 0 O
CD CD CD C p CDCIO, CL
CD ¢ v Lb
m ~ CL CD
CD O O
CD
CD 3w "' CD O
G CD a,�0 CD m CD
A �_ Wig `
CD O CD .y
—I o m a v, d, CD o o co ¢ ¢ CD
CD CC
O v 9 ¢ CD CD cr It
N Q' -'CD N �'h O
O 5 O .� D
fD p O W CCD `L5 N O O ¢ Cfl
C7cn
Er CDC CCD O CD
O C)
R

01-9361-02
Transmission
Details. (See page 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions
used in the illustrations within this document.)
4736
or
4774
5170
385-1835
5184 5234
5184
0 7„ 5341 Y
5279 3513 7 7.
5341 See bolt sch 5279 0 8°
o
5350 5170
5350 See bolt sch
Detail A
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly Bonding Detail B
(TASB) Pin Insulator Mounting and Bonding
(TIP69 + TPTB)
4736 See bolt sch 5172
or
4774
5183
4950
5359 5278
5349
5179 5340
5098 3513 5193 5351
5185 5280
5280 5185
5342
5342 5351
Detail D
4876 Crossarm Mounting and Bonding
(TAS M 11)
Detail C
Crossarm Mounting and Bonding
(TAS M 11)
(Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV TBC Structure 'Qp�R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9361-03
5099 L
5183 Detail A 7"
5188
Halo
12"Min.
5177
5240
5349 3657
5340 24
Max.
5373
a) Mounting Crossarm Brace to Crossarm
5370
4706
5240
5376 (See page 02-002-02
for grounding details.)
5184
0
See bolt sch
5341
18"Min.
5350 5170 5374 4078
18"
Min.
10%of
b) Mounting Crosssarm Brace to Pole Pole Height
+2'-0„
5034
Detail E
Mounting the Crossarm Brace
(TWB72)
Detail F
Pole Grounding
(With Halo)
`IDAW
POMR (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV TBC Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9361-04
Transmission
For hardware details and ECMS Codes see pages:
02-002-01 Grounding 11-010-01 Armor Rod
08-200-01 Clamp 11-300-01 Formed Tie
Bolt Schedule Bill of Materials
Catalog ID Description Qty Per Pole Class Catalog ID Qty Description
Purpose H2 H1 1 2 3
3513 3 lb CND CU SLID SD BR 6
5099 BLT GALV MCH 1/2X10 3657 7 lb CND CW SLID 6
Crossarm 4 4 4 4 4 4078 1 CN WLD 5/8 ROD46 CU
5108 Anti-split - - 1 1 1 4352 1 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14 4706* 1 MLDG GRID PSTC 1X8 FT
Anti-split 1 1 4736** 3 INS LP VERT TIE 69KV
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14 4774** 3 INS LP VERT CLP 69KV
Top Mnt. 2 2 2 4874 1 STUD INS 3/4X1 3/4
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14 4876 2 STUD INS 3/4 X 10
X Brc. 1 4950 1 XARM 6X8X11 SM HOLE
5110 BLTLT GALV MCH 5/8X16 GA 2 2LV MCH 5/8X16 5034 1 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
5110 BLT GA
Top 5098 2 BLT GALV MCH 1/2X8
Xarm Brc. - - 1 5099 2 BLT GALV MCH 1/2X10
5111 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X18 5109 2 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14
Xarm Brc. 1 1 - - - See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 5/8X(long)
5126 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18 See Bolt Sch BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
Crossarm - - - - 1 5170 4 WSHR CRVD 3X3 X11/16
5227 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20 5172 1 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X13/16
Crossarm - - 1 1 - 5177 2 WSHR TAP FLGD 3X3X5
5128 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X22 5179 4 WSHR RND 9/16 HOLE
Crossarm 1 1 - - - 5183 4 WSHR SPR 9/16 HOLE
5184 4 WSHR SPR 11/16 HOLE
5185 3 WSHR SPR 13/16 HOLE
5188 2 WSHR SQ 2X2X9/16
5193 1 WSHR SQ 4X4X13/16
5234 1 BRKT POLETOP 69KV INS
5240 1 pr BRC XARM WOOD 72 IN
5278 2 CLIP BONDING 1/2 IN
5279 2 CLIP BONDING 5/8 IN
5280 4 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
5340 4 NUT MF 1/2 IN
5341 4 NUT MF 5/8 IN
5342 3 NUT MF 3/4 IN
5349 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 1/2
5350 2 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8
5351 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
5359 4 SADDLE XARM
5370 1 Ib NAIL CW 10D
5373 40 CLIP GRID WIRE#6 CU
5374 1 lb STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2
5376* 4 STAPLE MLD SQ BARBED
To be used when there is no distribution underbuild.
** Use tie top line post insulators on conductors sized 4/0
and smaller;clamp top insulators on conductors larger
than 4/0,or where conductor galloping is a problem.
IDAHO
(Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV TBC Structure WNPOW R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9610-01
Application. (Obsolete) This Tangent structure with MICRO=LAM crossarms and pin
type insulators or T-ML structure has been used on 46-kV and 69-kV lines within the Idaho
Power Company transmission system. Since the MICRO=LAM crossarms are no longer being
manufactured,this structure is obsolete and is illustrated as a reference for those who maintain
the existing structures.
Bonding and Grounding. The pole ground is to be terminated at the distribution
underbuilt circuit.The outside insulator hardware on the transmission crossarm is to be bonded
to the crossarm anti-split bolts and the center insulator hardware is to be bonded to the pole anti-
split bolt and the crossarm through-bolt. In a few instances,nylon anti-split bolts have been used
and do not need to be bonded. These changes have been made to help eliminate the problem of
nuisance tripping and the extreme difficulty which follows in attempting to locate the source of
the problem. Terminate the pole ground in a halo if there is no distribution underbuild. See
Details F&G. The halo helps to eliminate radio noise and is placed near the top of the pole to
provide a convenient ground point for maintenance personnel. For additional details concerning
appropriate grounding practices, see page 02-002-01.
Detail A Detail D
0
411-2410
Details B&C
6'-2"
min.
0 0
Detail E - °
Obsolete Bonding&
Grounding Method
RM—ppMR (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T-ML Pin Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9610-02
Transmission
Details. (See page 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
5184
5185
5350 o 8"
5193 5280
5342
5341
See bolt sch See bolt sch
5 185 5351
5279 5170 °
FM
5280 3513
5351
Detail A 4876
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly
See bolt sch
5172
Detail B
Crossarm Mounting
Remove mounting
bolt to install pin.
a of
5280
5351
4876
Detail C
Crossarm Mounting
(Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T-ML Pin Structure ''pO R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9610-03
See Notes 1 &2
8"
6 2"
min.
4767
5183 3657
24"
5179 5278 Max.
See bolt scch 5340 5373
513 7/
JJ IJ
5349
5280 5370
5342 5185 4706
4876 5351 (See page
02-002-02 for
See note 3. 5376 grounding
details)
Detail D
Mounting and Bonding Post Insulators at
the Ends of the Crossarm
18"min.
Notes:
1. For additional information concerning wraplock 5374 4078
ties,seepage 11-300-01.
2. For additional information concerning armor
rods,see 11-010-01.
3. If a nylon anti-split bolt is used,no bonding is 10%of
required. pole height
+21 0„ MIN.
5034
Detail E
Pole Grounding
�ppMR (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T-ML Pin Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9610-04
Transmission
7 -'min. Halo
3857
24"
Max.
5373
5370
4706
5378 (See Page 02-002-02
for Grounding Details)
18"Min.
E 5374
4078
18"
Min.
7'min. 10%of
Pole Height
Remove pole ground 5034
wire above the halo. —
Halo
Detail F Detail G
T-ML Structure with No Underbuild Pole Grounding
and a Halo Ground Wire Termination (With Halo)
IDAHO
(Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T-ML Pin Structure POWER
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9615-01
Application. (Obsolete) This Tangent structure with MICRO-LAM crossarms and post type
insulators or T-ML structure has been used on 46-kV and 69-kV lines within the Idaho Power
Company transmission system. Since the MICRO-LAM crossarms are no longer being
manufactured,this structure is obsolete and is illustrated as a reference for those who maintain
the existing structures.
Bonding and Grounding.The pole ground is to be terminated at the distribution underbuilt
circuit. The outside insulator hardware on the transmission crossarm is to be bonded to the
crossarm anti-split bolts and the center insulator hardware is to be bonded to the pole anti-split
bolt and the crossarm through-bolt. In a few instances,nylon anti-split bolts have been used and
do not need to be bonded. These changes have been made to help eliminate the problem of
nuisance tripping and the extreme difficulty which follows in attempting to locate the source of
the problem. Terminate the pole ground in a halo if there is no distribution underbuild. See
Details F&G. The halo helps to eliminate radio noise and is placed near the top of the pole to
provide a convenient ground point for maintenance personnel. For additional details concerning
appropriate grounding practices, see page 02-002-01.
Detail A
Detail D
0
Details B&C 411-2410
6'-2"
Min
0 o e
Detail E
- o
Obsolete Bonding&
Grounding Method
41
RM—ppMR (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T-ML Post Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9615-02
Transmission
Details. (See page 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
4736
or
4774 5172
457-3705 5185
5342
5193
See bolt sch
5184
5185 5351
5280
5280
5350 0 8" 3513
5351
Detail A
See bolt sch 4876
5341
5279 5170 See bolt sch
0
Detail A Detail C
Anti-Split Bolt Assembly Crossarm Mounting and Bonding
Remove mounting bolt
to install stud.
5185
5280
3513 5351
4876 5342
Detail B
Crossarm Mounting
(Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T-ML Post Structure ''pO R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9615-03
See notes 1 &2
A
8"
6 2"
4736 min.
or
4774
3657
24"
5183 Max.
457-3705
5278 L 5373
5179 C
w)
Note 3 5370
5192 5349 4706
5280 5185 (See page
02-002-02 for
5342 3513 5376 grounding
4 details)
825 5351
Detail D
Mounting and Bonding Post Insulators at
the Ends of the Crossarm
18"min.
5374
4078
Notes:
1. For additional information concerning wraplock
ties,seepage 11-300-01. 10%of
2. For additional information concerning armor pole height
rods,see 11-010-01. +2'-0.. MIN.
3. If a nylon anti-split bolt is used,no bonding is
required. 5034
Detail E
Pole Grounding
NEW—pp�R (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T-ML Post Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9615-04
Transmission
T 8"
min. Halo
3657
24"
Max.
5373
—(�(
5370
4706
5376 (See Page 02-002-02
:< for Grounding Details)
18"Min.
0 5374 4078
18"
Min.
T min. 10%of
Pole Height
5034
Remove pole ground
wire above the halo. —
Halo
Detail F Detail G
T-ML Structure with No Underbuild Pole Grounding
(With Halo)
(Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV T-ML Post Structure ' O R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9620-01
Application. (Obsolete) The Tangent Before Corner structure with MICRO-LAM
crossarms or the "TBC-ML"structure has been used on 46-kV and 69-kV lines in the Idaho
Power Company transmission system. Since the MICRO-LAM crossarms are no longer being
manufactured,this structure has been removed from standards and is illustrated here, as a
reference, for those who maintain the existing structures.
Bonding and Grounding. The pole ground is to be terminated in a halo at a minimum of
12"below the bottom bolt of the crossarm bracket.Any outside insulator steel pins on the
crossarm are to be bonded to the crossarm anti-split bolts and the center insulator steel pin is to
be bonded to the pole anti-split bolt. In a few instances,nylon anti-split bolts have been used and
do not need to be bonded. These changes have been made to help eliminate the problem of
nuisance tripping and the extreme difficulty which follows in attempting to locate the source of
the problem. The pole ground is terminated in a halo to eliminate radio noise and near the top of
the pole to provide a convenient ground point for maintenance personnel. For additional details
concerning appropriate grounding practices, see page 02-002-01.
Details A&C
A pole top bracket has been shown
as a replacement for the ridge iron.
Remove any bonding
between insulator pins.
4'-0"
18521
0
Detail E
Detail B Detail D
Remove pole ground 12"Min.
wire above the OhaloO. j
Obsolete Method —
Halo of Bonding
24"
Max.
Detail F
0
NEW—ppWR (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV TBS-ML Structure
Revised 10/03

01-9620-02
Transmission
Details. (Seepage 00-010-01 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
See bolt sch 5185
5193 5280
See bolt sch 5342
5184 5185
3"
7" 5280 5351
5279
��t
5351
5341 See bolt sch
5342
0
5350 5170
See bolt sch
3513 5172
Detail A Detail B
Bonding Center Pin Insulator to Crossarm Mounting
Anti-split Bolt Assembly (Side View)
4736
or
4774
5170
5184 5234 ❑
5341
3513 7" 5185
L�__
5279 0 8„ 18" 5351
5342
See bolt sch
5350
Detail C Detail D
Pin Insulator Mounting and Bonding Crossarm Mounting
(Front View)
(Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV TBS-ML Structure ' O R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 01-9620-03
See Notes 1 &2
8" Detail A
4736 24"
5373
or max.
4774
5370
3657
457-3705 5183
�5179 � 5278
Note 3 5340
'� ��'3 � 406
5349 7
5280
5185 5376
5342
4876 5351 (See page 02-002-02
for grounding details)
Detail E
Mounting and Bonding Pin Insulators at
the Ends of the Crossarm
18"min.
5374
4078
Notes:
1. For additional information concerning wraplock
ties,see page 11-300-01. 18"
2. For additional information concerning armor 10%of min.
rods,see 11-010-01. pole height
3. If a nylon anti-split bolt is used,no bonding is plus 2'-0"
required. 5034
Detail F
Pole Grounding
(with halo)
�ppMR (Obsolete) 46-kV & 69-kV TBS-ML Structure
Revised 10/03

Transmission 02-002-01
Grounding Wood Pole Transmission Structures
Purpose Joints and Splices
The National Electrical Safety Code Avoid using joints or splices in a ground
(NESC)requires grounding"as one of the circuit.When a splice is required, only
means of safeguarding employees and the compression connectors and exothermic
public from injury that may be caused by joints or splices are permitted. These types
electrical potential." of connectors and splices provide quality
connections without significantly increasing
Copperweld Wire, Clips, and Nails the resistance of the ground circuit.
All grounding conductor must be made of Ground Wire Molding
copper or other metals which will not
corrode. In an effort to discourage the theft The NESC requires that ground wire molding
of copper ground wire,Idaho Power be installed on single grounded structures in
Company has adopted the use of#6 areas where the pole ground wire is exposed
copperweld for ground wire on transmission to the general public. To meet this
structures. requirement, Idaho Power requires ground
wire molding to be installed on all
Grounding conductors shall have the transmission structures without a shield wire
capability of conducting anticipated fault or a distribution multi-ground neutral.A
current without thermal overload or minimum of 6 molding staples is required to
excessive voltage buildup. Poles for circuits secure the molding and keep it straight.
up to 138-kV require one ground wire per
pole; 230-kV circuits require two per pole; Grounding and Bonding of Pole
and 345-kV circuits require three ground Hardware
wires per pole.The higher voltage wood
structures require multiple pole ground The practices for grounding and bonding
wires to protect them from induction caused pole hardware on Idaho Power Company
pole fires which are more likely to result transmission structures can be divided into
when only one ground wire is installed. two general categories:
Copperweld clips, copperweld nails, and 1. Single pole,46-kV to 69-kV
galvanized staples are used to secure the transmission structures with wood
pole ground wire to the pole. Space ground crossarms and
wire clips a maximum of 24" apart for 2. all other transmission structures.
46-kV tol38-kV structures and 18" apart for
structures of 230-kV and above. Two rules of thumb help to determine when
to bond and when to ground pole hardware
in each of these categories.
99PDAHO
R Grounding Wood Pole Transmission Structures
Revised 06/10

02-002-02
Transmission
Rules of Thumb All Other Transmission Structures
♦ Bond pole hardware items that are to Nuisance trips and their associated
float or stay independent of the troubleshooting headaches have not been a
grounding network and which pass problem with this category of transmission
within 6" of each other.This is done to structure. Therefore,most of the hardware
avoid tracking and radio noise on these structures will be grounded.
problems. Several general guidelines have been
included here to assist in making grounding
♦ Ground pole hardware items that are decisions.
located within 6" of the pole ground
wire or another hardware item which is Ground all metal insulator mounting
attached to the pole ground. This is done hardware to the pole ground wire.Anti-split
to avoid injury that may be caused by bolts and other metal hardware items that
differences in electrical potential, come within 6" of the insulator mounting
tracking problems, and radio noise hardware must be grounded, as well.
problems.
All down guys are to be grounded and
Single Pole,46-kV to 69-kV Structures insulated according to the instructions found
with Wood Crossarms.On these structures, in section 04-600, Grounding and Insulating
the pole ground is to be terminated in a Guys.
`halo'at a minimum of 12"below the
attachment point of the crossarm brace or
mounting bracket.Any outside insulator
steel pins or studs on the crossarm are to be
bonded to the crossarm anti-split bolts.Any
center insulator steel pin or stud is to be
bonded to the crossarm through-bolt,the
pole anti-split bolt, or both, depending upon
the configuration.
These practices are followed to help
eliminate the problem of nuisance tripping
and the extreme difficulty which follows in
attempting to locate the source of the
problem. The pole ground is terminated in a
`halo'to eliminate radio noise and near the
top of the pole to provide a convenient
ground point for maintenance personnel.
Details for the type of structure that falls
into this category is found in section 01-350.
Grounding Wood Pole Transmission Structures 199IPOW R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 02-002-03
Ground Rods Poles In and Near Substations
All new structures will be grounded with Pole grounds,which are located on
5/8" x 8'ground rods. The top of the ground transmission poles inside a station fence or
rod is to be driven to a minimum depth of outside the station fence but within 10'of
18". The ground rod should be placed a the fence, shall be connected directly to the
minimum of 18" away from the pole and station ground grid.The connection to the
installed on the side of the pole away from station ground grid shall be in addition to
traffic. the normal connection to a ground rod.
Details
The following pages offer specific details
for the grounding of different types of
transmission structures.
9 9POW R Grounding Wood Pole Transmission Structures
Revised 10/03

02-002-04
Transmission
46-kV- 69-kV Wood Pole Structures without Wood Crossarms
138-kV- 161-kV Structures
69-kV- 161-kV Two Pole Structures
3 Notes:
3657 ♦ See the instructions on page 01 of this
section.
24" 5372 ♦ Install a ground wire on each pole of multiple
max. pole structures.
♦ All down guys must be installed according to
5371 the instructions in section 04-600.
Q
4706 1 Pole
Ground
5376
18"min.
5374
25448
10%of 18"
pole height MIN.
+2--0„
5034
Grounding Wood Pole Transmission Structures 199IPOW R
Revised 06/10

Transmission 02-002-05
46-kV- 69-kV Wood Pole Structures with Wood Crossarms
This dimension Notes:
o may vary.
♦ See the instructions on page 01 of this
section.
♦ Install a ground wire on each pole of multiple
pole structures.
Halo ♦ All down guys must be installed according to
12"Min. the instructions in section 04-600.
� 3657
24"
Max.
5372
5371
4706
5376
1 Pole
Ground
18"Min.
5374 25448
18"
Min.
10%of
Pole Height
+2'-0„
5034
CO�R Grounding Wood Pole Transmission Structures
Revised 06/10

02-002-06
Transmission
230-kV Wood Pole Structures 2 Pole Max. 5372
Grounds
5371
Notes: 3657
�5700
te C
A. See the instructions on page 01 of this
section.
B. Install grounds on each pole of multiple 6"Min
pole structures.Two ground wires, J �'
installed on opposite sides of the pole, are 18"Min
required.
C. Tie the two ground wires together 6"or 5374 25448
more below the ground line and connect
them to a single ground rod.
D. See the appropriate structure in section 01
for an illustration of the top of the pole. 10%of 36"
pole height Min
+2._0.1
5034
345- kV Wood Pole Structures 3 Pole 18" 5372
Grounds Max.
5371
Notes: 5700 3657
A. See the instructions on page 01 of this Note C
section.
B. Install grounds on each pole of multiple 6"Min
pole structures.Three ground wires,
equally spaced around the pole, are 18"Min
required.
C. Tie the three ground wires together 6"or 5374 25448
more below the ground line and connect
them to a single ground rod.
D. See the appropriate structure in section 01
for an illustration of the top of the pole. 10%of 36"
pole height Min
+2._0.1
5034
Grounding Wood Pole Transmission Structures 199IPOW R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 02-002-07
Materials
Additional Information
The following materials are required when
grounding transmission wood pole For additional information,please refer to
structures: the following sections:
Cat. ID Description 02-003 Grounding of Fences,
3657 CND CW SLID 6
Buildings, and Other Metal 4706 MLDG GRD PSTC 1X8 FT Objects
5034 ROD GRD CW 5/8 X 8 FT 02-005 Grounding of Switch
5371 NAIL CW 10D Structures
5372 CLIP GRID WIRE#6 CU
5374 STAPLE FENCE 1 1/2 02-015 Grounding Hardware
5376 STAPLE MLD SO BARBED 04-600 Grounding and Insulating Guys
5700 CONN,C-TAP,#6 TO#6
25448 CONN,CU,GRD, DRV-ON,5/8
The following table shows the required
quantities of copperweld wire, copperweld
ground clips, copperweld nails, and staples
for various lengths of poles. The appropriate
PassPort codes for wood poles include these
materials.
Pole Gnd Wire CW Fence
Length #6 CW Clips Nails Staples
40' 39 ft 20 1 lb 1/4 lb
45'-55' 52 ft 23-25 1 lb 1/4 lb
60'-65' 65 ft 30-33 1 lb 1/4 lb
70'-75' 78 ft 35-38 1 lb 1/4 lb
80'-85' 91 ft 40-43 1 lb 1/4 lb
90'-95' 104 ft 45-48 1 lb 1/4 lb
Notes: The quantities shown here do not apply for
230-kV and 345-kV structures. For 230-kV
structures, multiply the quantities by 2;for 345-kV
structures, multiply by 3. Material descriptions and
quantities for switch structures can be found in
section 02-005.
WN�R Grounding Wood Pole Transmission Structures
Revised 10/03

Transmission 02-003-01
Grounding Fences, Buildings,
and Other Metal Objects
Purpose When grounding chain link fences, ground
the fence fabric at several locations.Also
The purpose of this document is to illustrate ground each strand of barbed wire.
the general grounding methods used in
grounding fences,buildings, and other metal
3862
objects located in the vicinity of high
voltage transmission lines.
Grounding Metal Fences
The methods for grounding fences pertain
28806
only to non-electric fences. For assistance
with electric fences within the transmission Wood or
line grounding zone, consult with personnel metal posts
in T&D Design.
When grounding a barbed wire fence, each
strand of wire must be grounded.
Wood or
Metal Posts �g�J0oogoo°oog�F
0 6��°0 0o qOo o,
\ 18"Min.
28806
3862 25448
Not to scale.
5034
18"Min.
Not to scale
25448 1
5034
�ppMR Grounding Fences, Buildings & Other Metal Objects
Revised 10/03

02-003-02
Transmission
Wood or Metal Posts
28806
See Note 1
-Note 1 -
Wrap the ground wire around the post,at
least twice,leaving enough slack to open
and close the gate.
18"Min.
Not to scale. 5700
5034
25448
Gates are grounded by attaching a ground wire ♦ Make the connections as close to the fence
to the gate fabric in a couple of places. The posts as possible.
ground wire is wrapped around the gate post at
least twice before attaching it to the gate ♦ Install grounds at points where a fence
fabric.Leave enough slack to allow the gate to enters and leaves the right-of-way and at
open and close properly. each end as well as at intervals as
specified in the table below for
The following guidelines apply to the continuous,unbroken,parallel fences.
grounding of fences:
♦ Ground all metal fences that are in the Fence Grounding Intervals
right-of-way,regardless of their length.
Horizontal Distance
♦ Ground all fences that are parallel to the Grounding from Transmission
transmission line,are within the kV Interval Line Centerline
500 200' Within Right of Way up
grounding zone,and meet the length to 100'
requirements specified in the following 500 500' 100-200'
table. 345 400' Within Right of Way up
to 100'
♦ Fences which parallel 230-kV and lower 345 1000, 100-150'
voltage lines are required to be grounded 230&below 500' Within Right of Way
only in areas of high public usage; such as
parking lots,tennis courts,residential
areas,etc.
Grounding Fences, Buildings & Other Metal Objects ''pO R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 02-003-03
Grounding Metal Buildings and Other pipe from the well or other equivalent
Metal Objects grounds.
Buildings with metal surfaces or members ♦ Remove any paint that might be on the
and other metal objects which are situated metal surfaces when making bonds or
near transmissions lines, are grounded as connections to insure a good electrical
described below: connection. Bond all metal parts that are
not fastened together with#6 bare
♦ All buildings with metal surfaces or copper wire. The bonding wire may be
members that are located within 200'of fastened to each part with nuts,bolts,
the centerline of a transmission line are and washers or sheet metal screws.
to be grounded. Consult T&D Design
for specific recommendations. Material Descriptions
♦ Ground metal gutters that are located The following materials are used in
within 150'from the centerline of the grounding the fences,buildings and other
transmission line, or are located within metallic objects described in this section.
150'to 200'from the centerline and are
at least 150'long. Cat. ID Description
3862 CN SPLT BLT CU 4 CND
♦ Ground metal irrigation systems that 5034 ROD GRID CW 5/8 X 8 FT
parallel a transmission line for 1000' 5700 CONN, C-TAP,#6 TO#6
25448 CONN, CU, GRD, DRV-ON,5/8
and are within 100'of the centerline. 28806 CND CU SLD SD BR 6
Use cable-type connections between the
irrigation pipe and the main header feed
Metal
° Building
18"Min.
28806
25448
5034
Grounding Buildings and Other Metal Objects
�ppMR Grounding Fences, Buildings & Other Metal Objects
Revised 10/03

Transmission 02-005-01
Grounding for Kearney-KPF Switch Structures
(Without Stored Energy Operators)
Application. This document provides guidelines for grounding a Kearney-KPF switching
structure along with its operator assembly. These guidelines are intended for structures which do
not have stored energy operators (SEO). For details concerning the grounding of structures with
stored energy operators, see page 02-006-01.
28806 See note 1 5034
5374 �� o000000
00000000000
a o000000
o aP 000 oo0
2'min o000000000000-0000
o00000000000000ZZZEE0 2,
A A I zzzzz z1zz
o0000000000000000000,
0000000 5034
o_00000000000000000
I A eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
:112-
I t2min o000------00000000
See note 2 _ 4 4'-6" ��— o_APProx.4706 5034
5377 000_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_
6"� o00000000000000000
6" Section A-A
Steel Standing Mat
18"min.
i
25448
28809
4090
5034
01,
Notes:
1. Attach a#6 copper pole ground to the ground
mat system in addition to the 2/0 copper ground.
This adds an additional safety factor for the Z6-Hole 18"Deep
switch operator. It also helps to assure that the 4 Required
pole will be grounded normally if the switch and Use Sackcrete
its grounding system are removed.
2. This assembly requires one IPCo padlock on the Detail A
Platform Pedestal
switch handle.
`IDAM
R Grounding KPF Switching Structures (Non-SEO)
Revised 10/03

02-005-02
Transmission
References
09-100-01 Transmission Line Airbreak Switch Numbering
09-500-01 Steel Standing Mat Fabrication and Installation
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
28809
5170
22147 O
O
5180
5341
O
5350 O
0
O
28809
5112
or
28806 5 113
Bill of Material
Cat. ID Qty Description Cat. ID Qty Description
28806 Cnd Cu Sld SD Br 6 5180 4 Wshr Rnd 11/16 Hole
28809 Cnd Cu Str Sd Br 2/0 22147 2 Wshr Dbl Coil 15/16 Hole
25448 1 Cn Wld 5/8 Rod-#6 Cu 5341 4 Nut MF 5/8 In
4090 4 Clp Grid U 5/8 4-2/0 5350 2 Nut Galy Plain 5/8
4706 12 ft Mldg Grd Pstc 1x8 Ft 5374 Staple Cu Coated
5034 3 Rod Grd Cw 5/8x8 Ft 5376 7 Staple Mld Sq Barbed
5112 2 Bit Galy Mch 5/8x20 5377 1 Mat Grd Trnsmline Sw
5113 2 Bit Galy Mch 5/8x22 18493 4 Cnrt Premix
5170 2 Wshr Crvd 3x3x11/16 6454 1 Padlock
* As Required As Required
Grounding KPF Switching Structures (Non-SEO) 'per R
Revised 10/03

Transmission Revised 10/03 02-006-01
Grounding for Kearney KPF Switching Structures
(With Stored Energy Operators)
Application. This document provides guidelines for grounding a Kearney-KPF switching structure
along with its operator assembly. These guidelines are intended for structures which have stored energy
operators (SEO). For details concerning the grounding of structures without stored energy operators, see
section 02-005.
5374 5034
I—'� /� � o000000 000000000
oa000000000
� o0000000o a.0000000
A A t 2'min o00000 000000 o
o0000000000 2'
I � o000000000000000�0
28806 I �00000000000-----
See note 1 olu o00000 ZZZZ 5034000�
See note 2
eeeveveveeeeeeee�e
� 1 000000000000000�0
5376 1 2'minzzz
o00000 00000� oo
o00000ttZZZ0000000
4'6" `�� _ ao�---- 000000 4
Approx. o� o00000000000000000
4706 2' o00000000000000000
4706 5034 000000000000000000
?477 --------
6"� o00000000000000000
Section A-A
F1
6" Steel Standing Mat
:L 18"min.
25448
2880
4090
5034
Notes:
1. Attach a#6 copper pole round to the round mats stem in addition to 6"Hole ui Deep
pp p g g y 4 Required
the 2/0 copper ground.This adds an additional safety factor for the switch Use Sackcrete
operator. It also helps to assure that the pole will be grounded normally if
the switch and its grounding system are removed. Detail A
2. This assembly requires four IPCo padlocks;two on the switchbox hasps, Platform Pedestal
one inside the switchbox to secure the mechanism, and one on the
mechanism handle.
"IIIINPWER Grounding KPF Switching Structures (With SEO)
AlI-ORPCa 11Y

02-006-02 Revised 10/03
Transmission
References
09-100 Transmission Line Airbreak Switch Numbering
09-500 Steel Standing Mat Fabrication and Installation
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the illustrations
within this document.)
2ssos
�a
�5147
5112
22149 or
5113
5181 SEO
28806
5342
5181
5351
Bolt Assembly 2ssos
Cat. ID Qty Description Cat. ID Qty Description
28806 Cnd Cu Sld Sd Br 6 5181 6 Wshr Rnd 11/16 Hole
28809 Cnd Cu Str Sd Br 2/0 22149 2 Wshr Dbl Coil 13/16 Hole
4078 1 Cn Wld 5/8 Rod-#6 Cu 5342 4 Mut MF 3/4 In
4090 4 Clp Gnd U 5/8 4-2/0 5351 2 Nut Galv Plain 3/4
4706 12 ft Mldg Grd Pstc 1x8 Ft 5375 Staple Cu Coated
5034 3 Rod Grd Cw 5/8x8 Ft 5376 7 Staple Mid Sq Barbed
5127 2 Blt Galv Mch 3/4x20 5377 1 Mat Grd Trnsmline Sw
5128 2 Blt Galv Mch 3/4x22 18493 4 Cnrt Premix
5174 2 Wshr 6x6x13/16 6454 4 Padlock
As Required As Required
Grounding KPF Switching Structures (With SEO) 99POMR..
Al-CORPCa 1V

Transmission 02-01 U-01
Grounding for Morgan 138-kV
Switching Structures
Application. This document provides guidelines for grounding a Morgan 138-kV switching
structure, its associated operator assembly, and the personnel steel standing mat.
28806 See note 1
5034
5374 4'-8.25"i
/ o00000 oa000000000
o aP 000 oo0
j 2'min o000zzzzzz000000000�0000
A A I o00000------000 0 2,
� I � o000000000000000�
o0000000000000000�
5034
5376 TT � I � o�0000000000000�
T See note 2 000000000000000000
t 2'min
o000000006�0000000
4706 2' 4' I 0000000_0000_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_
Approx. oosZ==Z0000000 4
i 4706
5377 000_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_
6"� 5034 000_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_0_
�„ o00000000000000000
Secti n A-A
Steel Standing Mat
18"min.
i
25448 /
28809
i
6"Hole 18"Deep
4 Required
Use Sackcrete
4090
Detail A
Platform Pedestal
5034
Notes
1. Attach a#6 copper pole ground to the ground mat system in addition to the 2/0 copper ground.
This adds an additional safety factor for the switch operator. It also helps to assure that the pole
will be grounded normally if the switch and its grounding system are removed.
2. This assembly requires one IPCo padlock on the switch handle.
`ppMR Grounding Morgan 138-kV Switching Structures
Revised 10/03

02-010-02
Transmission
References
09-100 Transmission Line Airbreak Switch Numbering
09-500 Steel Standing Mat Fabrication and Installation
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
28809
3876
See Engineer
22147
5180
5341
5350
28809
5112
or
5113
28806
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description Cat. ID Qty Description
28806 Cnd Cu Sld SD Br 6 5180 4 Wshr Rnd 11/16 Hole
28809 Cnd Cu Str Sd Br 2/0 22147 2 Wshr Dbl Coil 11/16 Hole
3876 1 Cn Tap Lug 2-350 5341 4 Nut MF 5/8 In
25448 1 Cn Wld 5/8 Rod-#6 Cu 5350 2 Nut Galy Plain 5/8
4090 4 Clp Gnd U 5/8 4-2/0 5374 Staple Cu Coated
4706 12 ft Mldg Grd Pstc 1x8 Ft 5376 7 Staple Mld Sq Barbed
5034 3 Rod Grd Cw 5/8x8 Ft 5377 1 Mat Grd Trnsmline Sw
5112 1 Blt Galy Mch 5/8x20 18493 4 Cnrt Premix
5113 1 Blt Galy Mch 5/8x22 6454 1 Padlock
None 2 Wshr Crvd 2-1/2x2-1/2x11/16
'As Required
IDAW
Grounding Morgan 138-kV Switching Structures WOPO R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 02-100-01
Characteristics of Copper and Copperweld Wire
Characteristics of Bare Copper Wire
Conductor O.D. Wt. Per Foot Cat. ID PassPort Code
#6 SD Solid 0.1620 0.07946 28806 TGWCU6
#4 SD Solid 0.2043 0.1263 28807 TGWCU4
#.4 HD Solid 0.2040 0.1263 3502
#2 SD Solid 0.2576 0.2009 None TGWCU2
#2 SD 7 Strand 0.2920 0.2049 28808
#I HD 7 Strand 0.3280 0.2584 3506
1/0 HD 7 Strand 0.3680 0.3257 3507
2/0 HD 19 Strand 0.4140 0.4109 3508 TGWCU20
4/0 HD 7 Strand 0.5220 0.653 3509
250 HD 19 Strand 0.5740 0.7719 3510
Characteristics of Copperweld Wire
Conductor O.D. Wt. Per Foot Cat. ID PassPort Code
#6 Solid 0.1620 .07285 3657 TGWCW6
#4 Solid 0.2043 .1158
3 No. 6 0.3490 .2203
7 No. 6 0.4860 .5150
"QP R Characteristics of Copper & Copperweld Wire
Revised 10/03

Transmission 03-000-01
Structure Hardware
This section has been left blank intentionally for future expansion.
PrQ
IDAW
QPW R Structure Hardware
Revised 10/03

Transmission Revised 08/14 04-001-01
Screw Anchors
This section includes a description of the •
individual components of a screw anchoring
system, along with installation guidelines. The
double helix anchor may be used in most soil
conditions, and the triple helix anchor in soft,
marshy soil.The appropriate Cat. IDs are listed
in table 1.
Table 1. Screw Anchor Materials
PassPort
Cat. ID Code Description
5019 ROD SCREW GUY ADPTR
5025 TANS2 AN SCREW HELIX DBL
5026 TANS3 AN SCREW HELIX TPL °
5027 ROD AN EXT SCREW 5 FT °
5028 ROD AN EXT SCREW 7 FT
Extension Guy Adapter
If it is impractical to install the screw anchor, Lead Section
then the appropriate disk or rock anchor should
be used. When using the screw anchor, a guy strain
insulator must be inserted in the down guy. (See
Where a seasonal fluctuation of the water table drawing TS-4600)
occurs, due consideration must be given to the
selection of the anchor.
�PMR. Screw Anchors

04-001-02 Revised 08/14
Transmission
Screw Anchor Installation Instructions Tool Setup
Tools Required 1. Remove the auger from the kelly bar.
2. Attach the installation tool assembly to the
Kelly Bar Adapter. A kelly bar adapter is used kelly bar using a retaining pin and coil lock
to connect the kelly bar to the torque indicator. assembly(Cat.ID 7874; Tools Manual page
Several adapter sizes are available. It is important 108-11-02).
that the proper adapter is used to correctly fit the
kelly bar. 3. Check the operation of the torque indicator by
removing all of the shear pins and making sure
Torque Indicator. The torque indicator shows that the installing wrench can turn independent
when the anchor reaches firm soil. The torque of the kelly bar.
indicator uses multiple shear pins rated at 500-ft- 4. Align the index marks on the torque indicator
lbs each(Cat. ID 7877).Because of the variability and insert 10 shear pins into the torque
of soil conditions in the IPCo service area,the indicator. The pins should be equally spaced
torque indicator should be used on all screw around the torque indicator.Unused holes
anchor installations. should be capped with plastic inserts.After the
Locking Dog Assembly. A 3-position locking shear faces have become worn from use,the
dog assembly is used to hold the drive wrench. inserts can be transferred to the worn holes,
revealing new shear faces.
Drive Tool. The drive tool is used to connect the Anchor Installation
locking dog assembly to the screw anchor. 1. Insert the upper end of the anchor into the
drive tool and insert the retaining pin through
Kelly Bar the drive tool and the hole in the anchor shaft.
A 5/8"bolt may be substituted if necessary.
Kelly Bar Adapter 2. Swing the anchor into position and start the
Retaining Pin helix vertically into the ground.After the
Phi°' Holes For Shear Pin lower helix is into the ground several inches,
tilt the anchor to the proper guy angle. Resume
driving the anchor with clockwise rotation.
Torque Indicator Sufficient downward pressure must be
maintained at all times to avoid churning the
Capped Holes soil. For each revolution of the anchor,the
anchor must penetrate the depth of the flight.
Indexing Marks Keep the anchor assembly in-line with the
j boom if possible. If it becomes necessary to
install the anchor to the side of the boom,
special care must be used.During installation,
Drive Tool the anchor exerts a horizontal force on the
boom as it descends. The force can be great
enough to damage the turret gear. Therefore,it
is necessary to rotate the turret during
installation in addition to the other boom
motions.
IWMI iPIHO
Screw Anchors WPOMRR
Al ioncoar[amyanY

Transmission Revised 08/14 04-001-03
try again. If they shear before the anchor
Caution: Rotate turret as rotates,back the anchor out and try a new
anchor descends or the location at least 5'away.
turret gear may break
• The anchor and one 5'extension is fully
installed. Then remove the appropriate
Onumber of shear pins to test for the desired
\ holding capacity of the anchor as indicated
in Table 1.Drive the anchor 2'deeper.
If the remaining pins are sheared,the
anchor will hold the guy load shown in the
_ table. If the pins are not sheared,then
reload the torque indicator with ten pins,
add another extension,and continue
Caution: Keep junction installing the anchor.
loose and straight! Keep
nuts and bolts tight
Test for the desired holding capacity of the
anchor after the installation of each
extension.If more than 35'of extensions
are required to achieve the desired torque,
one should consider the use of an anchor
i \ with more or larger helices,or extensions
with helices.
® Install clockwise Table 2. Ultimate Soil Holding Capacities
(Lbs Tension)
\� Twin Helix Triple Helix
Type EJ Type AEJ
#Shear Pins Anchor' Anchor t
4. Drive the anchor into the ground until the
installing wrench is approximately 12"-18" 4 Pins 13 Pins 14,800 11,400
4,400 15,000
above the ground line. Disconnect the 5 Pins 18,000 18,600
installing wrench from the section in the 6 Pins 21,600 22,800
ground and reconnect it to the extension. 7 Pins 25,200 26,400
Telescope the extension coupling over the end 8 Pins 28,800 30,000
of the shaft. Install the coupling bolt and nut 9 Pins 32,400 33,600
then tighten securely. Every installation should 10 Pins 36,000 37,200
have at least one 5'extension. Continue t The NESC requires an overload factor of 1.65 be applied
driving the anchor until: to these capacities..
5. When the anchor reaches the desired setting,
• All ten shear pins break while the anchor the guy adapter is attached in the same
is being driven into the ground. If a rock manner as the extensions.The installation is
obstruction is suspected, or if the anchor now complete.
and one extension are not completely
installed,replace the ten shear pins and
NEW-PAM
MR. Screw Anchors

Transmission Revised 10/03 04-100-01
Disk Anchors
Disk anchors are installed when it is It is strongly recommended that a quantity of
impractical to install screw type or rock type crushed or 3"maximum rock be compacted
anchors.When disk anchor systems are used, directly on the disk anchor before the
install the 20" anchors for the shield wire remainder of the backfill is added.Upon
downguys and the 24" and 36" anchors for the application of the load,the disk acts as a
phase conductor downguys. wedge, forcing the small rocks upward and
outward into the sides of undisturbed earth.
Mechanical Strength
Add backfill in small quantities and compact
Use the following ultimate strengths for thoroughly.
anchor assemblies:
The Anchor Rod Trench. Dig the trench
20" disk—40,000 lbs. for the anchor rod so that the rod will be
24" disk—40,000 lbs. straight and in line with the final guy tension.
36" disk—48,000 lbs.
Keep the trench narrow,using a narrow tool
The Engineer must determine the anchor such as a digging bar.Avoid the use of
holding capacity of the soil.A soil mechanical digger or wide shovels. Disturbed
classification method or field testing may be earth ahead of the anchor seriously reduces
used to estimate the ultimate capacity of the the holding power of the anchor.
anchoring system.
The rod trench also should be filled and
Installation compacted in order to keep out surface water.
The Anchor Hole. Machine bore or hand- Work carefully to avoid damage to the
dig the anchor holes.Avoid making the holes protective plastic coating on the anchor rod.
too large in diameter.
The Anchor Eye Nut. Ensure that the bottom
In soils where digging conditions unavoidably of the anchor eye nut extends
result in caving, a larger size anchor should be 6"to 12" out of the ground.Under no
substituted. circumstances shall the eye of the anchor be
covered
The anchor hole should be dug vertically;the
rod is trenched into position.
RN R, Disk Anchors
AlI—ORPCa 11Y

04-100-02 Revised 08/19
Transmission
3-1/2' Extension Rod with Coupling
Eye Nut
5042 1
Coupling
Anchor Rod
TAN19
5004 20" Disk Anchor
5040 1"x 10'Anchor Rod
TAN23
5006 24" Disk Anchor
5040 1"x 10'Anchor Rod Disk Anchor
TAN36 APIasticnsulating Washer
38631 36" Disk Anchor
38635 1-1/4"x 10'Anchor Rodsher
Steel Cap Nut
20"Disk Anchor 24"Disk Anchor
PassPort PassPort
Cat. ID Code Description Cat. ID Code Description
5004 TAN19 ANCHOR, DISK, 20" 5006 TAN23 ANCHOR, DISK, 24"
5040 ROD AN 1"X10' 5040 ROD AN 1"X10'
5042 EXT ROD 1" 5042 EXT ROD 1"
36"Disk Anchor
PassPort
Cat. ID Code Description
38631 TAN36 ANCHOR, DISK, 36"
38635 ROD AN 1-1/4"X10'
No extension rods or couplings available.
Disk Anchors �pR,,

Transmission Revised 10/03 04-100-03
Anchor Placement
Augered Hole
Narrow Trench for
the Anchor Rod
Top View
to 12" Berm and tamp to prevent water entry
O
Final grade � �
P o -
0
Compact this soil
per specifications
o
Be careful not to damage the rod. If
you do nick the coating,cover the Use concrete allow proper set-up
damaged area with vinyl tape. � � p p P
time)or crushed rock or gravel.
a o Compact fill per specifications
o a
P
9 �
P
Position the anchor disk ► ® u
in this position and depth
of the augered hole.
MMPOMRI, Disk Anchors
AlI—ORPGa 11Y

Transmission 04-300-01
Rock Anchors
Rock
Rock
When the expanding rock anchor is
installed, a guy strain insulator must be
Rock Anchors may be used only in solid inserted in the down guy(See section
rock of adequate mass to withstand the 04-600).
wedging action of the expanding mechanism
without splitting or crumbling. They must Installation
never be used where there exists the
possibility of the rock splitting or crumbling Drill the rock in line with the pull of the guy
under the strain. The expanding rock anchor and with a hole 1/8" to 1/4" larger than the
may be used where there is less than 3'of diameter of the unexpanded anchor.
over-burden.
Slip the anchor into the hole.
Use the 3/4" anchor where a 3/8" down guy
is used;the 1" anchor where a 1/2" down The anchor must be embedded at least 12"
guy is used. into solid rock and grouted above the
anchor. The anchor must not extend more
Cat. ID Description Rating than 6" above the ground line as shown
5010 AN ROCK EXP 3/4"x30" 13,800 Ib above.Under no circumstances shall the eye
5011 AN ROCK EXP 3/4"x53" 13,800 lb of the rod be covered.
5012 AN ROCK EXP 3/4"x96" 13,800 lb
5013 AN ROCK EXP 1"x53" 21,600 Ib
5014 AN ROCK EXP 1"x96" 21,600 Ib Put a bar through the rod eye and turn it
clockwise until the anchor is firmly
expanded against the sides of the hole.
DAHO
NEW—POWER R Rock Anchors
Revised 10/03

Transmission Revised 10/03 04-500-01
Pole Eye Assembly
28806
5328
5280 See bolt sch
��Q 4845
Typically 5" o 0
5342
5351 See pg 08-200-06 1
� 1
5700
Typically, 3/8 EHS guy wire
is used with pole eye construction.
Application Cat.ID Description
5123 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X12
The pole eye assembly is used for the 5124 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X14
attachment of deadend or running angle 5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16
insulator shield wire assemblies and anchors or 512 512 7 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X18
7 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X20
overhead guys to wood poles.
Pole Eye Assembly Material List
Maximum horizontal tension,with a 1:1 slope, PassPort Code—TPEA
is limited to 5900 lbs with 3/8 EHS guy or 7,000 Cat.ID Rty Short Description
lbs with 1/2 EHS guy. Pole eyes are preferred 28806 13 ft CND CU SLID SD BR 6
over pole bands due to material and labor cost 4352 2 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6
4845 1 CLV THMB 3/4 IN PIN
savings. See Bolt Sch 2 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X(long)
5280 1 CLIP BONDING 3/4 IN
Schedule for 3/4" Machine Bolts 5328 2 EYE POLE PLT HD
Distance Down Length(in inches)Per Pole Class 5342 2 NUT MF 3/4 IN
From Pole Tip H2 H1 1 2 3 5351 1 NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
Tip to 10' 16 16 14 14 12 Notes
1 V to 20' 18 18 16 16 14 1.See section 04-600 for use of guy strain insulators in
21'to 30' 18 18 16 16 16 isolating anchors,reducing NESC clearances by up to
31'to 40' 20 20 18 18 16 25%,or as required by the NESC to isolate broken guy
wires from lower energized conductors.
For bonding on the top bolt as shown, increase one bolt 2.See section 04-510 for guying assemblies.
length 2". 3. If the down guy must be installed with other than a 1:1
ratio,notify T&D Design.
4. Do not exceed the buckling strength of the pole when
using down guys.
"`IDAHO
POVIIE R,, Pole Eye Assembly

Transmission Revised 10/03 04-501-01
Guying Assembly
For Use With Pole Eyes
See pg.08-200-06
6'Minimum
See Note 3
See next page
di
See Note 2
o cr
4727 ay
1
� See next page 1
See next page
See pg 08-200-05
Assembly Codes Notes
1. See section 04-600 for use of guy strain insulators
Description Passport Codes in isolating anchors, reducing NESC clearances by
Down Guy Assembly TDG12,TDG12L up to 25%, or as required by the NESC to isolate
TDG38,TDG38L broken guy wires from lower energized conductors.
Guy Strain Insulator Assy TGS72,TGS73 2. When a guy strain insulator is connected directly to
For a complete material list of items,listed by Code,see the pole eye, a thimble clevis is not required.
the next page.
��R@. Guying Assembly (For Pole Eyes)
nn ioxorer cam

04-501-02 Revised 10/03
Transmission
3. Maintain a minimum distance of 6'. If the distance 5. Do not exceed the buckling strength of the pole
will be less than 6', use an additional guy strain when using down guys. Maximum horizontal
insulator in place of the guy wire. tension,with a 1:1 slope, is limited to 5,900 Ibs with
4. See section 04-500 for information concerning pole 3/8 EHS guy wire or 7,000 Ibs with 1/2 EHS guy
eyes with their associated material lists. wire.
6. If the down guy must be installed with other than a
1:1 ratio, notify T&D Design.
Detailed Assembly Listing for Pole Eye
Cat. ID Qty Description
TDG12 (112"Guy Assembly—Standard Bale)
3671 90 ft WIRE GALV GUY 1/2 EHS
4061 1 CN PG 1 BLT397&2/0
5313 1 GRIP GUY AUT 1/2
5320 1 GRIP GUY FMD 1/2 EHS
5325 1 GUY GUARD, YELLOW
TDG12L (112"Guy Assembly—Long Bale)
3671 90 ft WIRE GALV GUY 1/2 EHS
4061 1 CN PG 1 BLT 397&2/0
5314 1 GRIP GUY AUT 1/2 LNG
5320 1 GRIP GUY FMD 1/2 EHS
TDG38 (318"Guy Assembly—Standard Bale)
3668 90 ft WIRE GALV GUY 3/8 EHS
4060 1 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0
5310 1 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8
5316 1 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EH
5325 1 GUY GUARD, YELLOW
TDG38L (318"Guy Assembly—Long Bale)
3668 90 ft WIRE GALV GUY 3/8 EHS
4060 1 CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0
5310 1 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8 LNG
5316 1 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS
TGS72 (GUY INS 7'FOR 112)
4727 1 INS GUY STR 30000 78
5320 2 GRIP GUY FMD 1/2 EHS
TGS73 (GUY INS 7'FOR 318)
4727 1 INS GUY STR 30000 78
5316 2 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS
Guying Assembly (For Pole Eyes) 99POI�N R,.

Transmission 04-505-01
2-Way Pole Band Assembly
Note*
5334
5362
------------
5352
5206 5134
5343
*See Detailed Assembly Listing
o o
28806
5700
1
1
Use 1/2 EHS guy wire with
2-way pole band construction.
Application Notes
1. See section 04-600 for use of guy strain
insulators in isolating anchors, reducing NESC
The 2-way pole band is used when tensions clearances by up to 25%, or as required by
exceed the capacity of pole eyes. Maximum the NESC to isolate broken guy wires from
horizontal tension,with a 1:1 slope, is lower energized conductors.
2. See page 04-510 for guying assemblies.
limited to 10,300 lbs with ll2 EHS guy wire. 3. Do not exceed the buckling strength of the
pole when using down guys.
4. If the down guy must be installed with other
than a 1:1 ratio, notify T&D Design.
1pp R 2-Way Pole Band Assembly
Revised 10/03

04-505-02
Transmission
Detailed Assembly Listing Pole Band Selection Guide
Cat. ID Qty Description Pole Distance from
TPB2L (Pole Band 2 Way 14K L) Class Tip of Pole PassPort Code
28806 13 ft CND CU SLD SD BR 6 3 Tip to 20' TPB2S
5700 2 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6 2 Tip to 10'
5134 2 BLT GALV MCH 7/8 x 3 3 21'to 40' TPB2M
2 11'to 20'
5206 1 CLIP BONDING POLEBND 1 Tip to 20'
5213 1 BND POLE 2WAY 11-13.5 2 21'to 40' TPB2L
5334 2 pr LINK HD 2WAY POLEBND 1 21'to 40'
5343 2 NUT MF 7/8 IN H1 Tip to 30'
5352 0 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8 H2 Tip to 20'
5362 2 SHV POLE BND 7/8
TPB2M (Pole Band 2 Way 14K M)
28806 13 ft CND CU SLD SD BR 6
5700 2 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6
5134 2 BLT GALV MCH 7/8 x 3
5206 1 CLIP BONDING POLEBND
5211 1 BND POLE 2WAY 9.5-12
5334 2 pr LINK HD 2WAY POLEBND
5343 2 NUT MF 7/8 IN
5352 0 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5362 2 SHV POLE BND 7/8
TPB2S (Pole Band 2 Way 14K S)
28806 13 ft CND CU SLD SD BR 6
5700 2 SLV CU TAP OFST 6-6
5134 2 BLT GALV MCH 7/8 x 3
5206 1 CLIP BONDING POLEBND
5210 1 BND POLE 2WAY 8-10
5334 2 pr LINK HD 2WAY POLEBND
5343 2 NUT MF 7/8 IN
5352 0 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
5362 2 SHV POLE BND 7/8
IDAHO
2-Way Pole Band Assembly 111IMPOWER
Revised 10/03

Transmission 04-506-01
Guying Assembly (For Use With Pole Bands)
o o o
0
6'Minimum
See Note 3
See pg 08-200-06
See Note 2 g
4727
1 L
� 1
See Next Page
See Next Page
See 08-200-05
See next page for notes and assembly codes.
QIDAHO
QPCYW R Pole Band Guying Assembly
Revised 10/03

04-506-02
Transmission
Assembly Codes 2. When a guy strain insulator is connected
directly to the pole band, a sheave roller is not
required.
Description PassPort Codes* 3. Maintain a minimum distance of 6'. If the
Down Guy Assembly TDG12,TDG12L distance will be less than 6', use an additional
Guy Strain Insulator Assy TGS72 guy strain insulator in place of the guy wire.
4. See page 04-505-01 for information
For a complete listing of items by code,see the next concerning pole bands with their associated
table. PassPort material lists.
5. Do not exceed the buckling strength of the
Notes pole when using down guys. Maximum
1. See section 04-600 for use of guy strain horizontal tension,with a 1:1 slope, is limited
insulators in isolating anchors, reducing NESC to 10,300 Ibs with 1/2 EHS guy wire.
clearances by up to 25%, or as required by 6. If the down guy must be installed with other
the NESC to isolate broken guy wires from than a 1:1 ratio, notify T&D Design.
lower energized conductors.
Detailed Assembly Listing for Pole Bands
Cat. ID Qty Description
TDG12 (112"Guy Assembly—Standard Bale)
3671 90 ft WIRE GALV GUY 1/2 EHS
4061 1 CN PG 1 BLT397&2/0
5313 1 GRIP GUY AUT 1/2
5320 1 GRIP GUY FMD 1/2 EHS
5325 1 GUY GUEARD,YELLOW
TDG12L (112"Guy Assembly—Long Bale)
3671 90 ft WIRE GALV GUY 1/2 EHS
4061 1 CN PG 1 BLT 397&2/0
5314 1 GRIP GUY AUT 1/2 LNG
5320 1 GRIP GUY FMD 1/2 EHS
TGS72 (GUY INS 7FT FOR 112)
4727 1 INS GUY STIR 30000 78
5320 2 GRIP GUY FMD 1/2 EHS
IDAW
Pole Band Guying Assembly WNPOW R
Revised 01/05

Transmission 04-600-01
Grounding and Insulating Guys
Grounding of Guys Caution: Be sure to use the guy strain
insulator with a minimum breaking
All transmission line guys shall be strength of 30,000 lb (Cat. ID 4727)and
effectively grounded or insulated. Effective not the smaller, distribution class, guy
grounding is achieved through bonding to an strain insulator with a minimum
effectively grounded static wire or breaking strength of 15,000 lb (Cat. ID
distribution neutral. 4726).
Except where a guy strain insulator has been
installed specifically to isolate pole mounted
hardware from ground, any guy strand
between the guy strain insulator and the
pole shall be bonded to the pole ground
wire. Bond to the hardware and directly to
the guy strand as shown in the following °
illustrations.
Guy Strain Insulators
Guy strain insulators are used to prevent
accidentally energizing a guy wire or to
Pole Eye Assembly
isolate an anchor from grounding electrodes
to help to control corrosion.
Guy strain insulators shall meet the
following requirements: ® 0
Electrical Strength. Except where the
guy strain insulator is being used
exclusively for corrosion control, it shall
have a rated dry flashover voltage of at least
double the nominal line voltage and a rated
wet flashover voltage which is at least as
high as the nominal line voltage between y
conductors or the guyed circuit.A guy strain
insulator may consist of one or more 7' Pole Band Assembly
sections of fiberglass guy insulators.
Bonding to the Guy Strand and
Mechanical Strength. The rated ultimate to the Pole Mounting Hardware
strength of the guy strain insulator shall be
at least equal to the rated breaking strength
of the guy in which it is installed.
��POW R Grounding and Insulating Guys
Revised 10/03

04-600-02
Transmission
Installation. All guy strain insulators To Isolate a Galvanized Anchor Rod
shall be located such that the lower end of From the Multigrounded System. To
the insulator is at least 8'above ground level control electrolytic corrosion,guy strain
when hanging loose.This must be done to insulators are required in all anchor guys
comply with rule 279A2b(1)of the National attached to galvanized anchor rods.
Electric Safety Code.The insulators shall be Galvanized anchor rods are typically found
so placed that in case any guy sags down on rock and screw anchors, although they
upon another,the insulators will not become may also be found in other applications.
ineffective. Without this isolation,the electrolytic
reaction created between the copper
Placement of Guy Strain Insulators grounding electrodes and the galvanized
anchor rods will cause the galvanized
Guy Strain insulators are required in the anchor rods to corrode and, eventually, fail.
following instances:
The insulator must be installed to extend
Where a Guy Could Become Accidentally below the lowest line conductor. The guy
Energized. Use one or more 7' sections of strand above the guy strain insulator as well
fiberglass guy insulators where a guy passes as the pole hardware must be bonded to the
through,beside, or under line conductors if: pole ground wire as shown in the illustration
on page 01. Examples of proper and
♦ Contact with an energized conductor improper placement of the guy strain
could occur due to high winds, or insulator are shown later in this document.
♦ Vertical,horizontal, or radial clearances To Isolate any Anchor(All Types)From
from conductors to guys are less than Cathodic Protection Systems. Numerous
the standard requirements described in anode beds are located within our system to
the Advisory Manual. The section of protect natural gas lines, fuel pipelines, or
guy strand between the pole and Idaho Power Company steel transmission
insulator shall be bonded to the pole towers.When a guy anchor is being placed
ground wire. within 1/2 mile of a cathodic protection
anode bed or within 2 spans of a major
Note: Even with the addition of a guy strain natural gas line or a fuel transmission
insulator, full clearance to metallic end pipeline, a guy strain insulator may be
fittings must be maintained, and clearance required to isolate the guy anchor(all types)
to the insulator must be at least 75%of the from the multi-grounded system. See the
value specified by Table 235-6 of the NESC. illustration on page 03. Contact Line
Services for special instructions. The guy
strand above the guy strain insulator as well
as the pole hardware must be bonded to the
pole ground wire. See the illustrations on
page 01.
Grounding and Insulating Guys ' er R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 04-600-03
Anode 1/2 Mile 2 Spans O
Major
Pipeline
Figure 2.Anchor Isolation May be Required Near a Cathodic Protection System
NESC Installation Requirements ♦ Insulators shall be so placed that in case
(NESC Rule 279A2b) any guy sags down upon another,the
insulators will not become ineffective
The NESC has certain requirements (Rule 279A2b(3)).
regarding the installation of guy strain
insulators: These requirements are illustrated on pages
04 through 09.Note that the purpose of
♦ All insulators shall be located at least 8' these rules is to protect people,having in
above the ground(Rule 279A2b(1)). mind situations where guy wires break,
become slack, or are displaced somehow,
♦ When a hazard would exist with one such as by a child swinging on a down guy.
insulator,two or more guy insulators Also keep in mind that it is desirable to keep
shall be placed so as to include, in so far grounded guys out of the hot working area
as is practical,the exposed section of for protection of workers.
guy between them(Rule 279A2b(2)).
DAW
NEW—POWER R Grounding and Insulating Guys
Revised 10/03

04-600-04
Transmission
Note in this illustration that 7'fiberglass
guy strain insulators applied at the pole
for all circuits certainly meets NESC
279A2b(1) since all insulators are
installed well over 8'above the ground.
However,the illustrations that follow
show that this configuration does not
provide adequate safeguards to prevent
accidental energization of the guy
wires.
Note:
If the lower
end of the guy strain
insulator were loose,it
would be above the 8'
minimum required by
NESC 279A2b(1).
8'Min
Compliance with Rule 279A2b(1) ONLY—NOT ADEQUATE
Grounding and Insulating Guys ' O R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 04-600-05
a This illustration shows that a hazardous situation
could occur with this arrangement if, for instance,the
guy for the top distribution circuit sags into the jumper
of the lower circuit.Noting NESC Rule 279A2b(2),
we could apply another guy insulator, say a"Johnny
Ball"(guy size and voltage permitting), in an attempt
to remedy the situation. However,we would have to
be careful where we place it. See page 06.
A Hazard Exists Here!
Improper placement of the guy strain
insulator has allowed the slackened
guy to become energized.
NESC rule 279A2b(2) has
been violated.
O
m
COq,
co
Figure 4. Violation of Rule 279A2b(2)
��DPM
PO R Grounding and Insulating Guys
Revised 10/03

04-600-06
Transmission
If we place the Johnny Ball as shown here,the insulator
for the lower circuit could be rendered ineffective, in
violation of NESC Rule 279A2b(3).Applying two 7'
fiberglass insulators linked together as shown on pages
07, 08, and 09 for the top distribution circuit would
appear to be the universal solution. But,read on.
A Hazard Exists Here!
Improper application of the guy strain
insulator has allowed the energized
guy to energize another guy.
NESC rule 279A2b(3) has
been violated.
qj
N Second
a insulator
is NOT
tiqj properly
qj placed.
Q�
1
Violation of Rule 279A2b(3)
Grounding and Insulating Guys ' pO R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 04-600-07
This illustration shows that the same troubles exist when
placing transmission guy insulators at the pole only.The bottom
section of the guy could become energized should the guy
become slack and sag into the distribution circuits.We could
attempt to remedy this by inserting another insulator in the guy
at least 8'above ground level in accord with NESC Rules
279A2b(1) and(2). However, improper placement could result
in the same problem shown on page 06;that is, other insulators
could become ineffective with guy sag.
A Hazard Exists Here!
Improper application of the guy strain
insulator has allowed the broken guy
to energize another guy.
NESC rule 279A2b(3) has
been violated.
These insulators have become
/ ineffective through improper
placement of the guy strain insulatc
on the broken guy.
Q�
N�
Second
insulator
installed here
in an attempt
to meet 279A2b(2).
It still violates
Rule 279A2b(3). �.
CIO
Violation of Rule 279A2b(3)
��DPM
PO R Grounding and Insulating Guys
Revised 10/03

04-600-08
Transmission
This illustration depicts a method of
meeting all three NESC Rules 279A2b(1),
(2), and(3).All insulators will be at least 8'
above ground, and hazards are minimized ot`o
even when guys sag or break or anchors V
pull. Since the upper portion of the
transmission guys are to be effectively
grounded, insulators are not rendered
ineffective for a situation such as depicted
on page 09. J�
�a
�a
o�
C?
�o
Future
Extension
All guy strain insulators
will be well above the
desired 8' minimum
clearance.
8l'Min
Compliance with All of Rules 279A2b(1),(2), &(3)
Grounding and Insulating Guys ' pO R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 04-600-09
When the effectively grounded portion of the
guy contacts the distribution jumper,the
distribution circuit should automatically de-
Upper guy wires are energize.Note that the transmission guy strain
effectively grounded. insulators are positioned such that the guy
insulation requirement for a future extension
off the bottom distribution circuit is also
covered.
It would be impractical to depict each and
every situation in applying guy strain
insulators to meet the requirements of NESC
Rule 279A2b.However, a clear understanding
of the principles stated above will result in
proper application for other installations not
shown.
This insulator has not become
ineffective because the circuit will
de-energize through the effectively
grounded upper guy wires.
Rule 279A2b(3)is NOT Violated
Please note that the NESC prescribes clearance requirements from conductors to guy strain
insulators. See the Guy Clearances section 06-04 of the Overhead Manual.
��DAHO
POW R Grounding and Insulating Guys
Revised 10/03

04-600-10
Transmission
Material Description of Fiberglass
Guy Strain Insulators
Application. The T fiberglass, guy
strain insulator,which is rated at
30,000 pounds,must be installed on both
3/8" and 1/2" guy strand where the guy
could accidentally become energized.
Multiple 7'sections may be required to
maintain the clearances specified in the
Advisory Manual. Note: Even with the
addition of a guy strain insulator, full
clearance to metallic end fittings must be
maintained, and clearance to the insulator
must be at least 75% of the value specified
by Table 235-6 of the NESC. If guy strand is
used above the guy strain insulator, it must
be bonded to the pole ground wire as shown
in sections 04-501, 04-506 and 04-600.
Caution: Be sure to use the guy strain
insulator with a minimum breaking strength
of 30,000 lb (Cat. ID 4727) and not the
smaller, distribution class, guy strain
insulator with a minimum breaking strength
of 15,000 lb (Cat. ID 4726).
This guy strain insulator must also be used
wherever the anchor must be isolated from
1/2" guy strand for corrosion control;the
Johnny Ball does not offer adequate tensile
strength for 1/2" guy strand.
PassPort Codes. Each PassPort code
listed below includes one guy strain
insulator,two rollers, and the appropriate
formed wire guy grips.
Fiberglass Guy Strain Insulator
Cat. ID Description PassPort Codes Configurations
4727 INS GUY STIR 30000 78 TGS72
TGS73
4866 LINK SGL 3/4" None
Grounding and Insulating Guys ' er R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 04-990-01
Anchor System Corrosion - Causes & Prevention
Corrosion is the deterioration of a metal by By electrically isolating the dissimilar
chemical or electromechanical reaction with metals from one another, galvanic corrosion
its environment.A number of conditions can can be controlled. The isolation for the first
contribute to the corrosion of an anchor galvanic couple described above is achieved
system. Their interaction can affect the kind through the use of a guy strain insulator.
of corrosion, its rate of action, and whether Refer to section 04-600 for additional
it is localized as pitting or distributed over information on the application of guy strain
the metal surface. insulators.The second and third galvanic
couples described above can be isolated
Dissimilar Metals through the application of a poly sleeve set,
as shown in section 04-100,to isolate the
The electrical connection of dissimilar anchor plate from the rod.
metals creates a galvanic couple that leads
to the most active of the two metals Backfill should not be placed over the
becoming an anode and corroding. anchor rod eye because galvanic corrosion
Examples of galvanic couples include the would occur on the guy strand. If additional
following: fill is placed around an anchor,the anchor
should be reset or an adequate anchor rod
♦ Galvanized Steel Anchor Rod+ extension should be used.A plastic conduit
Copper Pole Ground. When a around the anchor rod eye and down guy
galvanized steel anchor rod is connected does not provide adequate protection.
through the guy strand to the copper
pole grounds, corrosion of the
galvanized rod occurs at about 15"
below the surface of the ground.
♦ Galvanized Steel Anchor Rod+Black
Steel Anchor Plate. When a
galvanized steel anchor rod is connected
to a black steel cross plate, corrosion
occurs on the anchor rod near the
anchor plate.
♦ Copper-Bonded Steel Anchor Rod+
Black Steel Anchor Plate. When a
copper-bonded steel anchor rod is
connected to a black steel anchor plate,
the plate is corroded where it contacts
the copper bonded rod.
NEW—POWER Anchor System Corrosion
Revised 10/03

04-990-02
Transmission
Differential Aeration extremely important that the copper layer
over the rod and threads be free of any
When an anchor rod passes through soil breaks in the coating since the exposure of
areas containing different amounts of air, an the steel to the soil would cause rapid
oxygen concentration cell is formed in corrosion of the steel core with possible
which the metal in the well-aerated area is failure of the rod.An added benefit of the
less active chemically than the oxygen copper-bonded rod is that it eliminates the
deprived metal surface. Generally,this tends need for a strain insulator in the down guy.
to concentrate corrosion on the more deeply
buried portion of the structure.An example Similar corrosion protection of the
of an oxygen concentration cell condition is galvanized rods used with screw anchors is
where the anchor rods are buried in different achieved by using rods that are purposely
soil strata, such as sand and clay. The oversized for the Application. In some areas,
section of the rod in the clay is usually where the potential for particularly strong
deprived of oxygen while the section in the oxygen concentration cells exists,these rods
sand has an excess of oxygen. The oxygen may have a relatively short service life.
concentration cell thus causes corrosion of Should this situation be encountered in the
that portion of the metal rod in the oxygen field, contact T&D Design for replacement
deprived soil.Another example of this recommendations.
situation is where the anchor rods penetrate
below the surface of the water table. The
rising and falling water level effectively
"pumps"air into the upper soil while the Stray DC Currents
section of the rod under water is deprived of
oxygen. The corrosion that results often Corrosion of buried metals is accelerated by
causes a gradual reduction of the rod stray DC current in the soil. In the Idaho
diameter, called"penciling", and failure Power Company service area,DC current is
occurs near the uppermost part of the rod mainly related to cathodic protection
that is continuously under water. installations for buried pipelines and steel
transmission towers.When anchoring within
Corrosion of the anchor rod due to one half mile of a cathodic protection anode
differential aeration has been reduced by bed or within two spans of a major natural
using a copper-bonded anchor rod.The gas or fuel transmission pipeline, a guy
corrosion of copper generally proceeds at a strain insulator may be required to isolate
slower rate than that of a galvanized steel the anchor from the multi-grounded system.
rod under the same conditions.The copper Contact T&D Design for special
coating thus protects the steel rod. It is instructions.
Anchor System Corrosion ' er R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 05-200-01
Guy Brace Assembly (TGBA)
r,� 5343
5173 '
1
See bolt sch
4872
® 5352
4845
5312
3669
4725 5173 22150
5316
5281
See bolt sch
5343
5352 4872
5352
4872
0
5186 5187 5135
5312
Application The guy brace is also used as a maintenance
replacement to the outside brace on select,
Most new H-frame construction will utilize existing lines. Consult Line Services for
laminated crossarms which will not require assistance when replacing braces on existing
braces. In rare instances, extreme loads will lines. Some lines, like the Midpoint—Borah
require the extra support provided by braces. #1 345-kV line#950 and the Boise Bench—
If the brace is a tension member(generally Midpoint#1 230-kV line#902,will require
located outside the poles),the guy brace some modifications to this approach because
assembly shown here is the preferred to the they have a different type of spacer fitting.
wood knee and vee braces that traditionally
have been used.
"`�R Guy Brace Assembly
Revised 04/06

05-200-02
Transmission
Bill of Materials Schedule for 7/8". Machine Bolts*
Distance Down Length(in)Per Pole Class
See the Work Order and PassPort for From Pole Tip H2 1-111 1 2 3
current Bill of Materials information. Tip to 10' 16 16 14 14 12
11'to 20' 18 18 16 16 14
Guy Brace Assembly Material List 21'to 30' 18 18 16 16 16
31'to 40' 20 20 18 18 16
* For bonding on the top bolt as shown, increase one
Cat.ID Qty Short Description bolt length 2".
3668 4 lb WIRE GALV GUY 3/8EHS
4725 1 BREAKER See PassPort
4845 1 CLV THMB 3/4 IN BNK Cat.ID Description
4872 2 LINK TWTD ANGLE 7/8 5136 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X12
5135 1 BLT GALV MCH 7/8 X 6 5137 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X14
See Bolt Sch 1 BLT GALV MCH 7/8 X(long) 5138 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X16
5173 2 WSHR CRVD 4X4 X15/16 5139 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X18
22150 1 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16 HOLE 5140 BLT GALV MCH 7/8X20
5187 2 WSHR SQ BVLD 15/16
5281 1 CLIP BONDING 7/8"
5312 1 GRIP GUY ALIT 3/8 RL
5316 1 GRIP GUY FMD 3/8 EHS
5343 2 NUT MF 7/8 IN
5352 3 NUT GALV PLAIN 7/8
Guy Brace Assembly 1991POW R
Revised 05/11

Transmission 05-205-01
Knee and Vee Brace Assemblies
® o
® o
® o
Spacing
Drop Drop
Spacing
® o
® o
® o
0
Knee Vee
Application loading exceeds the strength of the
unsupported arm.The braces differ only in
The guy brace assembly described on the the orientation of their end fittings. The
previous page is the modern replacement for knee brace(K-brace)has its end fittings
wood braces in situations where the brace is perpendicular to each other;the vee brace
a tension member in the structure.Where end fittings are parallel. Both may be used
the member is in compression,the wood to reinforce the crossarm either between the
brace is still used. poles, or outside the poles. The choice of
which brace is used is determined by other
Two types of wood braces have been used hardware associated with the crossarm
on H-frame construction to strengthen the design. The current standard spacer fitting
crossarm at locations where the design calls for the use of the vee brace.
��POW R Knee and Vee Brace Assembly
Revised 10/03

Transmission Revised 06/17 06-010-01
Suspension and Deadend Insulators
♦ Glass insulators are typically color coded
with a stripe on the cap.
The approved M&E strength rating assigned to
the insulator refers to the ultimate strength and
not to the maximum safe load. M&E rating is
based on the mechanical load applied to an
insulator at which the insulator fails to perform
its function either electrically or mechanically,
when voltage and mechanical stress are applied
simultaneously.
♦ Maximum working load must not exceed 1/2
of the approved M&E rating. Maximum
working load is the maximum mechanical
loading permitted on the insulator or string
of insulators under the most severe design
Aerial transmission line conductors,in both conditions for the particular location or line.
suspension and deadend configurations, are
usually supported from transmission structures ♦ All porcelain insulators are marked with
by ball and socket or polymer suspension Tension Proof Test Loads, in pounds,
insulators.The proper level of insulation and followed by the word"TEST". This marking
mechanical strength is provided by coupling will appear on the top of the insulator shell.
together the desired connecting hardware with All glass insulators will be marked with the
the required number of ball and socket insulators tension proof test loads on the insulator cap.
or the appropriate polymer insulator to form The tension proof test value represents a
deadend or suspension strings for conductor value to which the insulator has been tested
supports.This document describes the use and before leaving the manufacturer's plant.
application of suspension insulators on Idaho
Power Company's transmission system. ♦ All new construction at 345 and 500 kV will
use glass insulators.
General Notes
♦ Do not mix porcelain and glass insulators in
♦ Order all porcelain insulators in the the same string.
preferred colors,which are color coded for
strength. Insulators specified as light gray ♦ Refer to section 13-020 for a guide to
should be in accordance with ANSI selection of insulators to satisfy mechanical
Z55.1-1967 No. 70(light gray). Other colors constraints.
may be obtained for use where line
appearance and aesthetic treatment are
important. Where appearance is important,
do not use insulators of different colors on
the same structure.
IDAHO
NEW—POWER. Suspension and Deadend Insulators

06-010-02 Revised 06/17
Transmission
Insulator String Assemblies At deadends,where the assembly, at the time of
installation,will assume a position above
The appropriate number of suspension horizontal,the insulators must be reversed in the
insulators to install on transmission lines and assembly to prevent the accumulation of
their associated lengths are shown on the moisture in the skirts on the underside of the
following pages. insulators.
For installations requiring a different number of Insulator Selection
insulators, consult T&D Design.
Ball and socket insulator specifications are
Caution. Do not attempt positive shown in the table below.
identification of the voltage of an existing
operating line by counting the number of Clevis type shield wire insulators are used on
insulators in an insulator string. insulated shield wire systems. Do not use
distribution insulators on insulated shield wire
The adoption of various insulation values applications.
through the years,the voltage uprating of
selected lines, and the occasional use of o
unusual insulation values as a solution for
clearance problems have resulted in a
transmission system with many varied
insulation levels.
Cat. ID M&E Rating Safe Working Load
Maintenance replacement of suspension 4801 15,000# 7,500#
insulators due to age,wear, or damage shall be
made in kind; that is,the same type and number
of new insulators shall be used to replace the
units to be removed.Use of the same color is
important in areas where appearance is
important.
Ball and Socket Insulators
Cat. ID M&E Rating Max Working Load ANSI Class Color Code
Porcelain Insulators
4775 20,000# 10,000# 52-3 Light Gray
4777 30,000# 15,000# 52-5 Dark Gray
4779 40,000# 20,000# 52-8 Royal Blue
4781 50,000# 25,000# 52-11 Brown
Glass Insulators
4776 20,000# 10,000# 52-3 Black
4778 30,000# 15,000# 52-5 Red
4780 40,000# 20,000# 52-8 Blue
4782 50,000# 25,000# 52-11 Green
I'M IDAHO
Suspension and Deadend Insulators 991113OWERR
Al ipncoar company

Transmission Revised 10/03 06-010-03
Porcelain Suspension and Deadend Insulator Assemblies
Section
Length
Section Length
0
0
Deadend Assembly
Suspension Assembly
Suspension Assembly Deadend Assembly
Line Voltage #of Insulators Section Length* Line Voltage #of Insulators Section Length*
Wood Construction Wood Construction
46/69-kV 5 31.8" 46/69-kV 7 56.7"
138-kV 8 49.1" 138-kV 10 73.9"
230-kV 13 77.8" 230-kV 15 102.7"
345-kV 16 95.1" 345-kV 18 119.9"
Metal Construction Metal Construction
46/69-kV 7 43.3" 46/69-kV 9 68.2"
138-kV 10 60.6" 138-kV 12 85.4"
230-kV 15 89.3" 230-kV 17 114.2"
345-kV 18 106.6" 345-kV 20 131.4"
500-kV 25 146.8" 500-kV 27 171.7"
* Section length includes minimum hardware.The length * Section length includes minimum hardware.The length
may be longer if different hardware is used. may be longer if different hardware is used.
�PORa. Suspension and Deadend Insulators

06-010-04 Revised 10/03
Transmission
Polymer Suspension/Deadend Insulators
10,000 lb Maximum Working Load (20,000 lb M&E)
ANSI Ball Class(52-5)
Section Length(A)
Cat.ID PassPort Code kV Manufacturer A(in.)
Wood Construction
4783* T169W 46/69 NGK 40
Ohio Brass 41
Reliable 40
Sediver 39
4785* T1138W 138 NGK 57
Ohio Brass 59
Reliable 60
Sediver 56
4787 Obsolete 230** Lapp 85
Ohio Brass 84
Reliable 87
Sediver 92
4789 Obsolete 345** Lapp 108
Ohio Brass 108
Reliable 104
Sediver 106
Steel Construction
4785**** T138W 46/69 NGK 57
Ohio Brass 59
Reliable 60
Sediver 56
4786 T1138S 138 NGK 64
Ohio Brass 65
Reliable 64
Sediver 63
4788 230** NGK 97
Ohio Brass 96
Reliable 96
Sediver 99
4790 345** NGK 119
Ohio Brass 114
Reliable 120
Sediver 120
* Not for use as a deadend in eagle areas.
** Corona rings are required on all polymer insulators used at 230-kV or above.
See the manufacturer's catalogues for further details.
***Use a 138-kV wood insulator for 46/69-kV steel construction applications.
Reference:Also see the Materials Manual,section 02-015.
I'Q IDAHO
Suspension and Deadend Insulators WOOMRR
Al ipncoar company

Transmission Revised 10/03 06-010-05
Polymer Suspension/Deadend Insulators
20,000 lb Maximum Working Load (40,000 lb M&E)
ANSI Ball Class(52-8)
Section Length(A)
Cat.ID PassPort Code kV Manufacturer A(in.)
Wood Construction
4791 138 NGK 67
Ohio Brass 68
Reliable 68
Sediver 66
4793 Obsolete 230* Lapp 97
Ohio Brass 99
Reliable 99
Sediver 98
4795 Obsolete 345* Lapp 116
Ohio Brass 117
Reliable 121
Sediver 119
Steel Construction
4792 138 NGK 74
Ohio Brass 74
Reliable 80
Sediver 77
4794 230* NGK 107
Ohio Brass 105
Reliable 106
Sediver 109
4796 345* NGK 125
Ohio Brass 123
Reliable 124
Sediver 130
* Corona rings are required on all polymer insulators used at 230-kV or above.
See the manufacturer's catalogues for further details.
Reference:Also see the Materials Manual,section 2-015.
�POWERa. Suspension and Deadend Insulators

Transmission 06-200-01
Post Insulators
Horizontal Post Insulators
Polymer Horizontal Post Insulators
Cat. ID CU* Voltage Manufacturer Length
Wood/LD Pole Construction(Gain Base)
4743 T169HP 46/69 NGK 27"
Ohio Brass 26" o
0
Reliable 28"
Sediver 24"
4744 T1138HP 138 NGK 58"
Ohio Brass 60"
Reliable 60"
Sediver 62"
4746 230 Ohio Brass 96"
NGK 95"
Custom Steel Pole Construction(Flat Base)
4745 138 NGK 64"
Ohio Brass 64"
Reliable 66"
Sediver 66"
4747 230 Ohio Brass 96"
NGK 95"
* The Compatible Unit Code(s)includes the necessary hardware to
mount the insulator.
Length
Porcelain Horiz Post Insulators—Wood Pole Construction
Cat. ID Cu* Voltage Manufacturer Length
4743 T169HC 46/69 Lapp 22"
Ohio Brass 22" 138 kV
4724 T1138HC 138 Lapp 61"
Ohio Brass 60" Length
* The Compatible Unit Code(s)includes the necessary hardware to mount
the insulator. 7M °
69 kV
MOIDAM
R Post Insulators
Revised 09/08

06-200-02
Transmission
Vertical Post Insulators-Wood Pole Construction
Polymer Vertical Post Insulators
Cat. ID Cu* Voltage Manufacturer Length Length
4737 T169VP 46/69 NGK 27"
Ohio Brass 28"
Reliable 33"
Sediver 26"
4738 T1138VP 138 Ohio Brass 58"
Reliable 60"
Sediver 61"
36"
* The Compatible Unit Code(s)includes the necessary hardware to mount the
insulator. 16"
a -A
8 1/16"
Porcelain Vertical Post Insulators
Cat. ID Cu* Voltage Manufacturer Length
Clamp Top Insulators Length
4774 T169C 46/69 Lapp 22"
Ohio Brass 21"
NGK 22"
4748 T1138VC 138 Lapp 61" Length
Tie Top Insulators
4736 69 Lapp 20"
Ohio Brass 20" Clamp Top
NGK 20"
* The Compatible Unit Code(s)includes the necessary hardware to mount the
insulator.
Length
Tie Top
Post Insulators 99POW R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 06-250-01
Pin Insulators
--1 5 3/8" rr
4 3/8"
12 1/2"
91/8"
13 1/2" 12"
69 W 46 W
Application
This page is for maintenance information
only. These pin insulators are not to be used
for new construction.
Pin Insulators
18
1 "
Cat. ID PassPort Code Voltage 2 g
4766 TI46 (Retire only) 46-kV Q
4767 TI69 (Retire only) 69-kV
Note: Standard glaze color is ANSI-70 Skytone. 1 1/8"
12"
For information concerning wraplock ties,
seepage 11-300-01. 3 1 "
2
Metal Pins
The appropriate pin size is determined by 3/4"
the size of the crossarm. This may be A
determined by consulting the applicable = —7
structural drawings.
32
Cat. ID Description A
5161 (No purch) PIN STL 12" LONG 11"
5162 PIN STL 12"SHORT 6"
�ppR Pin Insulators
Revised 10/03

Transmission Revised 05/12 07-005-01
Thermal Ampacity of
Overhead Transmission Line Conductors
Scope ♦ Under emergency conditions, lines may be
operated above their specified maximum
The ampacity ratings for conductors shown on operating ampacities.The allowable
this standard are for use in determining the emergency ampacity of a line is limited to a
maximum allowable continuous loads for 10'temperature increase above the normal
existing transmission lines for the conditions steady state temperature rating as shown
described. below for a period not to exceed 30 minutes.
The operation at the emergency rating levels
General Notes is limited to a 30 minute time period, during
which operators are required to take action
The following general statements apply to the to reduce load levels to normal steady-state
use of the ampacity ratings listed in this limits.
standard.
♦ Depending on the conditions, certain lines
♦ The selection of conductor size in the design may possibly be capable of operating at
of new lines should take into account power higher capacity than shown in the tables.
loss and voltage drop. T&D Design is to be consulted to evaluate
clearances, condition of hardware, etc.
♦ Temperature rise in splices and connections before any attempt is made to operate the
may be a limiting factor in overhead line at a higher capacity than shown in the
conductor loading.Where the condition of tables.
the splices and connections is questionable,
caution should be used in applying these Basis of Tables for Normal and
tables. Emergency Operation
♦ When establishing an ampacity rating of a The following conductor temperature and
line,the rating will be limited to the environmental conditions have been used as a
ampacity of the most limiting component basis for the ampacity ratings listed in this
(conductor, splice, connection, etc.)of the standard.
line.
Conductor Temperatures
♦ For planning purposes, "Summer"
conditions should be assumed for loads Normal Emergency
occurring in May through October and Steady State 30 Minutes
ACSR 80°C(176°F) 90°C(1 F)
"Winter"conditions in November through
Aluminum 75°C(167°F) 85°C(18585-F)
April. Copper 75°C(167°F) 85°C(185°F)
♦ For operation purposes, if the actual ambient
temperature at the time the load occurs is
known, it may be used to interpolate on a
straight line basis between the ampacities
given in the tables.
"RNA R, Thermal Ampacity of Overhead Transmission Line Conductors

07-005-02 Revised 05/12
Transmission
Environment Conditions The ampere ratings were determined using
Southwire thermal line rating software (SWRate
Summer Ambient Temp: 40°C w/full sun 3.02).This software utilizes calculation methods
Time/Date: noon, July 1 based on IEEE 738- 1998. Data provided in the
Winter Ambient Temp: 5°C w/full sun conductor tables and the conductor calculations
Time/Date: noon, January 1
Wind Velocity: 4.4 ft/sec(3 mph) is based on ASTM 02.03-2006.
90°to line azimuth
Coeff. Of Absorption:AL 0.5
Coeff. Of Emissivity:AL 0.5
Coeff. Of Absorption: Cu 0.85
Coeff. Of Emissivity: Cu 0.85
Altitude: 3300 feet
Latitude: 42' North
Sun Azimuth 180'
Line Azimuth: 90° (E-W)
Atmosphere: Clear
Table 1.Ampere Ratings of ACSR Conductors
Summer Winter
Conductor Normal Emergency Normal Emergency
#4-Swanate 144 159 201 211
#2-Sparrow 189 210 266 278
1/0-Raven 249 276 352 367
2/0-Quail 286 317 404 421
3/0-Pigeon 327 362 463 483
4/0-Penguin 375 415 531 554
397.5-Ibis 605 679 862 910
477- Hawk 678 762 968 1021
715.5-Starling 872 983 1252 1321
715.5-Stilt 866 976 1243 1312
795-Tern 911 1027 1309 1381
795- Drake 931 1050 1341 1415
954-Cardinal 1024 1152 1478 1557
1272- Bittern 1223 1382 1770 1870
1272-Skylark 1208 1363 1747 1844
1590-Lapwing 1403 1588 2035 2151
2167-Kiwi 1673 1899 2434 2578
Table 2.Thermal MVA Ratings of ACSR Conductors at Summer Conditions
Conductor 46 kV 69 kV 138 kV 230 kV 345 kV 500 kV
#4-Swanate 11.5 17.2 34.4 57.4 86.0 124.7
#2-Sparrow 15.1 22.6 45.2 75.3 112.9 163.7
1/0-Raven 19.8 29.8 59.5 99.2 148.8 215.6
2/0-Quail 22.8 34.2 68.4 113.9 170.9 247.7
3/0-Pigeon 26.1 39.1 78.2 130.3 195.4 283.2
4/0-Penguin 29.9 44.8 89.6 149.4 224.1 324.8
397.5-Ibis 48.2 72.3 144.6 241.0 361.5 523.9
477- Hawk 54.0 81.0 162.1 270.1 405.1 587.2
715.5-Starling 69.5 104.2 208.4 347.4 521.1 755.2
715.5-Stilt 69.0 103.5 207.0 345.0 517.5 750.0
795-Tern 72.6 108.9 217.7 362.9 544.4 788.9
795- Drake 74.2 111.3 222.5 370.9 556.3 806.3
954-Cardinal 81.6 122.4 244.8 407.9 611.9 886.8
1272- Bittern 97.4 146.2 292.3 487.2 730.8 1059.1
1272-Skylark 96.2 144.4 288.7 481.2 721.8 1046.2
1590-Lapwing 111.8 167.7 335.3 558.9 838.4 1215.0
2167-Kiwi 133.3 199.9 399.9 666.5 999.7 1448.9
Thermal Ampacity of Overhead Transmission Line Conductors 99ppMR.
11 D111111-P-Y

Transmission Revised 05/12 07-005-03
Table 3.Ampere Ratings of Aluminum Conductors
Summer Winter
Conductor Normal Emergency Normal Emergency
#2-Ames 185 210 270 286
2/0-Anaheim 285 325 419 444
2/0-Aster 276 314 405 428
246.9-Alliance 380 434 562 596
336.4-Tulip 492 563 730 773
795-Arbutus 836 961 1254 1330
1,272- Narcissus 1115 1286 1689 1793
1,590-Coreopsis 1276 1475 1938 2060
Table 4.Thermal MVA Ratings of Aluminum Conductors at Summer Conditions
Conductor 46 kV 69 kV 138 kV 230 kV 345 kV 500 kV
#2-Ames 14.7 22.1 44.2 73.7 110.5 160.2
2/0-Anaheim 22.7 34.1 68.1 113.5 170.3 246.8
2/0-Aster 22.0 33.0 66.0 110.0 164.9 239.0
246.9-Alliance 30.3 45.4 90.8 151.4 227.1 329.1
336.4-Tulip 39.2 58.8 117.6 196.0 294.0 426.1
795-Arbutus 66.6 99.9 199.8 333.0 499.6 724.0
1,272- Narcissus 88.8 133.3 266.5 444.2 666.3 965.6
1,590-Coreopsis 101.7 152.5 305.0 508.3 762.5 1105.0
IMppMR, Thermal Ampacity of Overhead Transmission Line Conductors

07-005-04 Revised 05/12
Transmission
Table 5.Ampere Ratings of Copper Conductors
Summer Winter
Conductor Normal Emergency Normal Emergency
#8 solid 92 105 135 143
#4 solid 164 187 243 257
#4A-CW 176 202 263 278
#3 solid 189 217 281 298
#3K-CW 199 227 297 314
#2 solid 219 251 325 345
#2A-CW 234 269 351 372
#1 -7 str 258 296 386 410
#1 F-CW 257 295 385 408
#1J-CW 257 294 387 408
1/0-7 str 298 343 447 475
2/0-7 str 344 397 518 550
2/0J-CW 337 387 511 539
4/0-7 str 458 531 695 739
250-12 str 514 597 785 835
Table 6.Thermal MVA Ratings of Copper Conductors at Summer Conditions
Conductor 46 kV 69 kV 138 kV 230 kV 345 kV 500 kV
#8 solid 7.3 11.0 22.0 36.7 55.0 79.7
#4 solid 13.1 19.6 39.2 65.3 98.0 142.0
#4A-CW 14.0 21.0 42.1 70.1 105.2 152.4
#3 solid 15.1 22.6 45.2 75.3 112.9 163.7
#3K-CW 15.9 23.8 47.6 79.3 118.9 172.3
#2 solid 17.4 26.2 52.3 87.2 130.9 189.7
#2A-CW 18.6 28.0 55.9 93.2 139.8 202.6
#1 -7 str 20.6 30.8 61.7 102.8 154.2 223.4
#1 F-CW 20.5 30.7 61.4 102.4 153.6 222.6
#1J-CW 20.5 30.7 61.4 102.4 153.6 222.6
1/0-7str 23.7 35.6 71.2 118.7 178.1 258.1
2/0-7str 27.4 41.1 82.2 137.0 205.6 297.9
2/OJ-CW 26.9 40.3 80.6 134.3 201.4 291.9
4/0-7str 36.5 54.7 109.5 182.5 273.7 396.6
250-12str 41.0 61.4 122.9 204.8 307.1 445.1
Thermal Ampacity of Overhead Transmission Line Conductors 99ppMR.
Al I.mP-Y

Transmission 07-010-01
Characteristics of Aluminum and Steel Bare Cable
Table 1.ACSR Conductor Characteristics
Cross
Size Section Weight Rated IPCo
or Outside Square per Breaking Cat.
Name kcmil Stranding Diameter Inches Foot Strength ID PassPort Code
Quail 2/0 6/1 .447 .1221 .1832 5310 3454 TR20
Penguin 4/0 6/1 .563 .1939 .2911 8350 3455 TR40
Ibis 397.5 26/7 .783 .3627 .5466 16,300 3457 TR397
Stilt 715.5 24/7 1.036 .6348 .9210 25,500 3459 TR715
Starling* 715.5 26/7 1.051 .6535 .9848 28,400 3460
Drake* 795 26/7 1.108 .7264 1.094 31,500 3463
Tern 795 45/7 1.063 .6674 .8958 22,100 3461 TR795
Cardinal 954 54/7 1.196 .8462 1.229 33,800 3464
Skylark* 1272 36/1 1.316 1.027 1.288 26,000 3465
Bittern 1272 45/7 1.345 1.068 1.434 34,100 3466
Kiwi* 2167 72/7 1.737 1.776 2.303 49,800 3468
* Seldom used
Table 2.Aluminum Conductor Characteristics
Cross
Size Section Weight Rated IPCo
or Outside Square per Breaking Cat.
Name kcmil Stranding Diameter Inches Foot Strength ID PassPort Code
Ames 1,3 No.2 7 .316 .06084 .0727 2,800 3449
Anaheim1,3 2/0 7 .447 .1221 .1459 5,390 3452
Alliance' 246.9 7 .563 .1939 .2318 8,560 3453 TR246
Arbutus 2 795 37 1.026 .6245 .7464 13,900 3464
Narcissus 2,3 1272 61 1.300 .999 1.194 22,000
1 Denotes All Aluminum Alloy Conductor(AAAC)
2 Denotes All Aluminum Conductor(AAC)
3 Seldom used
—""IDAM
MOPMER Characteristics of Aluminum and Steel Bare Cable
Revised 01/07

07-010-02
Transmission
Table 3.Alumoweld Characteristics
Cross
Section Weight Rated
Outside Square Per Breaking
Size Stranding Diameter Inches Foot Strength
7No 8 7 .385 .09077 .2618 15,930
Not-2/5* 7 .482 .1416 .3396 16,800
*Denotes Alumoweld-Aluminum Conductors(AWAC)
Table 4. HS Steel Characteristics
Cross
Size Section Weight Rated
or Outside Square per Breaking
kcmil Stranding Diameter Inches Foot Strength
5/16 7 .312 .05946 .205 8,000
Table 5. EHS Steel Characteristics
Cross
Size Section Weight Rated IPCo
or Outside Square per Breaking Cat.
kcmil Stranding Diameter Inches Foot Strength ID PassPort Code
5/161 7 .312 .05946 .205 11,200 3666 TR516
3/81,2 7 .360 .07917 .273 15,400 3669 TR38
1/2 2 19 .500 .1492 .5040 26,700 3671
9/16' 19 .666 .1905 .6370 33,700
3/4 2 19 .750 .3358 1.155 58,300 3672
7/8 2 19 .885 .4675 1.581 79,700
12 19 1.0 .5969 2.073 104,500
1 Normally used for shieldwire
2 Normally used for downguy
AM
ID
Characteristics of Aluminum and Steel Bare Cable 99POW R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 08-100-01
Single Porc Insulator String Suspension Assy
10,000 lb Maximum Vertical Load Wood Pole Construction
4816 This assembly can also be used for running
® angles of 30' or less. When corona-free
suspension clamps are used,the maximum
running angle is 25°. Corona-free
suspension clamps are typically used for
230-kV construction in urban areas and for
all construction at 345-kV and above.
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Notet 1 ea CLP SUSP(Type)(Size)
4775 x eat INS SUSP 10 POR 52-3
4816 1 ea CLV-Y BALL 52-3
4775
t See 08-200-02
$ See 06-010-03
Note
O
��R Single Insulator String Suspension Assemblies
Revised 10/03

08-100-02
Transmission
Single Poly Insulator String Suspension Assy
10,000 lb Maximum Vertical Load Wood Pole Construction
® This assembly can also be used for running
angles 30' or less. This assembly may also
be used as a replacement for porcelain or
glass suspension insulator assemblies in
high vandalism areas. Because of the extra
length and the lighter weight, Line Services
should be consulted before this is done.
7R When corona-free suspension clamps are
used, the maximum running angle is 25°.
Note 2 Corona-free suspension clamps are typically
used for 230-kV construction in urban areas
and for all construction at 345-kV and
above.
7 Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note t 1 ea CLP SUS P(Type)(Size)
Note t 1 ea INS SUSP (kV)(Pole) 10K
See 08-200-02
2 See 06-010-04
Note 1
O
Single Insulator String Suspension Assemblies COPOW R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 08-110-01
Single Porc. Insulator String Jumper Assembly
10,000 lb Maximum Vertical Load Wood Pole Construction
4816
® To secure the hold down weight,use two
nuts under the washer,jamming the bolt
threads after tightening. Cut off the excess
threads of the bolt and peen the end to a
dome shape.
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note 1 1 ea CLP SUSP(Type)(Size)
4775 x eaZ INS SUSP 10 POR 52-3
4816 1 ea CLV-Y BALL 52-3
4775 5090 1 ea BLT SHLDR-EYE 3/4x8
5181 1 ea WSHR RND 13/16 HOLE
5269 1 ea SHKL HD 3 5/8x5 7/8
46430 3 ea WT HOLD DOWN 50 LB
5351 2 ea NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
See 08-200-02
2 See 06-010-03
Note 1
5269
5090
46430
EC 5351
5181
`IDAM
R Single Insulator String Jumper Assemblies
Revised 09/08

08-110-02
Transmission
Single Polymer Insulator String Jumper Assembly
10,000 lb Maximum Vertical Load Wood Pole Construction
To secure the hold down weight,use two
nuts under the washer,jamming the bolt
threads after tightening. Cut off the excess
threads of the bolt and peen the end to a
dome shape.
Bill of Materials
Catalog ID Qty Description
Note 1 1 ea CLP SUSP(Type)(Size)
Note 2 x ea INS SUSP(kV)(Pole) 10K
5090 1 ea BLT SHLDR-EYE 3/4x8
5181 1 ea WSHR RND 13/16 HOLE
5269 1 ea SHKL HD 3 5/8x5 7/8
46430 3 ea WT HOLD DOWN 50 LB
5351 2 ea NUT GALV PLAIN 3/4
1 See 08-200-02
2 See 06-010-04
Note 2
Note 1
5269
5090
46430
5351
5181
Single Insulator String Jumper Assemblies p R
Revised 09/08

Transmission Revised 10/03 08-130-01
Single Porc. Insulator String Running Angle Assembly
10,000 lb Maximum Load Wood Pole Construction
4816 This assembly can be used for running
angles greater than 30'but less than 60°.
® When corona-free suspension clamps are
used,the maximum running angle is 50°.
Corona-free suspension clamps are
typically used for 230-kV construction in
urban areas and for all construction at 345-
kV and above.
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note ' 2 ea CLIPSUSP (Type)(Size)
4775 4775 x ea2 INS SUSP 10 POR 52-3
4816 3 ea CLV-Y BALL 52-3
4839 1 ea SCKT CLV HL 52-3
1 ea YOKE STR 40K 181N
See 08-200-02
2 See 06-010-03
4839
O 13605
4816
O O 4102
EIDAHO
P WE R,, Single Insulator String Running Angle Assemblies
AlI—ORPCa 11Y

08-130-02 Revised 10/03
Transmission
Single Porc Insulator String Running Angle Assembly
20,000 lb Maximum Load Wood Pole Construction
4819 This assembly can be used for running angles
greater than 30'but less than 60°. When corona-
free suspension clamps are used,the maximum
running angle is 50°. Corona-free suspension
clamps are typically used for 230-kV
construction in urban areas and for all
construction at 345-kV and above.
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note' 2 ea CLIPSUSP (Tp)(Sz)
4779 x ea2 INS SUSP 10 POR 52-8
4816 2 ea CLV-Y BALL 52-3
C:47791 4819 1 ea CLF-Y BALL 52-8
4844 1 ea SCKT CLV HL 52-8
13604 1 ea YOKE STIR 60K
See 08-200-02
2 See 06-010-03
7-_ 4844
0 13604
4816
0 r 0 4102
r
IDAM
Single Insulator String Running Angle Assemblies "99RP
Al-CORPCa 1V

Transmission Revised 10/03 08-130-03
Single Poly Insulator String Running Angle Assembly
10,000 lb Maximum Load Wood Pole Construction
® This assembly can be used for running angles
greater than 30' but less than 60°.When
corona-free suspension clamps are used, the
maximum running angle is 50°. Corona-free
suspension clamps are typically used for 230-
kV construction in urban areas and for all
construction at 345-kV and above.
Bill of Materials
Note 2
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note ' 2 ea CLP SUSP(Type)(Size)
Note 2 1 ea INS SUSP (kV)(Pole) 10K
4816 2 ea CLV-Y BALL 52-3
4839 1 ea SCKT CLV HL 52-3
13605 1 ea YOKE STR 40K 181N
See 08-200-02
2 See 06-010-04
4839
0 13605
4816
O O 4102
"`IDAHO
POVIIE R,, Single Insulator String Running Angle Assemblies

08-130-04 Revised 10/03
Transmission
Single Poly Insulator String Running Angle Assembly
20,000 lb Maximum Load Wood Pole Construction
® This assembly can be used for running angles
greater than 30'but less than 60°. When corona-
free suspension clamps are used,the maximum
running angle is 50°. Corona-free suspension
clamps are typically used for 230-kV
construction in urban areas and for all
construction at 345-kV and above.
Bill of Materials
Note 2
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note ' 2 ea CLIP SUSP (Type)(Size)
Note 2 1 ea INS SUSP(kV)(Pole)20K
4816 2 ea CLV-Y BALL 52-3
4844 1 ea SCKT CLV HL 52-8
13604 1 ea YOKE STIR 60K
See 08-200-02
2 See 06-010-05
4844
O 13604
4816
O O 4102
Single Insulator String Running Angle Assemblies '`�R,.

Transmission 08-150-01
Single Porc Insulator String Deadend Assembly
with a Bolted Deadend Clamp
10,000 lb Maximum Tension Wood Pole Construction
4846
Note 4
� o O
Note 2
4838
4775
Note 1
0
0
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note 1 2 ea CN PG (Qty) BLT(Size)
Note 2 1 ea DE BLTD AL (Size)
4775 x ea3 INS SUSP 10 POR 52-3
4838 1 ea SHKL AN 5/8x2.75 30K
4846 1 ea EYE OVAL BALL 52-3
Note 4 1 ea SCKT EYE HL (Size)
1 See 08-200-06
2 See 08-200-03
3 See 06-010-03
4 See Materials Manual, 2-311
COR�R Single Insulator String Deadend Assemblies
Revised 10/03

08-150-02
Transmission
Single Porc Insulator String Deadend Assembly
with a Bolted Deadend Clamp
15,000 lb Maximum Tension Wood Pole Construction
4846
Note 4
� o 0
Note 2
4838
4777
Note 1
0
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note 1 2 ea CN PG (Qty) BLT(Size)
Note 2 1 ea DE BLTD AL (Size)
4777 x ea3 INS SUSP 15 POR 52-5
4838 1 ea SHKL AN 5/8x2.75 30K
4846 1 ea EYE OVAL BALL 52-3
Note 4 1 ea SCKT EYE HL (Size)
1 See 08-200-06
2 See 08-200-03
3 See 06-010-03
4 See Materials Manual, 2-311
IDAW
Single Insulator String Deadend Assemblies 111199POWER
Revised 10/03

Transmission 08-150-03
Single Porc Insulator String Deadend Assembly
with a Bolted Deadend Clamp
20,000 lb Maximum Tension Wood Pole Construction
4847
Note 4
� o O
Note 2
4828
4779
Note 1
0
0
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note 1 2 ea CN PG (Qty) BLT(Size)
Note 2 1 ea DE BLTD AL (Size)
4779 x ea3 INS SUSP 20 POR 52-8
4828 1 ea SHKL AN 3/4x3.50 60K
4847 1 ea EYE OVAL BALL 52-8
Note 4 1 ea SCKT EYE HL (Size)
1 See 08-200-06
2 See 08-200-03
3 See 06-010-03
4 See Materials Manual, 2-311
COR�R Single Insulator String Deadend Assemblies
Revised 10/03

08-150-04
Transmission
Single Poly Insulator String Deadend Assembly
with a Bolted Deadend Clamp
10,000 lb Maximum Tension Wood Pole Construction
Note 4
� o
Note 2 Note 3
Note 1
0
0
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note 1 2 ea CN PG (Qty) BLT(Size)
Note 2 1 ea DE BLTD AL (Size)
Note 3 x ea INS SUSP (kV)(Pole) 10K
Note 4 1 ea SCKT EYE HL (Size)
1 See 08-200-06
2 See 08-200-03
3 See 06-010-04
4 See Materials Manual, 2-311
IDAW
Single Insulator String Deadend Assemblies 111199POWER
Revised 10/03

Transmission 08-150-05
Single Poly Insulator String Deadend Assembly
with a Bolted Deadend Clamp
20,000 lb Maximum Tension Wood Pole Construction
Note 4
� o
Note 2
Note 3
Nrc �'
0
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note 1 2 ea CN PG (Qty) BLT(Size)
Note 2 1 ea DE BLTD AL (Size)
Note 3 1 ea INS SUSP (kV)(Pole)20K
Note 4 1 ea SCKT EYE HL (Size)
1 See 08-200-06
2 See 08-200-03
3 See 06-010-05
4 See Materials Manual, 2-311
COR�R Single Insulator String Deadend Assemblies
Revised 10/03

08-150-06
Transmission
Single Porc Insulator String Deadend Assembly
with a Compression Deadend Clamp
10,000 lb Maximum Tension Wood Pole Construction
4846
4839
0 0
Note 1 4838
4775
Bill of Materials
Catalog ID Qty Description
Note 1 1 ea DE CMPR AL (Size)
4775 x ea2 INS SUSP 10 POR 52-3
4838 1 ea SHKL AN 5/8x2.75 30K
4839 1 ea SCKT CLV HL 52-3
4846 1 ea EYE OVAL BALL 52-3
1 See 08-200-04
2 See 06-010-03
IDAW
Single Insulator String Deadend Assemblies 111199POWER
Revised 10/03

Transmission Revised 10/03 08-150-07
Single Porc. Insulator String Deadend Assembly
with a Compression Deadend Clamp
15,000 lb Maximum Tension Wood Pole Construction
4846
4839
0 0
Note 1 4838
4777
Bill of Materials
Catalog ID Qty Description
Note 1 ea DE CMPR AL(Size)
4777 x ea2 INS SUSP 10 POR 52-5
4838 1 ea SHKL AN 5/8x2.75 30K
4839 1 ea SCKT CLV HL 52-3
4846 1 ea EYE OVAL BALL 52-3
1 See 08-200-04
2 See 06-010-03
RNPOW R� Single Insulator String Deadend Assemblies
AlIDACORPCa 11Y

08-150-08
Transmission
Single Porc Insulator String Deadend Assembly
with a Compression Deadend Clamp
20,000 lb Maximum Tension Wood Pole Construction
4847
4844
0 0
Note 1
4828
4779
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note 1 1 ea DE CMPR AL(Size)
4779 x eaZ INS SUSP 10 POR 52-8
4828 1 ea SHKL AN 3/4x3.50 60K
4844 1 ea SCKT CLV HL 52-8
4847 1 ea EYE OVAL BALL 52-8
1 See 08-200-04
2 See 06-010-03
DAHO
Single Insulator String Deadend Assemblies 11111�130W R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 08-150-09
Single Poly Insulator String Deadend Assembly
with a Compression Deadend Clamp
10,000 lb Maximum Tension Wood Pole Construction
4839
o
Note 1 Note 2
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note 1 1 ea DE CMPR AL (Size)
Note 2 1 ea INS SUSP (kV)(Pole) 10K
4839 1 ea SCKT CLV HL 52-3
1 See 08-200-04
2 See 06-010-04
CORAM
R Single Insulator String Deadend Assemblies
Revised 10/03

08-150-10
Transmission
Single Poly Insulator String Deadend Assembly
with a Compression Deadend Clamp
20,000 lb Maximum Tension Wood Pole Construction
4844
o
Note 1 Note 2
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note 1 1 ea DE CMPR AL (Size)
Note 2 1 ea INS SUSP (kV)(Pole) 10K
4844 1 ea SCKT CLV HL 52-8
1 See 08-200-04
2 See 06-010-04
IDAW
Single Insulator String Deadend Assemblies 111199POWER
Revised 10/03

Transmission 08-150-11
Single Porc Insulator String Deadend Assembly
with an Automatic Deadend Clamp
10,000 lb Maximum Tension Wood Pole Construction
4846
Note 4
00 0
Note 2:/ L) U U
4838
4775
Note 1
0 �0
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note 1 2 ea CN PG (Qty)BLT(Size)
Note 2 1 ea DE AUT AL(Size)
4775 x ea3 INS SUSP 10 POR 52-3
4838 1 ea SHKL AN 5/8x2.75 30K
4846 1 ea EYE OVAL BALL 52-3
Note 4 1 ea SCKT EYE HL(Size)
1 See 08-200-06
2 See 08-200-05
3 See 06-010-03
4 See Materials Manual, 2-311
�PMER Single Insulator String Deadend Assemblies
Revised 10/03

08-150-12
Transmission
Single Poly Insulator String Deadend Assembly
with an Automatic Deadend Clamp
10,000 lb Maximum Tension Wood Pole Construction
Note 4
00
Note 2 Note 3
Note 1
Bill of Materials
Cat. ID Qty Description
Note 1 2 ea CN PG (Qty)BLT(Size)
Note 2 1 ea DE AUT AL(Size)
Note 3 x ea INS SUSP (kV)(Pole) 10K
Note 4 1 ea SCKT EYE HL(Size)
1 See 08-200-06
2 See 08-200-05
3 See 06-010-04
4 See Materials Manual, 2-311
DAHO
Single Insulator String Deadend Assemblies 11111�130W R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 08-170-01
Shield Wire Automatic Deadend Assembly
4060
5308
5312
o
4060
5361 O
5308 5119
5312 ® ° 5342
o ( o
0 0 4-Way
Pole Band
(Alternate)
4845
Pole Eyes
(Preferred)
Automatic Deadend Assembly Bill of Materials Application
The two assemblies shown above can be Cat ID Oty Description
used to deadend 5/16" or 3/8" shield wire on Pole Eye
a wood pole. Pole eyes are preferred over 4060 1 ea CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0
4845 1 ea CLV THMB 3/4" BNK
pole bands due to a labor cost savings. 5308 1 ea GRIP GUY AUTO 5/16"RL
Maximum design tension is 5,900 lbs. using 5312 1 ea GRIP GUY AUTO 3/8" RL
a 3/8" EHS down guy at a 1:1 slope. For Pole Band
other configurations, consult with Line 4060 1 ea CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0
Services. 5119 1 ea BLT GALV MCH 3/4"X 3"
5308 1 ea GRIP GUY AUTO 5/16"RL
5312 1 ea GRIP GUY AUTO 3/8" RL
PassPort Codes 5342 1 ea NUT MF 3/4"
5361 1 ea SHV POLE BND 3/4"
Pole Eye Pole Band
TSWDEPE TSWDEPB
TSW DE38 TSW DE38
TSWDE516 TSWDE516
�PMER Shield Wire Assemblies
Revised 10/03

08-170-02
Transmission
Shield Wire Bolted Deadend Assembly
4060
4146
4838
Bolted Deadend Assembly Bill of Materials
This assembly is an alternative to the Cat ID Qty Description
preferred automatic deadend assembly. 4060 1 ea CN PG 1 BLT 6-2/0
Maximum design tension is 5,900 lbs.using 4146 1 ea DE BLTD FE 0.2-0.46
a 3/8" EHS down guy at a 1:1 slope. For 4838 1 ea SHKL AN 5/8"X 2.75"30K
other configurations, consult with Line
Services. PassPort Codes
NONE
IDAHO
Shield Wire Assemblies WNPOW R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 08-170-03
Shield Wire Running Angle Assembly
with Pole Eye Construction
4113 30°Max
12� � 0
0 0
4838
Running Angle Assembly with Pole Bill of Materials
Eye Construction Cat ID Qty Description
This assembly is used only on a running 4115 1 ea CLP SUSP FE 0.3-0.74838 1 ea SHKL AN 5/8"X 2.75"30K
angle structure with 5/16" or 3/8" EHS
shield wire such as the CS or the TAS
structures. The assembly can be used for Passport Code
running angles less than 30°. Maximum TSWAPE
horizontal resultant force is 5,900 lbs. using
a 3/8" EHS down guy at a 1:1 slope. For
other configurations, consult with Line
Services.
QIDAHO
QPOW R Shield Wire Assemblies
Revised 10/03

08-170-04
Transmission
Shield Wire Running Angle Assembly
with Pole Eye and Yoke Construction
o
4113 4838
O
13605
O O
4825 O O
0 0
Running Angle Assembly with Pole Bill of Materials
Eye and Yoke Construction Cat ID Qty Description
This assemblyis used only on a running 4115 2 ea CLIP SUSP FE 0.3-0.7
y g 4816 2 ea CLV-Y Ball 52-3
angle structure with 5/16" or 3/8" EHS 4838 2 ea SHKL AN 5/8"X 2.75"30K
shield wire such as the CS or the TAS 4856 2 ea SCKT EYE 3/4"W 52-3
structures. The assembly can be used for 13605 1 ea YOKE STR 18"40K
running angles greater than 300 but less than
60°. Maximum horizontal resultant force is PassPort Code
5,900 lbs. using a 3/8" EHS down guy at a
1:1 slope. For other configurations, consult TSWHAPE
with Line Services.
Shield Wire Assemblies WNPOW R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 08-170-05
Shield Wire Running Angle Assembly
with 4-Way Pole Band Construction
13605
O
4838
4115 0
4816
4856
Running Angle Assembly with Bill of Materials
4-Way Pole Band Construction Cat ID Qty Description
4115 2 ea CLP SUSP FE 0.3-0.7
This assembly can be used for running 4816 2 ea CLV-Y BALL 52-3
angles greater than 30'but less than 60°. 4838 2 ea SHKL AN 5/8"X 2.75"30K
Maximum horizontal resultant force is 5,900 4856 2 ea SCKT EYE 3/4"W 52-3
lbs. using a 3/8" EHS down guy at a 1:1 13605 1 ea YOKE STR 18"40K
slope. For other configurations, consult with
Line Services. PassPort Code
TSW HAPE
�PMER Shield Wire Assemblies
Revised 10/03

Transmission Revised 10/21 08-200-01
Conductor Clamps, PG Connectors, & Splices
Line Post Insulator Conductor Clamps
Clamps are used with both vertically and F 9�c
horizontally mounted clamp top line post
insulators.
59727 CLP LP INS 0.23—0.84 TCP023 Ames, Raven,Anaheim, Quail,
Alliance, Penguin, Raven (AR)
4802 CLP LP INS 0.70—1.06 TCP070 Canna, Ibis,Arbutus,Anaheim (AR), Quail (AR),
Alliance(AR), & Penguin (AR)
4808 CLP LP INS 1.00—1.50 TCP100 Stilt, Starling, Drake,Tern, Magnolia,
Cardinal, Skylark, Bittern, Narcissus, Ibis
(AR), &Canna (AR)
4809 CLP LP INS 1.50—2.00 TCP150 Kiwi, Stilt(AR), Starling (AR), Drake (AR),
Tern (AR), Cardinal (AR),Arbutus (AR)
13772 CLP INS BZ 0.25—0.57 TCP035B #1 CU
40267 CLP LP INS 1.90—2.30 TCP190 Bittern (AR)
(AR)—Fits conductor with armor rod, not included.
Clamp Top Adapters & Reinforcing
Links
Clamp top adapters are used with polymer
insulators to enable the use of conductor clamps.
Reinforcing links are bolted onto the end of O O
138—kV polymer horizontal-post insulators with 7 ; 1� Y
aluminum end fittings to prevent the clevis from
through the hole in the fitting. Reinforcing Vertical Adapter
wearing g g• Link
Cat.ID Short Description PassPort Code O
4805 ADPTR CLT V138KV INS None
4806 ADPTR CLT H138KV INS TCTA O
4807 LINK RNFG HRZ PLMR None O
PO
Horizontal Adapter
IMppR,: Conductor Clamps, Connectors, & Splices

08-200-02 Revised 02/06
Transmission
Suspension Clamps
A suspension clamp, together with a matching socket
eye connector,make up an assembly that is normally
used for suspending ACSR, aluminum, and all-
aluminum alloy, and cooper conductors beneath 0 0
insulators. It is also used in combination with a yoke
plate for running angle applications.
The corona free aluminum suspension clamp is used
on 230-kV lines located in urban areas, and on all
construction 345-kV and above. The clamp is purchased preassembled with its associated socket eye
connector. For bundled construction,the socket eye connector is replaced with Y-clevis fittings and a yoke
plate.
Aluminum Suspension Clamps—Maximum take-off angle=20'
Cat. ID Short Description PassPort Code Conductor
4099 CLP SUSP AL 0.40-0.85 TCS397 Ibis, Canna, Raven (AR), Quail (AR),
&Anaheim (AR)
4101 CLP SUSP AL 0.70-1.17 TCS715 Stilt, Starling, Drake,Tern,Arbutus,
& Magnolia
4101 CLP SUSP AL 0.70-1.17 TCS246A Alliance(AR), Penguin (AR)
4102 CLP SUSP AL 1.00-1.47 TCS397A Cardinal, Skylark, Bittern, Narcissus, Ibis-(AR),
Canna (AR)
4106 CLP SUSP AL 1.25-2.25 TCS1272A Bittern (AR)
4108 CLP SUSP AL 1.25-1.82 TCS715A Kiwi, Lapwing, Stilt(AR), Starling (AR), Drake(AR),
Tern (AR), Cardinal (AR),Arbutus (AR)
(AR)—Fits conductor with armor rod, not included.
Corona Free Aluminum Suspension Clamps—Maximum take-off angle=15'
Cat. ID Short Description PassPort Code Conductor
4109 CLP SUSP AL HV 1-1.1 None Stilt, Starling,Tern, &Arbutus
4110 CLP SUSP HV 1.10-1.2 None Drake, Cardinal, &Magnolia
4111 CLP SUSP HV 1.29-1.4 None Skylark, Bittern, & Narcissus
44237 CLP SUSP HV 1.43-1.63 TCS1590CF Lapwing
4112 CLP SUSP HV 1.64-1.8 None Kiwi, Stilt(AR), Starling (AR), Drake (AR),
Tern (AR),&Arbutus(AR)
23701 CLP SUSP HV 1.80-2.13 None Bittern (AR)
(AR)—Fits conductor with armor rod, not included.
Bronze Suspension Clamps—Maximum take-off angle= 15°
Cat. ID Short Description PassPort Code Conductor
14073 CLP SUSP BZ 0.2-0.6 TCS10CU 250 cu
4117 CLP SUSP BZ 0.625-1.0 TCS20CU 500 cu, 250 cu (AR)
(AR)—Fits conductor with armor rod, not included.
References
08-100 Insulator String Suspension Assemblies
11-010 Armor Rod Information
Conductor Clamps, Connectors, & Splices "`�R„

Transmission Revised 02/06 08-200-03
Suspension Clamps continued
The ferrous suspension clamp is generally used to
support galvanized steel shield wire. It is connected to
a shield wire bracket assembly on tangent structures and EO 0
to a triangular yoke plate on running angle structures.
Armor rod protection is used on the shield wire wherever
dampers are not installed.
Cat. ID Short Description PassPort Code Conductor
4113 CLIP SUSP FIE 0.2-0.46 TCS516 5/16"
TCS38 3/8"
TCS2 7/16"
4115 CLP SUSP FE 0.3-0.7 TCS3 112", 5/8", 5/16" (AR), 3/8" (AR), 7/16"(AR)
(AR)—Fits conductor with armor rod, not included.
References
08-100 Insulator String Suspension Assemblies
11-010 Armor Rod Information
01-051 138 kV TVS Structure
08-174 Shield Wire Running Angle Structure
08-175 Shield Wire Running Angle Structure with
Yoke Plate
Aluminum Bolted Quadrant Deadend Clamps O
Aluminum bolted quadrant strain clamps are used to deadend
aluminum transmission line conductors on lines operating at
161-kV and below.At 230-kV and above, and on larger
conductors,both bolted and compression clamps are used.
Note:All sizes of self damping conductor require the use of
compression deadend clamps.
Cat. ID Short Description PassPort Code
Conductor
4150 DE BLTD AL 0.2-0.57 TD246B Raven, Quail, Penguin, Ames,Anaheim,
&Alliance
4151 DE BLTD AL 0.6-0.9 TD397B Ibis&Canna
4153 DE BLTD AL 1.3-1.8 None Bittern &Kiw
"`�R� Conductor Clamps, Connectors, & Splices

08-200-04 Revised 02/06
Transmission
Aluminum Compression Deadend Clamps
Aluminum compression deadends are used with O
aluminum transmission conductors sized 715.5
through 2167 on lines operating at 230-kV and
above,as well as in areas sensitive to corona
caused noise or RIV.All sizes of self-damping
conductor require the use of compression
deadends.
All of the deadends except the Ibis self-damping
size are of the "one-die" design. On ACSR
conductor,a core gripping unit secures the steel
core wires without the need for a separate field
compression operation. These units come
complete with the deadend,core grip unit
(if required), and terminal connector.
The 397.5 Ibis self-damping deadend requires the use of a separate steel eye,which is field compressed
onto the steel core wires, and an aluminum body,which is field compressed over the steel eye and the
aluminum conductor. Two different dies are required for this operation.
Cat. ID Short Description Die PassPort Code Conductor
4182 DE CMPR AL IBIS/SD 10SH + 20AH None Ibis/SD
4183 DE CMPR AL 397 26/7 9CD TD397C Ibis
4184 DE CMPR AL 715 24/7 11 CD TD715C Stilt
4185 DE CMPR AL 715 26/7 12CD None Starling
4186 DE CMPR AL 795 26/7 12CD None Drake
4187 DE CMPR AL 795 45/7 12CD TD795ACR Tern
4188 DE CMPR AL TERN/SD 11 CD None Tern/SD
4189 DE CMPR AL 954 54/7 13CD None Cardinal
4190 DE CMPR AL 1272 36/1 14CD None Skylark
4191 DE CMPR AL 1272 45/7 15CD None Bittern
4192 DE CMPR BITTERN/SD 14CD None Bittern/SD
4193 DE CMPR AL 2167 72/7 19CD None Kiwi
4194 DE CMPR AL 795 37 11 CD TD795AA Arbutus
Conductor Clamps, Connectors, & Splices '`per RR.

Transmission Revised 02/06 08-200-05
Ferrous Bolted Quadrant Deadend Clamps
Ferrous bolted quadrant deadend clamps are used as an alternative to the
preferred automatic deadend clamp assembly to deadend shield wire on
transmission structures.
Cat. ID Short Description PassPort Code Wire Size
4146 DE BLTD FE 0.2-0.4 None 5/16 HS, 5/16 EHS, 3/8 HS, 3/8 EHS,
7/16-HS, 7/16 EHS
Reference
08-170 Shield Wire Bolted Deadend Assembly
Automatic Deadend Clamps
00
Automatic deadend clamps are used on aluminum and copper conductor sizes 4/0 Conductor DE Clamp
and below as well as on 5/16" and 3/8" steel shield wire.
Conductor Deadends
Cat. ID Short Description PassPort Code Conductor Shield Wire DE Clamp
4155 DE AUT AL 2 Ames
4157 DE AUT AL 2/0 TD20 Anaheim, Quail
4158 DE AUT AL 4/0 TD246A Alliance, Penguin
4164 DE AUT CU 4 #4 Cu
4165 DE AUT CU 2 #2 Cu
4166 DE AUT CU 1 TDC1 #1 Cu
4167 DE AUT CU 1/0 1/0 Cu
4168 DE AUT CU 2/0 TDC20 2/0 Cu
4169 DE AUT CU 4/0 4/0 Cu
Shield Wire Deadends
Cat. ID Short Description PassPort Code Conductor
5308 GRIP GUY AUT5/16 RL TSWDE516 5/16 EHS
5312 GRIP GUY AUT 3/8 RL TSWDE38 3/8 EHS
IMppR,: Conductor Clamps, Connectors, & Splices

08-200-06 Revised 02/06
Transmission
Parallel Groove Connectors
Parallel groove connectors are used to make non-tension
connections. Compression jumper splices are to be used on
all new 230-kV lines located in urban areas and on all
transmission lines rated 345-kV and above.
000
One Bolt Connector
Conductor Size
Cat. ID Short Description PassPort Code 1st Side 2nd Side
4061 CN PG 1 BLT 336&2/0 None ACSR 4/0 ACSR#2-2/0
AAAC 246.9 AAAC
#2-2/0
Two Bolt Connector
Conductor Size
Cat. ID Short Description PassPort Code 1st Side 2nd Side
4063 CN PG 2 BLT 2-3/0 TCPG20 ACSR#2-2/0 ACSR#2-2/0
AAC#2-2/0 AAC#2-2/0
4066 CN PG 2 BLT 795&336 None ACSR 397.5-795 ACSR 4/0
AAC 795 AAAC
246.9
AAC
397.5
Three Bolt Connector
Conductor Size
Cat. ID Short Description PassPort Code 1st Side 2nd Side
4064 CN PG 3 BLT 3/0-336 TCPG246 ACSR 4/0 ACSR 4/0
AAAC 246.9 AAAC 246.9
AAC 397.5 AAC 397.5
4067 CN PG 3 BLT 795-795 TCPG397 ACSR 397.5-795 ACSR 397.5-795
TCPG715 AAC 795 AAC795
Conductor Clamps, Connectors, & Splices "`�R„

Transmission Revised 02/06 08-200-07
Compression Jumper Splices
Compression jumper splices are used to make non-tension connections at transmission deadend
structures. They are required on all conductor sized 954 kcm and larger, all new transmission lines rated
345-kV and above, and on new 230-kV lines located in urban areas.
Cat. ID Short Description Die PassPort Code Conductor
4196 SPL CMPR JMPR954 MAG 12CD None Magnolia
4195 SPL CMPR JMPR954 CAR 13CD None Cardinal
4198 SPL CMPR JMPR1272NAR 14CD None Narcissus
4197 SPL CMPR JMPR1272SKY 14CD None Skylark
4199 SPL CMPR JMPR1272BIT 15CD None Bittern
4200 SPL CMPR JMPR2167KIW 19CD None Kiwi
Aluminum Automatic Splices
Aluminum automatic splices are used for tension splices on aluminum, aluminum alloy, and ACSR
conductors. They are not to be used in slack span installations.
Cat. ID Short Description Conductor PassPort Code Color Code
4355 SPL AUT 4 ACSR Swanate None Orange
4356 SPL AUT 2 AA&ACSR Ames, Sparate None Red
4357 SPL AUT 1/0 ACSR Raven None Yellow
4358 SPL AUT 2/0 AA&ACSR Anaheim, Quail TSA20 Gray
4359 SPL AUT 4/0 ACSR Alliance, Penguin TSA246 Pink
4361 SPL AUT 397.5 ACSR Ibis ' None None
4362 SPL AUT 795 AAC Arbutus, Stilt 2 TSA795 Orange
1 The rated maximum design tension on 397.5 ACSR"Ibis"for splices purchased after January 1995 is 10,000 lbs.
Earlier splices were rated at 5,000 Ibs maximum design tension.
2 For a rated maximum design tension of 6,100 Ibs on 715.5 ACSR"Stilt'. Only the Fargo, catalog number
GL-1385A, splice is to be used with "Stilt'conductor.
IMppR,: Conductor Clamps, Connectors, & Splices

08-200-08 Revised 02/06
Transmission
Compression Conductor Splices
Aluminum alloy compression splices are used for full tension splices in aluminum, aluminum alloy,
ACSR, and ACSR/SD conductors 715.5 KCM and larger and all types of conductors 954 and larger. They
are also used as a full tension splice for galvanized steel and alumoweld strand shield wire. The splice
used with Ibis/SD conductor is a two piece splice.
Aluminum Compression Conductor Splices
Cat. ID Short Description Die PassPort Code Conductor
AAC
4313 SPL CMPR AL 795 AL 11 CD TSC795 Arbutus
4318 SPL CMPR AL 1272 36/1 14CD Narcissus
ACSR
4309 SPL CMPR AL 397 26/7 9CD TSC397 Ibis
4310 SPL CMPR AL IBIS/SD 10SH +20AH Ibis SD
4311 SPL CMPR AL 715 26/7 12CD Starling
4312 SPL CMPR AL 715 24/7 11 CD TSC715 Stilt
4314 SPL CMPR AL 795 45/7 12CD Tern
4315 SPL CMPR AL TERN/SD 11 CD Tern SD
4316 SPL CMPR AL 795 26/7 12CD Drake
4317 SPL CMPR AL 954 54/7 13CD Cardinal
4318 SPL CMPR AL 1272 36/1 14CD Skylark
4319 SPL CMPR AL 1272 45/7 15CD Bittern
4320 SPL CMPR AL BITTERN/SD 14CD Bittern SD
4321 SPL CMPR AL2167 72/7 19CD Kiwi
Galvanized Steel Strand Compression Conductor Splices
Cat. ID Short Description Die PassPort Code Wire Size
4303 SPL CMPR AL 5/16 STIR 12SH TSC516 5/16 HS, 5/16 EHS
4305 SPL CMPR AL 3/8 STIR 14SH TSC38 3/8 HS, 3/8 EHS
4306 SPL CMPR AL 1/2 STIR 18SH None 1/2HS, 1/2 EHS
Alumoweld Strand Compression Conductor Splices
Cat. ID Short Description Die PassPort Code Wire Size
4304 SPL CMPR AL 7 NO 8AW 14SH 7 No. 8
Conductor Clamps, Connectors, & Splices "`�R„

Transmission 09-100-01
Transmission Line Airbreak Switch Numbering
General Information The following table illustrates the numerical
voltage code format to be used on
This document details the numbering of transmission line airbreak switches.
airbreak switches on transmission lines for
energy dispatch operations and W Code Range
identification and SCADA control.
46 051 TO-059T9
69 061 TO-089T9
Identifications shall be uniquely assigned to 138 101 TO-129T9
each switch on a line and will be shown on 161 171 TO-189T9
the transmission switching maps and the 230 201 TO-229T9
system single line diagram. Switch
identification shall consist of a location
code and a numerical voltage format on the Location Code Format
pole using 2" adhesive-backed numbers and
letters as seen on Material Manual page In addition to the numerical format, each
16-102. switch shall be identified with a two-part
location code, each part consisting of 4 letters.
The first part identifies the switch location;
Numerical Voltage Format the second identifies the section of line to be
switched.
A five character, alphanumeric format shall
identify the various switches and their Example
respective voltage levels.The format shall There are 3 airbreak switches located at
be coded as follows: Rock Creek Junction on the Buhl-Filer-Twin
Falls 46-kV line.An operator wishes to
1 st 3 digits - Identify the various kV open the Rock Creek Tap.
voltage levels used on the
Idaho Power Company Switch Location: Rock Creek Junction
system. Line Section Dropped: Rock Creek Tap
4th digit - "T"to designate an in-line Location Code: RKJN-ROCK
airbreak switch.
5th digit - 0 through 9
9 9POW R Transmission Line Airbreak Switch Numbering
Revised 10/03

Transmission 09-500-01
In-Line Airbreak Switch Steel Standing Mat
Application
The in-line air break switch, steel standing mat or platform is an Idaho Power Company, shop
fabricated,personnel ground mat which is to be installed at all locations where in-line air break
switches have been installed on transmission poles. The ground mat is installed adjacent to the
operating mechanism to provide safe step and touch potentials in the event of a fault while
personnel are operating the switch. The platform is to be fabricated as shown below and installed
as suggested on page 02-005-01, 02-006-01, and 02-010-01.
1
r
Catalog ID
5377
Notes:
1. These platforms are fabricated in Idaho Power Company shops.
2. Each platform must be painted with galvanox where necessary.
3. The approximate total weight of the platform is 220 lbs.
4. The standing platform is constructed of 14-gauge, galvanized, 2"channel, steel 'Grip-Strut.'
5. The 'Grip-Strut' is mounted onto two Tee beams(2"x 2"x 1/4").
6. All steel members of the platform are welded together.
7. A 2/0 copper ground wire is fastened to the bottom of the platform using TLS lugs. See Cat. ID 3876.
Leave a 7' pigtail at the pole edge of the platform and a 13' pigtail at the opposite edge.
`ppMR Airbreak Switch Steel Standing Mat
Revised 10/03

09-500-02
Transmission
Details. (See section 00-010 for an explanation of special drawing conventions used in the
illustrations within this document.)
4' 8-1/4"
18-3/4" 18-3/4" —j— 18-3/4"
Note:The
vertical
position of
the pole will 1' T Beam
vary with the - A_ 2"x2"x1/4"
type of switch
installed. _J Steel"Grip-Strut"
14 Guage
2"Channel
�I 6"
6'
1 1/2"x1 1/2"x3/16"x 20"Angle
Top 8"Painted with
Galvanox-4 Req.
1'
77 6"
13'Pigtail
6"Hole 18"Deep
-4-Required
7'Pigtail Use Sackcrete
PassPort Code
(TSSM)
Grip-Strut
Ground Wire Attachment Use 3 TLS Lugs
(Viewed from the bottom) (3876)
Airbreak Switch Steel Standing Mat ' O R
Revised 10/03

Transmission Revised 11/03 10-0550-01
Vibration Dampers
General Application
When a comparatively steady wind blows across Conductor dampers are used to reduce and thus
a conductor under tension,vortex shedding control wind-induced aeolian vibration in a
creates an alternating pressure unbalance above conductor. In areas subject to vibration-
and below the conductor,thus causing vibration. producing winds, span-end damping can
The frequency of vibration increases with dissipate the wind energy to a very low level.
increasing wind velocity and with decreasing Without the damping protection,fatigue damage
conductor diameters. to the conductor or supporting hardware could
result.
The self-damping characteristics ofACSR
increase as the percentage of steel increases and In new, single-pole transmission construction,
are greater than that of the same-size all- the use of the tables of standard maximum
aluminum conductor,regardless of type. The design tensions found on page 10-500-02 will
larger the conductor the greater it's self- eliminate the need for vibration dampers.When
damping.Also,the self-damping characteristics dampers are required for new construction,
of any concentrically stranded conductor armor rod reinforcement will not be used.
decrease as the strands become laced tighter Maintenance replacement of dampers on
together with increasing conductor tension. existing lines that have dampers over armor rod
should be replaced with the same type and
The amount of energy imparted to a conductor manufacturer as the original and at the same
varies directly with the span length.The longer conductor spacing.
the span the more wind-induced energy the
traveling wave picks up. Approved Dampers
Tower type has some minor effect on vibration Dampers supplied by Alcoa and Dulmison are
characteristics of a line.Wood structures tend to approved for use on the Idaho Power system and
suppress conductor vibration. Metal structures, are illustrated on the following page for
because of their susceptibility to vibration,tend identification purposes. Dampers from these two
to complement any conductor vibration. Higher manufacturers may be applied interchangeably
towers, generally have a greater exposure to because both use the same spacing criteria. This
vibration-producing winds. is not true of units from other manufacturers
where design differences exist. Fargo dampers
For adequate protection of conductors from (Cat. ID 5296)were used on the Kinport-Borah
vibration, dampers must be capable of reducing 345-kV line#804, and replacement Fargo
the amount of vibration to less than 10 mils, dampers are stocked for that line only. Specific
measured 3-1/2" from the edge of the conductor information on the approved dampers may be
clamp. found in section 06-451 of the Materials
Manual.
ROOMER, Vibration Dampers

1 0-050-02 Revised 09/19
Transmission
7:z 7:D C!7� a
t - 1
Alcoa Dulmison Fargo
Approved Vibration Dampers
Cat. ID Conductor Range Manufacturer Part No. For Conductors
Alcoa Dampers
5282 0.27" - 0.36" Alcoa 1701-2 2 AL, 2/0 ACSR, 3/8" EHS
none 0.361" - 0.460" Alcoa 1701-3
5294 0.361" - 0.460" Alcoa 1703-3 2/0 AL
5288 0.461" - 0.570" Alcoa 1703-4 4/0 AL
5290 0.46" - 0.57" Alcoa 1702-4 1/2" EHS
39930 0.57" - 0.67" Alcoa 1702-5 5/8" EHS
none 0.676" - 0.770" Alcoa 1704-6*
5284 0.771" - 0.870" Alcoa 1705-7* 397 ACSR
5287 0.971" - 1.09" Alcoa 1706-9 795 AL, 715 ACSR, 795 ACSR
5286 1.09" - 1.21" Alcoa 1706-10 954 ACSR
5289 1.21" - 1.33" Alcoa 1707-11 1272 ACSR(Skylark)
5297 1.33" - 1.486" Alcoa 1707-13 1272 ACSR(Bittern)
none 1.487" - 1.643" Alcoa 1708-14
5291 1.644" - 1.780" Alcoa 1706-15 715 and 795 ACSR w/Armor Rod
5298 1.64" - 1.78" Alcoa 1708-15 Rod 2167 ACSR(Kiwi)
Dulmison Dampers
5283 0.25" - 0.37" Dulmison DB0506 4 ACSR
5302 0.371" - 0.490" Dulmison DB0509 2/0 AL
5303 0.711" - 0.860" Dulmison DB0518 397 ACSR
5295 0.951" - 1.090" Dulmison DB224 715 ACSR, 795 ACSR
28675 1.331" - 1.486" Dulmison DB0334 715 ACSR, 795 ACSR
Fargo Dampers
none 0.266" - 0.472" Fargo 60715-10G
none 0.434" - 0.865" Fargo 60715-11 G
none 0.710" - 1.110" Fargo 60715-12
5296 0.906" - 1.410" Fargo 60715-13 1272 ACSR
none 1.260" - 1.770" Fargo 60715-14
none 0.660" - 2.160" Fargo 60715-15
* Add suffix"HW for use at 345-kV and above
Damper Placement the damper proposal data forms, provides
recommended damper placement. The forms
The appropriate manufacturer, when are shown on the next 2 pages
supplied with properly filled out copies of
Vibration Dampers •` R,,

Transmission Revised 11/03 1 0-050-03
ALCOA CONDUCTOR PRODUCTS COMPANY
Request for Vibration Information
Originator Date
Utility/Consultant Idaho Power Company
Project Name & Location of Line
Line Voltage Number of Conductors/Phase
If 2/C Bundle Horizontal
(Check One) Vertical If other than 18" spacing, specify in.
For each ruling or deadend span, provide the following information:
1. Conductor Size, Stranding & Type
2. Average Annual Minimum Temperature (AAMT) for Line -20°F
(select AAMT from map - see reverse side)
3. Maximum Design Tension
4. Loading: NESC Heavy (1/2" ice, 4#wind + .30K at 0°F)
(Check One) Medium (1/4" ice, 4#wind + .20K at 15°F)
Light (0 ice, 9#wind + .05K at 30°F)
Other: ice, wind, at OF.
5. Armor Rods AGS None Specify Cat. ID. if known
6. Span (Ruling; if
Deadend-Deadend,
Identify With *)
Initial Tension at
AAMT (bare wire)
Final Tension at
60OF
Maximum Span
7. Terrain Features (flat, rolling mountains). Specify all Lake or River Crossings
8. Comments
�POMR. Vibration Dampers

1 0-050-04 Revised 11/03
Transmission
FARGO MANUFACTURING COMPANY, INC
4R Damper Proposal Data
Company: Idaho Power Company Date:
Project: File No.:
CONDUCTOR:
Size, Stranding & Type
Complete Conductor Diameter in. Weight Ibs/ft
Unloaded Tension at the Average Temperature of the Coldest Month:
Initial Ibs Final Ibs Temperature OF
Deadend Type Type Suspension
Armor Rod Length in. No. of Rods Rod Diameter in.
Bundled Conductor? Yes No No of Conductors in Bundle
Conductor Spacing in. Bundle Orientation
Spacer Type Spacer Weight Ibs
SHIELD WIRE:
Size, Stranding & Type
Complete Cable Diameter in. Weight Ibs/ft
Unloaded Tension at the Average Temperature of the Coldest Month:
Initial Ibs Final Ibs Temperature OF
Deadend Type Type Suspension
Armor Rod Length in. No. of Rods Rod Diameter in.
SPAN LENGTHS:
Ruling ft Minimum ft Maximum ft
TERRAIN:
DESCRIPTION:
by:
Vibration Dampers 9911301YER,

Transmission 10-500-01
Sags and Tensions for Conductors
on Wood Pole Lines
General Typical Transmission Conductor Tensions
(Initial Tension at NESC Medium Load)
The sag and tension data given herein are Conductor Tension (lb)
based upon the assumption that conductor 246.9 AAAC 1,525
tension, at any particular time,will be the 397.5 ACSR(26/7) 4,220
same in each span throughout a series of 397.5 AAC 2,200
715.5 ACSR(24/7) 7,100
spans of varying length between deadend 795.OACSR(45/7) 5,900
poles.Wood pole construction is quite 795.0 AAC 4,100
flexible. Therefore,when temperature 954.0 ACSR(54/7) 11,100
changes or changes in environmental 954.0AAC 4,900
1272.OACSR(36/1) 6,900
loading, such as ice or wind occurrence, 1272.OAAC 6,800
tend to cause different tensions to exist in Notes:
spans of different lengths,the poles and 1.These tensions apply to new installations only.For
conductor support systems are flexible reconductoring projects where clearance to existing
distribution underbuild is less than 1 V-0"at the
enough to equalize these differences and the structure,tensions may have to be increased to
conductor tension will be substantially the maintain adequate mid-span clearance.Contact
same in all spans.Thus, it is possible to T&D Design for sag and tension information.
2. Refer to applicable structural drawings so that proper
calculate the length of a theoretical span, framing dimensions are used when applying these
which will have the same changes in tension values.
conductor tension due to changes of
temperature and environmental loading as Typical Distribution Conductor Tensions
will be found in a series of spans of varying (Initial Tension at NESC Medium Load)
lengths between deadends. This calculated
theoretical span length is called the"Ruling Conductor Tension (lb)
Span"for a section of line between No.4 ACSR 830
deadends. For a more complete discussion 2/0 AAAC 1,350
2/0 ACSR 1,450
of ruling span, see"General Design Criteria 336.4 AAC 2,250
for Transmission Lines"on page 13-010-01 795.0 AAC 4,100
of this Transmission Manual.
Typical Tension Values
The following tables illustrate typical
tension values for single pole wood
construction. Use of these tension values
eliminates the need for vibration dampers
provided that the terrain is flat and the
ruling span is 300'or less.
��POW R Conductor Sags/Tensions on Wood Pole Lines
Revised 10/03

10-500-02
Transmission
Application of Sag and Tension Transit Method
Data
1. Stringing conductor with supports at the
1. It is important to note the difference same or nearly the same elevation
between initial and final sag tables. Sit T
SF Si Si
Initial sag tables are to be used for
I
conductor stringing. Final sag tables are Target for Sightingsin
for engineering data purposes only and co dluctor Minimum Clearance level
to Ground
are to be used for conductor stringing
only if the conductor has been removed Span length
from an existing line for maintenance
purposes and is being restrung. Where: Si=Initial Stringing Sag
2. When tension stringing is used,the SF=Final Maximum Sag
payout tension should not exceed the 2. Stringing conductor with supports at
120°F initial tension of the conductor. different elevations
3. For stringing conductor,the conductor If the% slope, (H/L x 100),is greater than
temperature should be determined as 30%,the slope span(Ls)must be computed
accurately as practicable.The and used to determine the proper stringing
thermometer should be enclosed in a sag.
section of conductor with the center
strand removed.The thermometer
Scope span l►sl
should be placed horizontally, a H IS i
minimum of 10'above the ground, for s i l S}F S i Target for
sufficient time to allow the thermometer '-Sighting level sagging in
to adjust. Minimum Clearance conductor
to Ground
4. For sag and tension requirements for 1
spans other than those covered in the L Span length(L)
following tables, contact T&D Design.
When the slope span must be computed and
Measurement of Sag used as the stringing span, it is determined
from the following formula:
The transit method is a more accurate
method for determining sag and should be L S = L2 + H2
used on all lines with ruling spans greater With: Si=Initial Stringing Sag
than 500'and all lines 230-kV or higher in
SF=Final Maximum Sag
voltage.
Conductor Sags/Tensions on Wood Pole Lines ''pO R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 10-500-03
Stopwatch Method The return waves may be detected by a man
on the pole placing his hand lightly on the
Since it is often not convenient to use the conductor or readings may be made from
sight method for checking conductor sag, an the ground by throwing a light, dry cord
alternate method is available which involves over the conductor about three feet from the
the timing of a traveling mechanical shock support.This cord may be used to initiate
wave on a conductor as it is reflected back the wave as well as to detect its return and it
and forth between supports, and the use of a is not necessary to climb the structure.
Time-Sag table.
The length of time required for the wave to
This method requires a stopwatch as the return to the near support corresponds to a
calculation involves a square of the time, definite sag. The Time-Sag table illustrates
and consequently, any error is magnified in this relationship.
the calculated sag value. For convenience,
the Time-Sag table is usually used,but sag NOTE: To calculate the time of return of
may be computed from: other waves, simply select the combination
of values from the following table that
2 p Time(in sec) represents the number of wave returns
Sag(in ft) = 1.0063 Number of Return desired. For example,the time of return of
Waves Counted the 8th wave is the sum of the 3rd and 5th,
while the 1 Oth wave return is twice the time
of the 5th.
The relation between"sag"and"time for
return waves"is independent of span length, warning: Care must be taken not to count
tension, or the size and type of conductor. "one"when the impulse is given to the line,
A sharp blow on the conductor near one
but to count"one"on the first return of the
«
support will initiate a wave which will Wave. In other words, count hit, one,two,
travel to the next support where it will be three, etc."
partially reflected.The reflection will travel
back to be reflected again from the near
support. These reflected waves will continue
back and forth until they are damped out by
energy loss.
��POW R Conductor Sags/Tensions on Wood Pole Lines
Revised 10/03

10-500-04
Transmission
Time -Sag Table
Return of Wave
3 ra 5 to 3 ra 5 to 3 ra 5 to 3 ra 5tn
Sag Time Time Sag Time Time Sag Time Time Sag Time Time
(ft.) (sec.) (sec.) (ft.) (sec.) (sec.) (ft.) (sec.) (sec.) (ft.) (sec.) (sec.)
0.5 2.1 3.5 4.2 6.1 10.2 7.9 8.4 14.0 11.6 10.2 17.0
0.6 2.3 3.9 4.3 6.2 10.3 8.0 8.5 14.1 11.7 10.2 17.0
0.7 2.5 4.2 4.4 6.3 10.5 8.1 8.5 14.2 11.8 10.3 17.1
0.8 2.7 4.5 4.5 6.3 10.6 8.2 8.6 14.3 11.9 10.3 17.2
0.9 2.8 4.7 4.6 6.4 10.7 8.3 8.6 14.4 12.0 10.4 17.3
1.0 3.0 5.0 4.7 6.5 10.8 8.4 8.7 14.4 12.1 10.4 17.3
1.1 3.1 5.2 4.8 6.6 10.9 8.5 8.7 14.5 12.2 10.4 17.4
1.2 3.3 5.5 4.9 6.6 11.0 8.6 8.8 14.6 12.3 10.5 17.5
1.3 3.4 5.7 5.0 6.7 11.1 8.7 8.8 14.7 12.4 10.5 17.6
1.4 3.5 5.9 5.1 6.8 11.3 8.8 8.9 14.8 12.5 10.6 17.6
1.5 3.7 6.1 5.2 6.8 11.4 8.9 8.9 14.9 12.6 10.6 17.7
1.6 3.8 6.3 5.3 6.9 11.5 9.0 9.0 15.0 12.7 10.7 17.8
1.7 3.9 6.5 5.4 6.9 11.6 9.1 9.0 15.0 12.8 10.7 17.8
1.8 4.0 6.7 5.5 7.0 11.7 9.2 9.1 15.1 12.9 10.7 17.9
1.9 4.1 6.9 5.6 7.1 11.8 9.3 9.1 15.2 13.0 10.8 18.0
2.0 4.2 7.0 5.7 7.1 11.9 9.4 9.2 15.3 13.1 10.8 18.0
2.1 4.3 7.2 5.8 7.2 12.0 9.5 9.2 15.4 13.2 10.9 18.1
2.2 4.4 7.4 5.9 7.3 12.1 9.6 9.3 15.4 13.3 10.9 18.2
2.3 4.5 7.6 6.0 7.3 12.2 9.7 9.3 15.5 13.4 10.9 18.2
2.4 4.6 7.7 6.1 7.4 12.3 9.8 9.4 15.6 13.5 11.0 18.3
2.5 4.7 7.9 6.2 7.4 12.4 9.9 9.4 15.7 13.6 11.0 18.4
2.6 4.8 8.0 6.3 7.5 12.5 10.0 9.5 15.8 13.7 11.1 18.4
2.7 4.9 8.2 6.4 7.6 12.6 10.1 9.5 15.8 13.8 11.1 18.5
2.8 5.0 8.3 6.5 7.6 12.7 10.2 9.6 15.9 13.9 11.1 18.6
2.9 5.1 8.5 6.6 7.7 12.8 10.3 9.6 16.0 14.0 11.2 18.6
3.0 5.2 8.6 6.7 7.7 12.9 10.4 9.6 16.1 14.1 11.2 18.7
3.1 5.3 8.8 6.8 7.8 13.0 10.5 9.7 16.2 14.2 11.3 18.8
3.2 5.3 8.9 6.9 7.9 13.1 10.6 9.7 16.2 14.3 11.3 18.8
3.3 5.4 9.1 7.0 7.9 13.2 10.7 9.8 16.3 14.4 11.3 18.9
3.4 5.5 9.2 7.1 8.0 13.3 10.8 9.8 16.4 14.5 11.4 19.0
3.5 5.6 9.3 7.2 8.0 13.4 10.9 9.9 16.5 14.6 11.4 19.0
3.6 5.7 9.5 7.3 8.1 13.5 11.0 9.9 16.5 14.7 11.5 19.1
3.7 5.8 9.6 7.4 8.1 13.6 11.1 10.0 16.6 14.8 11.5 19.2
3.8 5.8 9.7 7.5 8.2 13.7 11.2 10.0 16.7 14.9 11.5 19.2
3.9 5.9 9.8 7.6 8.2 13.7 11.3 10.1 16.8 15.0 11.6 19.3
4.0 6.0 10.0 7.7 8.3 13.8 11.4 10.1 16.8
4.1 6.1 10.1 7.8 8.4 13.9 11.5 10.1 16.9
IDAHO
Conductor Sags/Tensions on Wood Pole Lines WNPOW R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 10-500-05
General Tensions for Sizing Construction Equipment
The following tables provide a general range of tensions for numerous conductors and static
wires. The information provided is intended to be used for sizing construction equipment; it is
not to be used for design or stringing purposes.All tensions are for the conductors at their final
condition(5-10 years). The actual tensions may be higher if the line is new(0-5 years). Consult
with T&D Design for conductors not listed or if your conditions do not meet those described
above.
The charts apply only to single pole construction with ruling spans in the range of 250'-400'.
Conductor Tension Chart for Sizing Construction Equipment
Tensions (lbs)
Conductor 0 OF 30 OF 60 OF 90 OF 120 OF
Code Name High Low High Low High Low High Low High Low
No.4 ACSR 660 150 520 135 400 125 300 120 250 115
Swanate
2/0 AAAC 1550 400 1160 370 840 320 610 285 470 235
Anaheim
2/0 ACSR 1530 535 1160 410 795 375 700 370 570 320
Quail
4/0 ACSR 2410 830 1830 650 1400 660 1100 580 900 500
Penguin
246.9 AAAC 2450 570 1850 500 1335 450 975 370 750 320
Alliance
336.4 AAC 1750 1000 1195 830 945 675 790 540 690 460
Tulip
397.5 ACSR 4645 3150 3595 2445 2775 1945 2180 1420 1790 1200
Ibis
715.5 ACSR 7370 5430 5575 4160 4265 3060 3365 2245 2775 1890
Stilt
715.5 ACSR 8060 6225 6300 4860 4915 3760 3895 2740 3315 2410
Starling
795.0 ACSR 8945 4730 6980 3825 5450 3010 4320 2345 3675 2130
Drake
795.0 ACSR 6485 4185 4800 3260 3670 2400 2930 1835 2450 1525
Tern
795.0 AAC 4270 2500 2950 2050 2320 1550 1930 1250 1670 1050
Arbutus
1pVM
p R Conductor Sags/Tensions on Wood Pole Lines
Revised 10/03

10-500-06
Transmission
Conductor Tension Chart for Sizing Construction Equipment continued
Tensions (Ibs)
Conductor 0 OF 30 OF 60 OF 90 OF 120 OF
Code Name High Low High Low High Low High Low High Low
954.0 ACSR 9650 8080 7470 6200 5825 4475 4630 3200 3820 2450
Cardinal
954.0 AAC 5050 3150 3500 2550 2760 1890 2300 1520 2000 1300
Magnolia
1272 ACSR 6500 5000 4520 3600 3680 2550 3140 2025 2775 1700
Skylark
1272 ACSR 10050 8190 7280 6050 5600 4125 4500 2960 3800 2350
Bittern
1272 AAC 6800 4900 4730 3800 3725 2770 3100 2175 2675 1800
Narcissus
Static Wire Tension Chart for Sizing Construction Equipment
Tensions (Ibs)
0 OF 30°F 60°F 90°F 120°F
Wire Size High Low High Low High Low High Low High Low
5/16 EHS 3400 1900 3050 1725 2760 1550 2450 1400 2150 1200
3/8 EHS 4640 2600 4220 2400 3800 2150 3400 1900 3000 1700
5/16 HS 2460 1400 2150 1200 1875 1025 1600 850 1350 700
3/8 HS 3300 1900 2900 1650 2500 1400 2160 1175 1850 950
Conductor Sags/Tensions on Wood Pole Lines 9@Pd�W R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 11-010-01
ARMOR RODS
General Armor rods are intended to Armor rod may be used to repair damaged
protect conductors against bending, ACSR and aluminum conductor when the
compression, abrasion, and arc-over,and to damage is limited to no more than 50% of
provide repair.The degree of protection the OUTER STRAND LAYER.When more
needed on a specific line depends upon a extensive damage exists, a formed wire
number of factors such as line design, splice (see section 11-020),or a
temperature tension, and vibration. compression splice should be used.
Typical Applications Table 1 illustrates the correct armor rod to
be used on overhead shield wires.
Table 1.Armor Rods for OH Shield Wire
OD/w
Shield PLP Armor IPCo ECMS
Wire Cat.No. Rod Cat.ID Code
5/16 HS AR-1128 .512 4223 TRD516
5/16 EHS AR-1128 .512 4223 TRD516
3/8 EHS AR-1130 .560 4224 TRD38
1/2 EHS AR-1136 .776 4225
Table 2 illustrates the correct armor rod to
® be used on aluminum and ACSR
conductors.
Table 2.Armor Rods for AL and ACSR
OD/w
PLP Armor IPCo ECMS
Conductor Cat.No. Rod Cat. ID Code
Ames AR-0114 0.588 4202
0 Anaheim AR-0120 0.781 4204 TRD20
Quail AR-0120 0.781 4204 TRD20
Alliance AR-0124 0.927 4205 TRD246
Armor rods are used on polymer and Penguin AR-0124 0.927 4205 TRD246
Ibis AR-0132 1.283 4207 TRD397
porcelain insulators with clamp top Stilt AR-0139 1.656 4210 TRD715
conductor fittings, as shown in the above Starling AR-0139 1.671 4210 TRD715
illustrations.Armor rods are used on most Arbutus AR-01 1.6 42 TRD7
Tern AR-0140 1.683 4211 00 TRD71155
new single pole construction whether the Drake AR-0141 1.728 4211
conductor fitting is a trunion clamp or a Cardinal AR-0143 1.816 4212
suspension shoe. Most installations require
armor rod or vibration dampers or a For additional information showing the
combination of both based upon an analysis manufacturer's recommended installation
by the design engineer. methods, see the Preformed Line Products
(PLP)catalog.
99�R Armor Rods
Revised 05/11

11-010-02
Transmission
Installation Instructions-General Notes Size,color code, One pitch
&center mark length
1. Armor rods are precision devices. To
insure a tight assembly,they should be
stored and handled carefully.
2. Apply no more than one-half the 7. Center marking the conductor should be
number of rods per set at a time on done with a felt marking pen or lumber
smaller sizes. On conductors 4/0 and crayon. Do not scratch the conductor.
larger, do not attempt to apply more g. Armor rods are not to be reused.
than 4 rods at a time.
9. If the armor rod is being used to restore
3. Damaged conductor can result from the damaged conductor,no more than two
application of too many rods at one installations of armor rod shall be used
time. in any 200'of conductor, except under
4. Distorting the rods during application the direction of the engineer.Where
will result in an assembly that is loose there is repeated damage at the same
on the conductor.Under certain span or in consecutive spans, all
vibratory conditions,this would cause conductor in these spans shall be
severe abrasion to the conductor and the replaced.
armor rods.
5. The alignment of the ends of the rods
should be maintained within 2".
6. The center of the armor rods should not
be offset more than one pitch length
(see illustration) from the center of the
support point.
6" Point of
min. damage
When centered over the point of damage,the ends of the repair armor
should not be positioned closer than 6"to existing armor rod.
Armor Rods ''POWER
Revised 10/03

Transmission Revised 01/17 11-020-01
Formed Wire Splices
Length
7 Center Markand Color Code
a
0
Identification Tape
General. The following formed wire splices clean, and inhibitor compound applied
are approved for repair of damage to the immediately prior to installing the splice.Not
aluminum strands ofACSR transmission more than two installations of armor rod or
conductors.These splices will restore original formed wire splices shall be used in any 200'of
conductivity and full rated breaking strength to conductor except under the direction of the
the conductor,provided the damage does not engineer.Where there is repeated damage at the
extend into the steel core wires.Also,they may same span or in consecutive spans, all conductor
be used only if the strands are not severely in these spans shall be replaced.
kinked or basketed. If any steel core wires are Table 1 illustrates the correct formed wire splice
damaged,then a compression splice must be to be used on various ACSR conductors. For
used. additional information,refer to section 02-252 in
the Materials Manual.
Since this is acting as an electrical splice, it is
very important that the aluminum strands to be When centered over the point of damage,the
covered by the splice be brushed until bright and ends of the formed wire splice should not be
positioned closer than 6"to existing armor rod.
Table 1 Formed Wire Splice Selection
Conductor IPCo Cat.ID Color Code #of Subsets Installed Length(in) Preformed No.
Penguin 4230 Red 3 52 LS-0134
Alliance 4230 Red 3 52 LS-0134
Ibis 4231 Purple 3 83 LS-0142
Stilt 53279 Green 4 121 LS-0149
Starling 4232 Black 4 127 LS-0150
Drake 53280 Purple 4 137 LS-0151
Tern 4232 Black 4 127 LS-0150
Arbutus 53279 Green 4 121 LS-0149
Cardinal 4233 Blue 4 143 LS-0153
Bittern 4234 Yellow 4 165 LS-0155
Skylark 4234 Yellow 4 165 LS-0155
OPGW DNO-5484 49284 Yellow 65 3600105
OPGW DNO-4382 49310 Brown 70 3600106
6" Pant of
min. dama�77
POWER. Formed Wire Splices (For Damage Repair Only)

Transmission 11-300-01
Wraplock Ties
Application
This section is for maintenance information only. These pin insulators are not to be used for new
construction.
Color code Wraplock Neoprene center
pad � section
Identification tape
Gritted leg Cable section -� Gritted leg
46-kV Application—Pin Insulators
Conductor Preformed Part No. Cat. ID PassPort Code
Ames UT-MS-8985
Sparate
Anaheim UT-MS-7573 4274 TFTL20
Quail
Alliance
Penguin UT-MS-8986 4275 TFTL40
Ames w/Armor
Sparate w/Armor UT-MS-8989
Ibis
Anaheim w/Armor UT-MS-7570 4276 TFTL20A
Quail w/Armor
Alliance w/Armor UT-MS-8990 18578 TFTL40A
Penguin w/Armor
Ibis w/Armor UT-MS-8991 TFTL397A
Arbutus UT-MS-7029
MPW R Wraplock Ties
Revised 10/03

11-300-02
Transmission
46-kV Application—Post Insulators
Conductor Preformed Part No. Cat. ID PassPort Code
Ames UTF-1204
Sparate
Anaheim UTF-1206
Quail
Alliance
Penguin UTF-1208
Ames w/Armor
Sparate w/Armor UTF-1209
Ibis
Anaheim w/Armor UTF-1211
Quail w/Armor
Alliance w/Armor UTF-1212
Penguin w/Armor
Ibis w/Armor UT-MS-8276
Arbutus UTF-1213
69-kV Application—Pin Insulators
Conductor Preformed Part No. Cat. ID PassPort Code
Ames UT-MS-8093
Sparate
Anaheim UT-MS-7374 18579 TFTM20
Quail
Alliance
Penguin UT-MS-8094 4273 TFTM40
Ames w/Armor
Sparate w/Armor UT-MS-8988
Ibis
Anaheim w/Armor UT-MS-8944 4271 TFTM20A
Quail w/Armor
Alliance w/Armor UT-MS-8943 4270 TFTM40A
Penguin w/Armor
Ibis w/Armor UT-MS-8993 4272 TFTM397A
Arbutus UT-MS-8942
IDAW
Wraplock Ties WOPO R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 11-300-03
69-kV Application—Post Insulators
Conductor Preformed Part No. Cat. ID PassPort Code
Ames UT-MS-8987
Sparate
Anaheim UT-MS-7378
Quail
Alliance
Penguin UT-MS-6805
Ames w/Armor
Sparate w/Armor UT-MS-8992
Ibis
Anaheim w/Armor UT-MS-6852
Quail w/Armor
Alliance w/Armor UT-MS-6674
Penguin w/Armor
Ibis w/Armor UT-MS-8995
Arbutus UT-MS-7691
Arbutus w/Armor UT-MS-8996
MENAM
MPW R Wraplock Ties
Revised 10/03

Transmission 1 2-01 U-U 1
Airspace Evaluation Requirements
Certain types of construction require special c. Any heliport:
information to be prepared and submitted to
the Methods&Materials Department.Where Nearest point e
penetration of the airspace may be involved, of any runway* 251 s\o
both Federal and State laws require that a
notice of construction form,prepared by 5,000 Foot Maximum
Methods&Materials,be submitted to the Example. 35'pole within 744'
appropriate regulatory body at least 30 days
prior to the beginning of construction. This
special information and approval procedure is Clarification
necessary where the answer to any of the
following questions is"yes". 1. The runway is that portion of the airport
used by aircraft for takeoff and landing. It
1. Does any portion of the structure or does not include separate taxiways. The
conductors exceed 200'above the ground nearest point of any runway may be either
or water level at its location(e.g. some the end or the side of that runway;hence,
river and canyon crossings)? the imaginary sloping surface extends
outward and upward completely
2. Does the construction or alteration take surrounding all runways.
place on airport or heliport property?
2. The sloping surface defining airspace has
3. In the vicinity of an airport or heliport, as its beginning point the elevation of the
does any portion of the construction or runway. Therefore,when checking to see
alteration penetrate any of the following if a structure will penetrate into this
angles: airspace,be sure to determine the
difference in ground elevation between
a. Any airport with a runway more than the structure site and the airport runway.
3,200'in length:
3. An airport may have several runways of
Nearest point different lengths. If any runway exceeds
of any runway*
100:1 Slope 3,200'in length,the 100:1 slope applies to
all runways.
20,000 Foot Maximum
Example. 35'pole within 2,975' 4. If the pole will be shielded from the
runway by an existing permanent and
b. Any airport with longest runway no substantial structure or natural terrain of
more than 3,200 feet in length: equal or greater height, so that it is
Nearest point evident that air navigation would not be
of any runway* adversely affected,then filing may not be
50:1 Slope required. Contact the Methods&
10,000 Foot Maximum Materials Department.
Example. 35'pole within 1,488' Information required by Methods&Materials
include all of the following:
1. Is the proposed construction new or an
alteration?
AW
Sh'.M—POMR Airspace Evaluation Requirements
Revised 06/08

12-010-02
Transmission
2. Is the proposed construction permanent or 8. Give the name and title of the person
temporary?If it is temporary,state the compiling this information.
length of time.
Any questions or problems encountered in
3. Give a complete description of the compiling the above information should be
proposed construction.Make this referred to Methods&Materials for
description narrative. assistance.
4. Give an accurate location of the structure Construction in the Vicinity of FAA
with one of the following: Air Navigational Aids
a. The structure location may be plotted Some FAA electronic air navigational aids are
directly on a Quadrangle Chart. located away from airports,in areas where an
b. The structure may be plotted directly airspace evaluation would not be required for
on a portion of the Airport Plan, line construction.Where overhead line
which may be available from the construction is to take place within the
manager of the airport involved. following distances from FAA navigational
equipment,Methods&Materials should be
C. The structure maybe located with contacted. The FAA will be notified of the
respect to the runway as follows: construction so that they may make their
1. Off the end of the runway evaluation and equipment modifications if
d needed.
1
1. VOR. (A white conical-shaped building
d 2 within an FAA security-fenced area.)
01 Contact Methods&Materials if
construction should pass within 1 mile of
2. Off the side of the runway the VOR structure.
2. Outer Marker and Other Electronic
Navigation
d 2-1 d, Facilities. (A
i small antenna array
located up to several
d. Describe the location of the structure miles beyond the
with respect to the nearest city or end of the runway
town, airport,highways, streets, and in line with the
prominent terrain features, etc. runway. It may be
5. Give the elevation of the site above mean security-fenced or pole-mounted.)Notify
sea level,and the height of the structure, Methods&Materials if line construction
including appurtenances and lighting if passes within 20'of an FAA outer marker.
any,above ground or water if so situated.
Note,if elevation above sea level is not
available,the elevation relative to any
given point at the airport may be
submitted.
6. Give the estimated work schedule dates,
including starting and completion dates.
7. Describe any special aviation marking or
lighting on the structure.
EMIDiAHO
Airspace Evaluation Requirements W—PO IER
Revised 06/08

Transmission Revised 05/14 12-1 UU-01
Transmission Line Clearing Specifications
Clearance values shown below account for the minimum vegetation approach distance of 10'
(12'for 345-kV, 18'for 500-kV) in any direction to transmission lines and for additional conductor
movement.For vertical distance values,this additional conductor movement is the difference between
everyday sag conditions and the sag at the maximum thermal condition. For horizontal values,the
additional conductor movement is the conductor blowout at anticipated wind conditions.The values
shown below do NOT account for anticipated vegetation growth between clearing cycles.The
Transmission Line Clearing Specialist will estimate the vegetation growth toward the conductor between
clearing cycles based on variables such as length of trimming cycle,vegetation species,typical growth
rates,length of growing season, elevation, availability of water, soil type, etc.The total clearing distance
to be achieved at the time of transmission vegetation management work(Clearances defined by FAC-003-
3 R1 and R2,MVCD Table 2) shall be the sum of clearances shown below and the anticipated vegetation
growth during the cycle.When conditions exist that prevent crews from obtaining the 20'plus tree
growth,these trees will be documented and maintained with more frequency than normal scheduled
clearing cycles to ensure safe working clearances under maximum operating conditions.
Minimal Minimal Preferred Structure
Line Undergrowth Side Clear Cut Vegetation
Voltage Clearance Clearance Width* Clear Distance
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet)
Single Pole
Clear Cut -
69-kV 20 18 50* 20
138-kV 20 18 50* 20
161-kV 20 22 50* 20
�► 230-kV 20 22 50* 20
Side
Clearance
Conductor
Undergrowth
Clearance
Structure
f Clearance
H-Frame
Clear Cut
69-kV 20 28 90* 20
138-kV 20 28 90* 20
Side
161-kV 20 32 100* 20
230-kV 20 32 100* 20
Conductor 345-kV 20 34 120* 20
Undergrowth 500-kV t See information on the following page
Clearance
NOTE. Spans longer than 1200'may require
greater clearance. Contact T&D Department for
Structure specific dimensions.
F Clearance
POWER. Transmission Line Clearing Specifications

12-100-02 Revised 05/14
Transmission
Minimal Minimal Preferred Structure
Line Undergrowth Side Clear Cut Vegetation
Voltage Clearance Clearance Width* Clear Distance
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet)
Lattice Tower
Clear Cut
230-kV 20 20
345-kV 25 20
500-kV t 20
NOTE. Due to the variety span lengths,
Side
Clearance conductors and tensions, contact the T&D
Department for specific dimensions for side
clearance and clear cut widths for steel lattice
Conductor
Undergrowth trnncmiccinn lime
Clearance Structure
Clearance
* Determined by Transmission Line Easements or Permitted Rights of Way.
t For all 500-kV transmission lines,due to the variety span length, conductors and tensions, contact the T&D
Department for specific vertical and side clearances dimensions, and clear cut widths.
Transmission Line Clearing Specifications "`�RR

Transmission Revised 05/14 12-100-03
Undergrowth Clearances
Zone A
L I
Conductor
20 Ft Clearance
(Minimum) Zone A .................
Zone A 50 Ft Clearance --- ------ ..............
(Preferred) ... -------- -----
................................... ..........
Zone B
Zone Plant Species Zone B Zone Definitions
Zone A:Grasses, legumes,herbs, Zone A:When the conductor to ground
ferns,and low growing shrubs. clearance is less than 50',all tree species
Zone B:All deciduous and conifer should be removed.
trees. Zone B:When the conductor to ground
clearance is greater than 50',all tree species
should be removed if they have less than 50'
of clearance,20'minimum.
IDAHO
NEW-POMR. Transmission Line Clearing Specifications
Al I-C­11Y

Transmission 13-010-01
General Design Criteria for Transmission Lines
Route Selection specification drawings.After construction,
the final plan-profile drawings become the
Transmission line routing requires thorough permanent record of right-of-way data,
investigation and study of several different useful in line operation and maintenance or
routings to assure that the most practical future modifications.
route is selected,taking into consideration
both the environmental criteria and cost of Structure Location
construction.
For larger projects, aerial photography, and Structure location is the design process,
reconnaissance, contributes substantially to which determines the height, location, and
type of consecutive structures on the plan-
route selection. The location of preliminary profile sheets.Actual economy and safety of
corridors is improved when high altitude the transmission line depends on how well
views are used to,rapidly and accurately this final step in the design is performed.
inventory existing land use. The structure locating should closely
Final route selection,whether it be a large conform to the design criteria established
or small project, is a matter of judgment and for the line.
requires sound evaluation of divergent The following factors are involved in
requirements, including cost of easements, structure locating and are to be considered
costs of clearing, ease of maintenance as for good design:
well as what effect the line may have on the
environment. Vertical Clearances
1. Basic,level ground
Plan-Profile Drawings 2. Crossings
3. Side hill
Transmission line plan-profile drawings 4. Underbuild
serve an important function in linking Horizontal Clearances
together the various stages involved in the 1. For insulator swing condition
design and construction of the line.The 2. To edge of right-of-way,vertical
drawings are prepared based on the route obstructions and steep side hills
survey to show the location and elevation of
all natural and man-made features,to be Uplift
traversed by or which are adjacent to the Horizontal Span Limitations Due to:
proposed line,which effect right-of-way,
line design, and construction. The drawings 1. Vertical sag-clearance requirement
2. Conductor separation
are then used to complete line design work
such as structure locating. During the 3. Structure strength
material requisition and construction period, Angle and Deadend Structures
the drawings are used to determine material 1. Guying arrangements
quantities and serve as construction 2. Guy anchors
��DAW
POW R General Transmission Line Design Criteria
Revised 10/03

13-010-02
Transmission
The process of structure location begins at a weight of the loaded conductor from the
known or established conductor attachment lower support to the low point of sag.
point such as a substation take off structure,
angles in the line, etc.After these points are The following Figures 1, 2, and 3 illustrate
determined,the location of intermediate the concepts of wind span,weight span, and
structures is established. The location and uplift.
height of these structures is a matter of
economics and careful attention should be Ruling Span
made towards producing an optimal design. If all spans in a section of line between
Horizontal conductor clearances to deadends are of the same length,uniform
supporting structures are reduced by ice and wind loads will result in equal
insulator side swing under transverse wind conductor tensions on all spans. But, since
pressure if the insulator type is such that it span lengths usually vary in a transmission
is not restrained; for example, a suspension line, conductor tension will tend to become
insulator.This reduced clearance may limit greater in longer spans and less in shorter
the maximum allowable span length the spans.
structure can support. Suspension type A ruling span is an assumed uniform design
insulators will also deflect laterally at line span,which approximately portrays the
angle locations due to the transverse mechanical performance of a section of line
component of conductor tension. between its deadend supports. The use of a
Wind Span,Weight Span, and Uplift ruling span and the design of a line, assumes
that insulator string deflection and/or
Wind span is defined as the average of two flexing of the structures can occur so as to
adjacent spans.The wind span is the allow for equalization of tension in the
effective span length that transverse wind conductor between adjacent spans to the
forces act on when transferring forces from ruling span tensions. The purpose of a ruling
the conductor to the supporting structure. span in the design and construction of a line
The wind span also determines the amount is to provide a uniform span length,which is
of swing that suspension insulator representative of the various lengths of
assemblies will have due to the transverse spans between deadends so that sags and
wind force. clearances can be calculated for structure
locating and conductor stringing.
Weight span is the distance between the
conductor low points in spans adjacent to The formula for determining ruling spans:
the structure.Where conductor attachments
are at different elevations on adjacent �L,3+L23+L33+•••+Ln3
structures,the low point is not at mid-span RS L,=L2+L3+...+Ln
and will shift its position as the temperature where Ll,L2,L3,etc=the individual span
changes. lengths.
Uplift is defined as negative weight span. As can be seen from the formula,the exact
On steeply inclined slopes when the cold value of ruling span can only be calculated
sag curve shows the low point to be beyond after the structures have been located and all
the lower support structure,the conductor the span lengths determined. However, since
on the uphill span exerts upward forces on the ruling span must be known in advance of
the lower structure. The amount of this force structure locating, it must first be estimated.
at each attachment point is related to the
General Transmission Line Design Criteria 'POW R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 13-010-03
L 1 L2 L 1 + L2 = Sum of
Adjacent
Spans
L 1 + L2
= Wind Span
JMhh..J got
2
Wind Span - Figure 1.Wind Span
d 1 d 3 d 4
Low Points
d 2�
d = Distance to A
low point B
d 1 d 2 = Weight span
(Structure A)
Weight Weight Span
d 3 + d 4 = Weight span Span
(Structure B)
Figure 2.Weight Span
d3
d4
d 1 Low Points
—d 2�
A
B Low Points
Uplift Span d = Distance to
Structure A low point
Uplift Span
Structure B d 1 d 2 = Weight span
(Structure A)
d 3 + d 4 = Weight span
(Structure B)
Figure 3. Uplift Span
`IDAM
PMER General Transmission Line Design Criteria
Revised 10/03

13-010-04
Transmission
The ruling span value initially chosen It is important that the actual ruling span be
should be checked to see that it coordinates reasonably close to the ruling span value
reasonably well with the actual ruling span. that is used to locate structures. If this is not
If the difference between the estimated the case,there may significant differences
ruling span and actual ruling span is between the predicted conductor tensions
substantial,the locations of the structures and clearances, and the actual values.
should be reworked using the newer ruling
span. The following table illustrates the effect of
improper ruling spans.
Assumed Ruling Span is Assumed Ruling Span is
Greater Than Actual Ruling Span Less Than Actual Ruling Span
Conductor temperature is less than Actual sag is less than predicted Actual sag is greater than predicted
the temperature at which the conductor Increased Tensions. Clearance Problems.
was strung.
Conductor temperature is greater than Actual sag is greater than predicted Actual sag is less than predicted
the temperature at which the conductor Clearance Problems. Increased Tensions.
was strung.
RH
General Transmission Line Design Criteria W-�POWER
Revised 10/03

Transmission 13-020-01
Insulator Selection for Mechanical Strength
Suspension Insulator Selection Total Vertical Load
Insulators are selected based upon their Wv = Wb + Wi
intended use and the magnitude of the loads = total vertical load supported by
to be supported. The examples shown are the insulator string
based upon a transmission line with the Wb = bare weight of wire
following design parameters: = (weight span)(bare weight per
Conductor size: 795 kcmil 45/7 ACSR foot)
Diameter: 1.063" Wi = weight of ice on the line
= (A)(weight span)(weight of ice)
Bare Conductor Weight: 0.896 pounds per foot
where
Maximum Design Tension("): 8,825 pounds
at 1/4" ice,4 pounds per sq ft wind, 15°F Weight span = distance between low
Span Lengths: 1000'(all level spans) points of sag in adjacent
spans, in feet
Insulators for a suspension tower are Ai = cross-sectional area of the ice
selected based on the total load to be
supported including wire weight,weight of Then
radial ice,wind loading and load due to line Wb = (Y2 x 1000'+1/2 x 1000') (0.896)
angle. = 896 pounds
Calculation of the load to be supported for a Wi is simplified to
tangent tower with no line angle is as
follows: Wi = 1.244 t(d+t)(Weight Span)
Wi = 1.244(0.25) (1.063 +0.25)(1000)
= 408 pounds
where
d = conductor diameter, in inches
t = radial thickness of ice, in inches
The total vertical load is
Wv = Wb+Wi
= 896+408
= 1,304 pounds
Note: The effects of any maintenance load
and insulator assembly weight have been
omitted from these calculations. The
designer may increase the vertical loads to
account for these effects.
DAHO
NEW—POWER R Insulator Selection for Mechanical Strength
Revised 10/03

13-020-02
Transmission
Total Horizontal Load
Wh = total horizontal load supported by
the insulator string
= wind acting on the iced conductor
d+2t
W In = p (Wind Span)
12
p = wind pressure, in lbs per square foot
Wind span= average of the sum of the
adjacent spans, in feet
Thus:
W In = p d + 2t (wind span)
2 2
12 W r W v + W h
1.063+2(0.25) 1000 + 1000
W h = 4 = 1304 2 + 521 2
12 2
= 1,404 pounds
= 521 pounds
Note: In the case of an angle structure, the Total Resultant Load
tension pull under iced conditions due to the line
angle must be included in the horizontal load to The total resultant load(Wr)to be supported
be supported. It would be calculated as follows: by the suspension insulator string can now
be determined.
Line Angle
Wangle 2 Tmax sin I
2 j Therefore,the suspension insulators
selected for this structure must have a safe
Then working load of at least 1404 lbs. From the
Ball and Socket Insulators Table on page
d+2t 06-010-02, select the ANSI class 52-3
W h = p Wind Span insulators,with a 10,000 lb safe working
12 load rating.
(LiineAngle
+ 2 T sin
max
2
where
Tmax is conductor design tension
Insulator Selection for Mechanical Strength ' er R
Revised 10/03

Transmission 13-020-03
Deadend Insulator Selection Reference
Insulators for a deadend structure are Section 06-010 Suspension Type Insulators
selected on the basis of the maximum design
tension(T.)in the conductor to be
supported. Insulators used in a deadend
assembly shall have a safe working load that
is equal to or greater than the tmax design
value. For the line illustrated in the previous
example,the 795 kcmil 45/7 ACSR
conductor is installed to a tmax of 8,825#.
Therefore,the deadend insulators selected
for this line must have a safe working load
of at least 8,825#. From the Ball and Socket
Insulators Table on page 06-010-02, select
the ANSI class 52-3 insulators,with a
10,000 lb safe working load rating.
��POW R Insulator Selection for Mechanical Strength
Revised 10/03